Tekla Structures

Drawing Manual

Product version 15.0

February 2009
2009 Tekla Corporation

 2009 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries.
Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By
referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such
third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FLEXnet Copyright 2006 Acresso Software Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and
confidential technology provided by and owned by Acresso Software Inc. Of Chicago, Illinois, USA. Any use,
copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any
form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Acresso Software Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Except where expressly provided by Acresso Software Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be
construed to confer any license or rights under any of Acresso Softwares intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be
the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent
applications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.

Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................17
Audience ........................................................................................................................................................... 17
Additional help resources .................................................................................................................................. 17
Conventions used in this guide ......................................................................................................................... 18
Related guides .................................................................................................................................................. 19

Introduction to Drawings ........................................................................ 21

1.1

Basics ................................................................................................................................................... 21
Drawings integrated into the model.................................................................................................. 22
Capabilities....................................................................................................................................... 22

1.2

Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 23

1.3

Toolbars................................................................................................................................................ 25
Basic toolbars................................................................................................................................... 25

1.4

Using commands .................................................................................................................................. 28

Executing commands.......................................................................................................................
Selecting objects in drawings...........................................................................................................
Creating objects ...............................................................................................................................
Modifying objects .............................................................................................................................
Using commands simultaneously.....................................................................................................
Ending commands ...........................................................................................................................

1.5

Drawing types ....................................................................................................................................... 32

Single-part drawing ..........................................................................................................................
Assembly drawing ............................................................................................................................
Cast unit drawing .............................................................................................................................
General arrangement drawing .........................................................................................................
Multidrawing .....................................................................................................................................

28
29
30
31
31
31
32
32
35
35
36

1.6

Three levels of editing drawings ........................................................................................................... 37

1.7

Colors in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 37

Getting Started with Drawings ............................................................... 41

2.1

Opening drawings................................................................................................................................. 41

2.2

Drawing List contents and markings..................................................................................................... 42

Drawing List fields and buttons ........................................................................................................ 44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

Drawing status flags ......................................................................................................................... 46

2.3

Creating drawings ................................................................................................................................. 48

Before creating drawings..................................................................................................................
Setting drawing properties and rule sets ...................................................................................
Master Drawing Catalog...................................................................................................................
Saved settings ...........................................................................................................................
Rule set ......................................................................................................................................
Wizard file ..................................................................................................................................
Cloning template ........................................................................................................................
Adding saved settings to Master Drawing Catalog ....................................................................
Editing master drawing properties of saved settings .................................................................
Creating drawings using saved settings ....................................................................................
Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog ............................................................................
Editing master drawing properties of rule sets ...........................................................................
Editing master drawing properties and contents of wizard files .................................................
Creating drawings using rule sets ..............................................................................................
Adding a new cloning template to Master Drawing Catalog ......................................................
Editing master drawing properties of cloning templates ............................................................
Creating drawings using cloning templates ...............................................................................
Creating and adding preview images ........................................................................................
Selecting the displayed master drawings ..................................................................................
Displaying master drawing descriptions ....................................................................................
Working with folders ..................................................................................................................
Using search in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................................................................
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog .................................................
Using drawing-type-specific commands to create drawings.............................................................
Creating single-part or assembly drawings ................................................................................
Creating cast unit drawings .......................................................................................................
Creating general arrangement drawings ...................................................................................
Creating anchor bolt plans .........................................................................................................
Creating multi-drawings .............................................................................................................
Creating multiple drawings of the same part using properties dialog box .................................
Using AutoDrawings to create drawings ..........................................................................................
Creating multiple drawings of the same part using AutoDrawings ............................................
Creating drawings from drawing templates using AutoDrawings .............................................
Cloning through Drawing List ...........................................................................................................
Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings ...............................................................
Cloning general arrangement drawings .....................................................................................
Defining objects to be cloned .....................................................................................................
Creating drawings from cloning templates using Clone Drawing .............................................
Creating preview images of cloning templates ..........................................................................
View-specific dimension cloning.......................................................................................................
Marks in cloned drawings.................................................................................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

48
49
49
54
54
55
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
62
63
64
65
65
65
66
67
69
69
70
71
72
73
78
79
80
81
81
82
82
83
85
85
86
88
89

Checking dimensions and views in cloned drawings ....................................................................... 90

2.4

Working with drawings.......................................................................................................................... 90

Locking and freezing drawings.........................................................................................................
Drawing objects associated with model objects...............................................................................
Associative symbol ....................................................................................................................
Highlight changes in associative dimensions, marks, and notes ...............................................
Change symbols in printed drawings .........................................................................................
Creating static drawings ............................................................................................................
Updating drawings when the model changes ..................................................................................
Finding parts that have no drawings ................................................................................................
Modifying multiple drawings .............................................................................................................
Issuing drawings ..............................................................................................................................
Drawing revisions.............................................................................................................................
Creating revisions ......................................................................................................................
Changing revisions ....................................................................................................................
Deleting revisions ......................................................................................................................
Moving views to another drawing.....................................................................................................

2.5

Saving and closing drawings ................................................................................................................ 98

2.6

Drawing reference ................................................................................................................................ 98

Create Single-Part Drawing ...........................................................................................................
Create Assembly Drawing..............................................................................................................
Create Cast Unit Drawing ..............................................................................................................
Create General Arrangement Drawing...........................................................................................
Create Multidrawings .....................................................................................................................
Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing... ...........................................................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View....................................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model ...........................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Drawing View ...............................................
View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Part in Drawing View > Front, Top,
Back, Bottom, 3D ...........................................................................................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Section View................................................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View ....................................................................
View > Create Drawing View > Detail View ...................................................................................

91
91
92
92
93
93
93
94
95
95
95
96
96
96
97

100
101
103
104
105
107
108
108
108
109
109
110
110

Drawing Layout...................................................................................... 113

3.1

Introducing layouts.............................................................................................................................. 113

3.2

Table layouts ...................................................................................................................................... 114

Defining margins and spaces in drawings...................................................................................... 115

3.3

Working with tables............................................................................................................................. 116

Selecting tables to be included in the table layout ......................................................................... 117
Defining the location of tables in the table layout........................................................................... 117

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

Defining distances between tables.................................................................................................

Setting table scales and transparency ...........................................................................................
Replacing a table with another one ................................................................................................
Opening tables in Template Editor .................................................................................................
Adding images in drawing templates..............................................................................................
3.4

118
118
119
119
120

Key plan .............................................................................................................................................. 120

Drawing view as a key plan............................................................................................................ 121
DWG/DXF as a key plan ................................................................................................................ 122
Adding a key plan to a drawing layout............................................................................................ 122

3.5

Scale and location of drawing views ................................................................................................... 123

Automatically scaled drawing views ...............................................................................................
Using autoscale .......................................................................................................................
Scale change mode .................................................................................................................
Preferred size ..........................................................................................................................
Location of views in drawings.........................................................................................................
Setting the projection type .......................................................................................................
Setting the section and end view location ................................................................................
Including single part views in assembly drawing .....................................................................
Expanding shortened parts ............................................................................................................

3.6

Drawing size........................................................................................................................................ 126

Specifying drawing size..................................................................................................................
Automatically sizing drawings ........................................................................................................
Drawing sizes ..........................................................................................................................
Table layout .............................................................................................................................
Defining fixed drawing sizes...........................................................................................................
Defining calculated drawing sizes ..................................................................................................
Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings .....................................................................................

127
128
128
128
128
129
129

Dimensioning......................................................................................... 131
4.1

Dimension basics................................................................................................................................ 131

Dimension types.............................................................................................................................
Automatic dimensioning .................................................................................................................
Pre-defined dimension defaults ...............................................................................................
Manual dimensioning ....................................................................................................................
Dimension planes...........................................................................................................................

4.2

132
133
133
133
135

Part dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 137

Overall dimensions.........................................................................................................................
Main part overall ......................................................................................................................
Assembly part overall ..............................................................................................................
Part mark on dimension line ....................................................................................................
Internal dimensions ........................................................................................................................

123
123
124
124
124
124
125
126
126

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

137
138
138
138
139

Shape dimensions.......................................................................................................................... 139

Radius and bevel dimensions ........................................................................................................ 140
Unfolding dimensions..................................................................................................................... 141
4.3

Bolt dimensions .................................................................................................................................. 142

Bolt internal dimensions .................................................................................................................
Main and secondary part bolt internal dimensions ..................................................................
Skewed bolt groups .................................................................................................................
GOL, C/C, GAGE ...........................................................................................................................

4.4

Position dimensions............................................................................................................................ 145

Position bolts to and Position parts to ............................................................................................
Secondary part...............................................................................................................................
Embedded objects .........................................................................................................................
Skew secondary parts....................................................................................................................
Changing the direction of running dimensions ...............................................................................
Main part bolt position ....................................................................................................................
Additional bolt position dimensions ................................................................................................
Main part skew position..................................................................................................................
Skew position .................................................................................................................................
Centered parts and bolts................................................................................................................
Elevation dimensions .....................................................................................................................
Leading or trailing edge..................................................................................................................

4.5

143
143
144
144
147
149
150
150
151
151
151
152
153
153
155
157

Reinforcement dimensions ................................................................................................................. 157

Reinforcement dimension marks....................................................................................................
Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions...............................................................................
Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually ...............................................
Adding closing dimensions manually .......................................................................................
Adding reinforcement dimension lines ...........................................................................................

158
159
161
163
163

4.6

Dimensioning nested assemblies ....................................................................................................... 164

4.7

Using check dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 164

Using knock off dimensions ........................................................................................................... 166

4.8

Controlling dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 166

Combining dimensions...................................................................................................................
No option .................................................................................................................................
First option ...............................................................................................................................
Second option .........................................................................................................................
Third option .............................................................................................................................
Fourth option ...........................................................................................................................
Fifth option ...............................................................................................................................
4.5 option .................................................................................................................................
Combination distances ............................................................................................................
Combining bolt groups ...................................................................................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

167
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
172

Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line ..................................................................

Forward offset ................................................................................................................................
Recognizable distance ...................................................................................................................
Closing dimensions ........................................................................................................................
4.9

173
173
174
175

Automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings ................................................................ 176

Adjusting automatic grid dimensions..............................................................................................
Adjusting automatic part dimensions..............................................................................................
Adjusting maximum leader line length .....................................................................................
Dimensioning parts not entirely in the view .............................................................................
Adjusting the maximum number of outside dimensions ..........................................................
Using object group dimensioning rules in defining the dimensioned parts ..............................
Adjusting part dimension position ............................................................................................
Adding automatic text tags to part dimension lines .................................................................

177
183
183
184
185
186
188
196

4.10 Dimension appearance and location................................................................................................... 197

Accessing dimension settings ........................................................................................................
Selecting the dimension types .................................................................................................
Creating short extension lines .................................................................................................
Selecting angle .......................................................................................................................
Selecting the type of curved dimension ...................................................................................
Setting the dimension format..........................................................................................................
Placing dimensions ........................................................................................................................
Place ........................................................................................................................................
Preferred dim side ..........................................................................................................................
Aligning sloped dimension text.......................................................................................................
Adjusting dimension appearance ...................................................................................................
Text options .............................................................................................................................
Line, Arrow options ..................................................................................................................
Creating exaggerated dimensions ...........................................................................................
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions ..................................................................
Adjusting dimension mark settings.................................................................................................
Adjusting dimension mark contents .........................................................................................
Creating dimension tags ..........................................................................................................
Creating plate side marks manually ........................................................................................
Setting Advanced dimension options .............................................................................................
Creating plate side marks automatically ..................................................................................

199
200
200
201
202
202
204
205
206
207
207
208
209
209
210
211
211
211
213
213
215

4.11 Dimension reference........................................................................................................................... 215

Dimensioning properties ................................................................................................................
General dimensioning properties ...................................................................................................
Part dimensioning properties..........................................................................................................
Bolt dimensioning properties ..........................................................................................................
Position dimensioning properties ...................................................................................................
Dimension grouping properties ......................................................................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

216
216
217
218
219
220

Sub-assemblies..............................................................................................................................
Reinforcement dimensioning properties.........................................................................................
General arrangement drawing dimensioning properties ................................................................
Dimension properties ....................................................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension....................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Vertical Dimension .......................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Orthogonal Dimension ..................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Parallel Dimension........................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Perpendicular Dimension..............................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Free Dimension ............................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Orthogonal Reference Lines ...............................
Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Radial Reference Lines.......................................
Dimensioning > Add Radial Dimension .........................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Angular Dimension .......................................................................................
Dimensioning > Add Dimensions for all Parts................................................................................
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Combine Dimension Lines .....................................................
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines .............................................................
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines..........................................................
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add/Remove Dimension Point ...............................................
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Set Dimension Start Point .....................................................
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity........................................
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol .....................
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Change Symbol................................
Dimensioning > GA Dimensioning Settings... ................................................................................
Combining options .........................................................................................................................
Use options ....................................................................................................................................

221
221
221
222
223
224
224
224
224
224
225
225
226
226
227
227
228
228
228
229
229
229
230
230
231
233

Drawing Properties ............................................................................... 235

5.1

Common drawing properties............................................................................................................... 236

User-defined attributes in drawings................................................................................................ 237
Protection ....................................................................................................................................... 238
Placing ........................................................................................................................................... 239

5.2

Drawing view properties ..................................................................................................................... 241

Defining which drawing views to create .........................................................................................
Defining exact drawing view scales ...............................................................................................
Displaying neighbor parts in drawing views ...................................................................................
Properties of individual views.........................................................................................................
Editing view label ...........................................................................................................................
Single-part views in assembly drawings ........................................................................................
Defining part orientation in drawing views......................................................................................
Coordinate system .................................................................................................................
Part rotation in drawing views .................................................................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

242
242
243
244
246
246
247
247
248

Defining front view for columns ................................................................................................

Defining concrete part orientation ............................................................................................
Defining plate orientation .........................................................................................................
Unfolding in single-part drawings ...................................................................................................
Shortening parts in drawings .........................................................................................................
Displaying view names automatically in drawings..........................................................................
Displaying deformed parts in drawings ..........................................................................................
Part deformations ....................................................................................................................
Displaying part openings and recesses in drawings ......................................................................
5.3

250
250
251
253
254
255
256
256
256

Drawing section view properties ......................................................................................................... 258

Adding section views to drawings ..................................................................................................
Section view properties ..................................................................................................................
Section view direction.....................................................................................................................
View direction marks ................................................................................................................
Section view label and mark...........................................................................................................
Section mark ............................................................................................................................
Section view label ....................................................................................................................
Aligning section views with main views ..........................................................................................

259
259
260
261
262
262
265
267

5.4

Detail properties.................................................................................................................................. 267

5.5

Part and neighbor part properties ....................................................................................................... 269

Part representation.........................................................................................................................
Adjusting the part center line type ..................................................................................................
Orientation marks ...........................................................................................................................
Mark location ...........................................................................................................................
Compass direction ...................................................................................................................
Orientation symbol ...................................................................................................................
Connecting side marks ............................................................................................................
Orientation marks in single-part views .....................................................................................
Setting up orientation marking........................................................................................................

5.6

Bolt and weld properties...................................................................................................................... 278

Bolts ...............................................................................................................................................
User-defined bolt symbols..............................................................................................................
Welds .............................................................................................................................................
Merging weld symbols....................................................................................................................

5.7

278
280
281
282

Reinforcement properties.................................................................................................................... 282

Setting the visibility of reinforcement in drawings...........................................................................
Adjusting reinforcing bars ........................................................................................................
Hiding reinforcing bar lines ......................................................................................................
Reinforcement appearance ............................................................................................................

5.8

269
273
274
274
275
275
276
277
277

283
284
284
286

Surface treatment properties............................................................................................................... 288

Content and appearance of surface treatment............................................................................... 288

10

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

Hatch patterns for surface treatment ............................................................................................. 290

5.9

Marks in drawings............................................................................................................................... 291

Mark properties ..............................................................................................................................
Mark content ..................................................................................................................................
Common elements in marks ....................................................................................................
Part mark elements .................................................................................................................
Bolt mark elements ..................................................................................................................
Connection mark elements ......................................................................................................
Reinforcement mark elements .................................................................................................
Surface treatment mark elements ...........................................................................................
Section and detail mark and label elements ............................................................................
Adding templates in marks ......................................................................................................
Mark appearance ...........................................................................................................................
Visibility ...................................................................................................................................
Frame around mark .................................................................................................................
Mark location..................................................................................................................................
Part mark leader line ...............................................................................................................
Reinforcement mark leader line ...............................................................................................
Placing reinforcing bar mark leader line base point automatically ...........................................
Reinforcement pull-outs .................................................................................................................
Reinforcement settings for drawings..............................................................................................
Bolt marks and size elements ........................................................................................................
Adding user-defined attributes in marks.........................................................................................
Control numbers in marks .......................................................................................................
Part number format in marks ...................................................................................................
Weld marks in drawings .................................................................................................................
Level marks in drawings.................................................................................................................

292
293
293
294
295
295
296
297
297
298
298
299
300
301
301
302
304
304
305
310
311
312
312
312
315

5.10 Merging marks .................................................................................................................................... 316

Merging part marks ........................................................................................................................
Automatically merging reinforcement marks ..................................................................................
Merging within a cast unit ........................................................................................................
Preferred merge direction ........................................................................................................
Merged mark content ..............................................................................................................
Manually merging and splitting reinforcement marks.....................................................................

316
317
317
318
318
320

5.11 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 320

Grid properties ...............................................................................................................................
Editing grids and grid lines .............................................................................................................
Specifying a fixed size for a grid label frame ...........................................................................
Adjusting the thickness of the grid label frame ........................................................................

320
322
323
323

5.12 The Drawing Classifier........................................................................................................................ 324

How the Drawing Classifier works.................................................................................................. 325
Using the Drawing Classifier .......................................................................................................... 326
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

11

Creating drawing property files ................................................................................................

Creating view filters .................................................................................................................
Creating drawing object property files .....................................................................................
Creating drawings ....................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................

328
328
329
329
329

5.13 Drawing properties reference.............................................................................................................. 330

Drawing view properties... .............................................................................................................
Section view properties... ..............................................................................................................
Part mark properties... ...................................................................................................................
Bolt mark properties... ...................................................................................................................
Connection mark properties... .......................................................................................................
Reinforcement mark properties... ..................................................................................................
Surface treatment mark properties.................................................................................................
Properties modification...................................................................................................................

330
332
334
335
336
337
338
339

Editing Drawings ................................................................................... 341

6.1

Additional drawing objects .................................................................................................................. 341

Common drawing object properties................................................................................................
Line properties .........................................................................................................................
Arrow properties ......................................................................................................................
Leader line ...............................................................................................................................
Color ........................................................................................................................................
Font ..........................................................................................................................................
Fill/Hatch type ..........................................................................................................................
Frame type ...............................................................................................................................
Radius ......................................................................................................................................
Place ........................................................................................................................................
Special color...................................................................................................................................

343
343
345
345
347
347
347
348
348
348
349

6.2

Additional marks.................................................................................................................................. 350

6.3

Symbols in drawings ........................................................................................................................... 351

Adding symbols in drawings........................................................................................................... 351
Symbol types.................................................................................................................................. 352
Symbol properties .......................................................................................................................... 352

6.4

Adding text and links to drawings........................................................................................................ 353

Text files in drawings......................................................................................................................
Adding text files .......................................................................................................................
Editing text files ........................................................................................................................
Links in drawings............................................................................................................................
Adding hyperlinks ....................................................................................................................
Adding links between drawings ...............................................................................................
Modifying link properties ..........................................................................................................

12

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

354
355
355
355
356
356
356

Scaling text files and links .............................................................................................................. 356

Associative notes in drawings ........................................................................................................ 357
6.5

Hatching in drawings .......................................................................................................................... 358

Modifying fill/hatch types ................................................................................................................ 358
Schema files................................................................................................................................... 360
Editing hatching properties............................................................................................................. 362

6.6

DWG and DXF files in drawings ......................................................................................................... 362

Adding DWG or DXF files to drawings ........................................................................................... 362
DWG/DXF file properties................................................................................................................ 363

6.7

Edge chamfers in drawings ................................................................................................................ 364

Displaying edge chamfers..............................................................................................................
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually ...................................................................
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers ..................................................................
Creating chamfer marks as associative notes ...............................................................................

364
367
368
368

6.8

Displaying reference models in drawings ........................................................................................... 369

6.9

Working with drawing objects ............................................................................................................. 370

User coordinate system (UCS) ......................................................................................................
UCS Symbol ............................................................................................................................
Defining the UCS ...........................................................................................................................
Setting the UCS .......................................................................................................................
Setting the UCS (with x axis direction) ....................................................................................
Creating dimensions in the current coordinate system ............................................................
Numeric snap .................................................................................................................................
Positioning drawing objects............................................................................................................
Using coordinates ....................................................................................................................
Arranging drawing objects .......................................................................................................
Using cover-up tools ......................................................................................................................
Dragging, reshaping, and resizing drawing objects .......................................................................
Copying and moving drawing objects ............................................................................................
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views..........................................................

370
370
371
372
372
372
373
373
373
374
374
375
376
377

6.10 Working with drawing views................................................................................................................ 378

Adding views to drawings...............................................................................................................
Placing drawing views....................................................................................................................
Aligning drawing views...................................................................................................................
Moving drawing views ....................................................................................................................
Rotating drawing views ..................................................................................................................
Resizing drawing views..................................................................................................................
Resizing drawing view boundaries ..........................................................................................
Copying and linking drawing views ................................................................................................
3D views in cast-unit, assembly and single-part drawings.............................................................
Placing drawing views after updating or cloning a drawing............................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

379
379
380
380
380
381
381
382
383
383

13

6.11 Editing drawings reference.................................................................................................................. 383

Draw Line .......................................................................................................................................
Draw Rectangle..............................................................................................................................
Draw Circle > By Center and Radius..............................................................................................
Draw Circle > By Three Points .......................................................................................................
Draw Arc > By Endpoints and Center.............................................................................................
Draw Arc > By Three Points ...........................................................................................................
Draw Polyline .................................................................................................................................
Draw Polygon .................................................................................................................................
Draw Cloud.....................................................................................................................................
Add Text > Text ..............................................................................................................................
Add Text > Text with Leader Line...................................................................................................
Add Text > Text along Line ............................................................................................................
Add Text > Along Line, Arrow at End Point ....................................................................................
Add Text > Along Line, Arrow at Start Point...................................................................................
Add Part Marks...............................................................................................................................
Add Weld Mark...............................................................................................................................
Add Level Mark ..............................................................................................................................
Add Revision Mark .........................................................................................................................
Edit > Copy > Rotate... ...................................................................................................................
Edit > Copy > Mirror... ....................................................................................................................
Edit > Move > Rotate......................................................................................................................
Edit > Move > Mirror.......................................................................................................................
Trim ...............................................................................................................................................
Split ...............................................................................................................................................
Divide .............................................................................................................................................

Printouts and reports............................................................................ 401

7.1

Creating reports .................................................................................................................................. 401

Producing reports on entire model .................................................................................................
Producing reports on selected parts...............................................................................................
Producing reports on selected drawings ........................................................................................
Template Editor in report creating ..................................................................................................
Creating templates on nested assemblies ...............................................................................
Producing reports on nested assemblies .................................................................................
Defining reports in HTML .........................................................................................................
Creating bending diagrams on reinforcement bars ..................................................................
Adding surface treatment information to report templates .......................................................
Using the sequence number in reports ....................................................................................
Report options ................................................................................................................................
Print report options ..................................................................................................................
Viewing reports...............................................................................................................................

14

384
384
385
386
386
387
388
389
389
390
391
392
392
393
393
394
394
396
396
397
397
398
398
399
400

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

402
402
404
404
404
407
407
408
410
411
411
411
412

7.2

Printing drawings ................................................................................................................................ 412

Drawing frames and foldmarks ......................................................................................................
Drawing frames ......................................................................................................................
DWG/DXF file as a frame ........................................................................................................
Printing single drawings .................................................................................................................
Printing on multiple sheets ......................................................................................................
Printing multiple drawings ..............................................................................................................
Printing options ..............................................................................................................................

7.3

Printing drawings to file....................................................................................................................... 417

Adding a print-to-file device to the printer catalog..........................................................................
Printing to file .................................................................................................................................
Filenames ................................................................................................................................
Printing to file (specific folder) ........................................................................................................
Switches for naming printfiles ........................................................................................................

7.4

413
413
414
414
414
415
416
418
419
419
419
419

Creating a PDF file ............................................................................................................................. 421

Add Adobe Printer driver to the printer catalog .............................................................................. 421
Creating PDF files .......................................................................................................................... 422
Filenames ................................................................................................................................ 422

7.5

The printer catalog.............................................................................................................................. 422

Setting up a print device.................................................................................................................
Adding a print device......................................................................................................................
Selecting paper size.......................................................................................................................
Print area h*b .................................................................................................................................
Color...............................................................................................................................................
Color table......................................................................................................................................
Pen number .............................................................................................................................
Modifying a print device .................................................................................................................
Deleting a print device....................................................................................................................

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

422
423
424
424
425
425
426
426
426

15

16

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

Preface

Tekla Structures includes complete documentation in an accessible help system. Our online
help is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and features, with
plenty of examples. The documentation is also available in PDF format.
Topics in the Preface are:

Audience (p. 17)

Additional help resources (p. 17)
Conventions used in this guide (p. 18)
Related guides (p. 19)

Audience
This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and
design concrete and steel structures.
We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.

Additional help resources

The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures:
Web site

http://www.tekla.com

E-mail

Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail:

Area office

E-mail address

China

TeklaStructures.Support.CHI@Tekla.com

Finland

TeklaStructures.Support.FI@Tekla.com

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

17

Area office

E-mail address

France

TeklaStructures.Support.FR@Tekla.com

Germany

TeklaStructures.Support.GER@Tekla.com

India

TeklaStructures.Support.IN@Tekla.com

Japan

TeklaStructures.Support.JPN@Tekla.com

Malaysia

TeklaStructures.Support.MY@Tekla.com

Middle East

TeklaStructures.Support.ME@Tekla.com

Sweden

TeklaStructures.Support.SWE@Tekla.com

UK

TeklaStructures.Support.UK@Tekla.com

US

TeklaStructures.Support.US@Tekla.com

If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla
Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the
Web > Maintenance request....
Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to
BetC_Documentation@tekla.com.
Tekla Extranet

Anyone with a current maintenance contract can use Tekla Extranet. Register now to get free
access to our online discussion forums, hints & tips, software downloads, tutorials, and more.
To register, go to https://extranet.tekla.com. You can also access Tekla Extranet from Tekla
Structures by clicking Help > Online Support > Tekla Extranet.

Conventions used in this guide

Typefaces

We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is
obvious from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check
it here.

Convention

Usage

Bold

Bold indicates the names of keyboard keys.

Bold is also used for general emphasis in text.

Arial bold

Any text that you see in the user interface appears in Arial bold.
Items such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names,
combo box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface.

Italic bold

New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.

Monospace

Extracts of Tekla Structuress program code, HTML, or other

material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in
monospaced font.
Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace.
Also all the text you enter yourself appears in monospaced font.

Noteboxes

18

We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown
below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing

things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.
You are never required to understand this kind of information.

Related guides
Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will
also receive a printed installation guide with your Tekla Structures installation DVD.

Modeling Manual
How to create a physical model.

Analysis Manual
How to create loads and run structural analysis.

Detailing Manual
How to create reinforcement, connections, and details.

Drawing Manual
How to create and edit drawings.

System Manual
Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment.

Task Manager User Guide

How to create, store, and manage scheduled tasks, and link the tasks to their corresponding
model objects. This guide is available in English on the Tekla Extranet.

TplEd Users Guide

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

19

How to create and edit report and drawing templates.

SymEd Users Guide

How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols.

Installation Troubleshooting Guide

Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.

20

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

Introduction

Introduction to Drawings

This chapter provides an overview of the Tekla Structures Drawing Editor interface, and
introduces its basic features. It also explains the different types of drawings you can create, and
the various levels of editing drawings.
This chapter has been written for beginners who already know the basics of modeling with
Tekla Structures.
This is the best chapter to start with to gain a basic understanding of Tekla Structures drawings.
This chapter is divided into the following sections:

Basics (p. 21)

Screen layout (p. 23)
Toolbars (p. 25)
Using commands (p. 28)
Drawing types (p. 32)
Three levels of editing drawings (p. 37)
Colors in drawings (p. 37)

1.1 Basics
Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some in the Drawing
Editor.
Creating and
managing

You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor.
To create different types of drawings with a single command, you can use AutoDrawing
wizards. If you want to create one type of drawing at a time, use the commands on the
Drawings & Reports menu. See also Drawing types (p. 32) and Creating drawings (p. 48).
To view and manage all existing drawings, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... to
open the drawing list. See also Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42).

Editing and
viewing

To view or edit a drawing, use the Drawing Editor. For more information, see Opening
drawings (p. 41).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

21

See also

Drawings integrated into the model (p. 22)

Capabilities (p. 22)

Drawings integrated into the model

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for
example, dimensions and marks in drawings are always correct. It also makes it impossible to
delete parts and bolts from drawings. However, you can filter out parts and bolts in drawings,
or make them invisible.
You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If the model changes, Tekla
Structures promptd you to update the related drawings.
You can open only up-to-date drawings. Tekla Structures indicates which drawings you need to
update in the Drawing list dialog box. See Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42) and
Drawing status flags (p. 46).

Capabilities
You can create several types of output, from general arrangement drawings to material reports.
All the information comes directly from the model, which minimizes the work you have to do.
In most cases all you have to do is check the predefined settings or do some minor editing.
The following table describes some of the main features of Tekla Structures drawings and
reports:

22

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Feature

Description

See also

Automatic
workshop drawings
and cast unit
drawings

Automatically create single-part,

assembly, and cast unit drawings, using
predefined settings for layout,
dimensions, marks, etc. Create
drawings of selected parts with a single
command.

Creating single-part or
assembly drawings (p.
70)

Automatic general
arrangement
drawings an anchor
bolt plans

Automatically create general

arrangement drawings and anchor bolt
plans of a named view.

Creating general
arrangement drawings
(p. 72)

Master Drawing
Catalog

A fast, efficient and more controlled

way of creating drawings is to use
master drawings. In Master Drawing
Catalog, all drawing creation
commands are available in one
centralized location. You can create
drawings using saved drawing property
files, rule sets (wizards) and cloning
templates.

Master Drawing
Catalog (p. 49)

Drawing wizards
and rule sets

An efficient way of creating drawings

is to use drawing wizards and rule sets.
They automatically produce different
types of drawings of different parts,
such as beams, columns, and braces.

Master Drawing
Catalog (p. 49)

Creating cast unit

drawings (p. 71)

Creating anchor bolt

plans (p. 73)

Using AutoDrawings to
create drawings (p. 80)

Feature

Description

See also

Up-to-date
drawings

The drawings are actually part of the

model. If you revise the model, Tekla
Structures also updates the associated
drawings, so they are always up to date.

Working with drawings

(p. 90)

Reports

Tekla Structures creates reports directly

from the model, so the information is
always accurate. You can generate a
wide variety of reports at any time
during a project, including pre-bill of
material lists at quotation stage, cut
lists, bolt lists, and weld lists.

Creating reports (p. 401)

Revision control

Tekla Structures recognizes the

changes in the model and automatically
adjusts the relevant drawings and
material lists.

Drawing revisions (p.

95)

Cloning

You can save time by cloning complex

drawing styles.

Master Drawing
Catalog (p. 49)
Cloning through
Drawing List (p. 82)

Drawing Editor
tools

Customized reports
and drawings

The Drawing Editor includes

interactive editing tools for adding
dimensions, various shapes, text,
associative notes, additional marks,
symbols, and links in the drawings.

Manual dimensioning
(p. 133)

Tekla Structures includes many readyto-use standard reports and drawings.

You can also create your own
templates.

See the Template Editor

Users Guide

Editing Drawings (p.

341)

1.2 Screen layout

When you start the Tekla Structures Drawing Editor, the menus and icons for modeling
disappear and several new toolbars are displayed. The model views remain on the screen. The
following illustration identifies the various areas of the Tekla Structures Drawing Editor
window:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

23

Commands for creating dimensions and objects.

Select switches determine selectable objects.

24

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick.
Drawing tools include the basic tools for working with drawings.
Switches

Select switches and Snap settings are special toolbars containing switches which you can

use to control which objects can be selected, and how Tekla Structures snaps to points.

Use select switches to limit which object types can be selected. For example, if only the Select
marks switch is active, Tekla Structures only selects marks, even if you select the entire
drawing area.

You need to activate snap switches to be able to pick different positions and points such as line
ends and intersections.

To snap to and pick points in the Drawing Editor you use similar techniques to those in the
Model Editor.
See also

Toolbars (p. 25)

Selecting objects in drawings (p. 29)
Snapping to positions

1.3 Toolbars
The toolbars contain icons giving easy access to some of the most frequently-used commands.
Using icons

Most Tekla Structures icons work as follows:

See also

A single-click initiates the command.

A double-click displays the properties dialog box of that object type, and initiates the
command.

Managing toolbars
Customizing the interface
Basic toolbars (p. 25)
Numeric snap (p. 373)

Basic toolbars
Drawing Tools

The Drawing Tools toolbar contains basic tools for working with drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

25

Drawing Objects

Open previous drawing

Open next drawing
Save drawing and model
Undo
Redo
Print drawings
Create view from model view
Create view from model by area
Create view from drawing view
Create section view
Create curved section view
Create detail view
Arrange drawing views
Copy
Move
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom original
Inquire object
Open model folder
Open named model views list
Show macros
Customize

The Drawing Objects toolbar contains dimensioning commands, commands for adding text,
symbols and additional drawing objects, and commands for removing change symbols and
dimension point invalidity symbols.

26

Open drawing list

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Add horizontal dimension

Add vertical dimension
Add orthogonal dimension
Add free dimension
Add parallel dimension

Snap settings

Add perpendicular dimension

Add curved dimension with radial reference lines
Add curved dimension with orthogonal reference lines
Add angular dimension
Add/remove dimension point
Remove dimension points
Combine dimension lines
Link dimension lines
Unlink dimension lines
Add part marks for selected parts
Create text with leader line
Create text
Create text along line
Create text along line, arrow at start point
Create associative note with leader line
Create associative note without leader line
Create associative note along line
Create symbol
Create level mark
Create weld symbol
Draw a line
Draw a rectangle
Draw a circle
Draw an arc by 3 points
Draw a polyline
Draw a polygon
Draw a cloud
Remove all dimension point invalidity symbols
Remove all dimension point change symbols
Remove all mark change symbols
Remove all associative note change symbols

The Snap settings toolbar contains commands for picking different positions and points.

Snap to points and grid intersections

Snap to end points
Snap to center points
Snap to mid points
Snap to intersection points
Snap to perpendicular points

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

27

Snap to nearest points

Snap to reference and geometry lines of drawing objects
Snap to any position
Snap to reference lines/points
Snap to geometry lines/points
Select if you want to snap to positions in 3D space or on view plane
Select if you want to snap to positions on the view plane or on the work plane

The Select toolbar contains commands for selecting objects.

Select

Select all
Select drawing lines
Select drawing texts
Select drawing marks
Select drawing parts
Select drawing section symbols
Select drawing welds
Select drawing views
Select drawing dimensions
Select drawing single dimension
Select grid
Select grid line
Select details

1.4 Using commands

As you become familiar with Tekla Structures, you will notice that there are several ways you
can use to get a desired result. Here we will introduce some of the most common ones.
See also

Executing commands (p. 28)

Selecting objects in drawings (p. 29)
Creating objects (p. 30)
Modifying objects (p. 31)
Copying and moving drawing objects (p. 376)
Using commands simultaneously (p. 31)
Ending commands (p. 31)

Executing commands
There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures.
28

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Icon

You can use icons:

Pull-down menu

Pop-up menu

Single-click an icon just to execute the command.

Double-click an icon to display the properties of the object type, and to execute the
command.

You can execute commands using pull-down menus. Tekla Structures Drawing Editor contains
the following menus:

With the commands in the Drawing File menu you can open, save, print, and export
drawings, set drawing properties and access model folder and reference models.

The Edit menu contains basic editing commands, such as move, copy, delete, interrupt,
undo, redo and repeat the last command. It also allows you to access the selection filters,
trim lines, split and divide objects, and adjust reinforcing bars.

With the commands in the View menu you can create and adjust drawing views, arrange
drawing objects, hide, show, zoom, move, and update views, and modify view properties.
It also allows you to access model views.

The Dimensioning menu contains all dimensioning commands.

The Shapes menu contains commands for drawing different kinds of shapes and adding
patches.

The Tools menu contains commands that support your work allowing you to modify what
is displayed on the user interface and how Tekla Structures works. This menu contains
several on/off switches for certain features.

With the commands in the Windows menu you can adjust how windows are displayed on
the screen, and open another window.

The Help menu allows you to access the online help, other support material, Tekla web
pages and Extranet, and contact Tekla for support.

With the commands in the Annotating menu you can add all kinds of marks, text,
associative notes, links, and symbols, and remove change symbols.

A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button. If you have an object selected,
the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.

If you switch on the Select on Right Click command in the Tools >
Options, you do not have to click the object first to display the related
pop-up menu with a right-click.

Selecting objects in drawings

To use Tekla Structures effectively, you need to know how to select objects and use select
switches.
Selection filter

Selection filter settings affect which objects you can select. To create a selection filter and use
it in the drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Edit > Selection Filter to open the Selection filter dialog box.
Find a filter which has close to the same settings as you need.
Modify the settings, then enter a new name in the Save as box.
Click Save as, then Apply.
You can now select objects in your drawing according to the selection filter you specified.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

29

Select switches

Select switches control which object types can be selected. The select switches in the Drawing
Editor work in the same way as the ones in the Model Editor, but the actual switches differ. The
following select switches are available in the Drawing Editor:

Icon

Object

Description

All

Turns all switches on. You can select all

object types, except for single bolts.

Lines etc.

You can select additional drawing objects,

i.e. lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, polylines,
and polygons.

Text

You can select any text in drawings.

Marks

You can select part, bolt, and connection

marks.

Drawing parts

You can select parts in drawings, i.e.

columns, beams, plates, etc.

Section symbols

You can select section symbols.

Welds

You can select welds.

Views

You can select drawing views.

Dimensions

You can select an entire group of dimensions

by selecting one dimension in the group.

Single dimensions

You can select single dimensions.

Grids

You can select grids.

Single grid lines

You can select single grid lines.

Details

You can select details.

Selecting objects

Creating objects
To create an object, or multiple objects:

Open the properties dialog box for the object and define the object properties.
Place the object(s) in the model.

You can carry out the above steps in any order.

Example

30

To create objects:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

1.
2.
3.
4.
Example

Double-click the icon of the object you want to create. Tekla Structures displays the
properties dialog box.
Enter or modify the object properties.
Click Apply or OK.
Pick points to place the object(s).

To position objects without defining their properties first:

1.
2.

Click an icon, or a menu command.

Pick points to place the object(s). Tekla Structures creates the object using the current
properties for the object. See also Modifying objects (p. 31).

To create several objects with the same properties, pick multiple points.
The drawing object commands in Tekla Structures run until you end
them or use another command. See also Ending commands (p. 31).

Modifying objects
To modify the properties of an object, or multiple objects:

Select the object(s) to modify.

Open the properties dialog box and modify the object properties.

You can carry out the above steps in any order.

Example

To modify objects:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Double-click one of the objects you want to modify to open the object properties dialog
box.
Modify the properties.
Select the remaining object(s) to modify.
Click Modify.

For information on how to resize and move objects, see Dragging, reshaping, and resizing
drawing objects (p. 375) and Copying and moving drawing objects (p. 376).

Using commands simultaneously

Transparency

You can use some Tekla Structures commands transparently. This means that you can execute
these commands while another command is still running. For example, the zooming commands
are transparent.

Ending commands
To cancel or end commands, do one of the following:

Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu.

Press the Esc key.
On the Edit menu, click Interrupt.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

31

1.5 Drawing types

This section explains the different drawing types available in Tekla Structures. The drawing
types are:

Single-part drawing (p. 32)

Assembly drawing (p. 32)
Cast unit drawing (p. 35)
General arrangement drawing (p. 35)
Multidrawing (p. 36)

See also Creating drawings (p. 48)

Single-part drawing
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings which show the fabrication information for one
part (usually without welds).
Single-part drawing usually use small sheet sizes, for example A4 or imperial standard size
8.5" x 11.5".

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating single-part or assembly drawings (p. 70)

Assembly drawing
Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings showing fabrication information for one
assembly. In most cases, an assembly consists of single parts that are either bolted or welded to
a main part.
Assembly drawings usually use larger sheet sizes than single-part drawings, for example A3 or
imperial standard size 11" x 17".

32

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

You can also create assembly drawings from nested assemblies.

Assembly drawing of a nested assembly, a whole truss

Assembly drawing of a sub-assembly, a part of the same truss

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

33

Assembly drawing of a nested assembly

Assembly drawing of one of the sub-assemblies in that nested assembly
You can define the visibility, content, and appearance of the marks of nested assemblies in
assembly drawings. You can also select whether to show the part marks for sub-assembly parts.
See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating single-part or assembly drawings (p. 70)

34

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Cast unit drawing

Cast unit drawings are dimensional, formwork, or reinforcement drawings used in concrete
design and construction. They include cast-in embeds (steel parts or assemblies added to cast
units).
Cast unit drawings that show cast-in-place concrete structures usually use large sheet sizes, for
example A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36". Drawings that show precast structures usually
use smaller sheet sizes, for example A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating cast unit drawings (p. 71)

General arrangement drawing

Create general arrangement (GA) drawings when you need:

Several views on one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it

Erection, marking, or anchor bolt plans
Information from model views, including 3D views

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

35

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

See also Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 72).

Multidrawing
Multidrawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly
drawings on one sheet.
Create multidrawings when you want to:

Have more than one assembly on a sheet

Collect multiple single-part drawings on a large sheet

Multidrawings usually demand large sheet sizes such as A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36".

36

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

See also Creating multi-drawings (p. 78).

1.6 Three levels of editing drawings

You can edit drawings on three levels.
Drawing
properties

On the highest level, you can change the drawing properties, which changes all the objects in
the drawing. You can change the drawing properties for more than one drawing using the
Drawing List and drawing properties dialog boxes. You can also change the properties of the
currently open drawing in the Drawing Editor. When you save the drawing property settings in
property files, you can also use these property files when you are creating drawings through
Master Drawing Catalog.

Whenever possible, modify drawings by changing the drawing

properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is
recreated due to a model change, for example.

View properties

The second level is to edit on the view level, where you modify selected drawing views. You
can change the drawing view properties in the Model Editor before you create drawings, or by
modifying existing views of the currently open drawing in the Drawing Editor.

Object properties

The third and lowest level is to edit on the object level, where you change individual objects in
a drawing. Use the Drawing Editor commands to modify the objects.

See also

Editing Drawings (p. 341)

Drawing view properties (p. 241)
Drawing Properties (p. 235)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

1.7 Colors in drawings

You have three basic color modes for background and line colors in drawings. The color modes
are Black and White, Gray Scale, and Color. You can change the color mode in Tools >
Options > Drawing Color Mode, and toggle between the modes by pressing the B button.
In addition to the three basic color modes, you can have a black background and colored lines
in drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

37

Example

Description
White background, black lines.
By default, drawings are black and
white, and when you open a
drawing, it is displayed black and
white.
To use this color mode, select the
Black and White option in Tools >
Options > Drawing Color Mode.
Tekla Structures shows different line
thicknesses defined for different
colors in Drawing File > Print
Drawings > Add/Edit > Printer
Catalog... > Color Table. For more

information on black and white

printing, see Color (p. 425).

White background, black and gray

lines.
To use this color mode, select the

Gray Scale option in Tools >

Options > Drawing Color Mode.

In grayscale mode, the colors from

one to seven (black, red, green, blue,
cyan, yellow, magenta) are shown in
black, and the colors from eight to 14
(brown, dark green, dark blue, bluegreen, orange, gray) are shown in
different shades of gray.

38

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Example

Description
White background, colored lines.
To use this color mode, select the
Color option in Tools > Options >
Drawing Color Mode.
The Color color mode does not show
different line thicknesses by default.
If you have changed the line
thicknesses for different colors in
File > Print Drawings > Add/Edit >
Printer Catalog... > Color Table,
and switch the option Tools >
Options > Use Printer Linewidths

on, then the different line thicknesses

are shown.

Black background, colored lines.

If you want to have black
background and colored lines, set the
variable
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACK
GROUND to TRUE in Tools >
Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing View.

You can define different line colors for different objects in each objects properties. See also
Drawing Properties (p. 235).

Drawing classifier may also affect the line color of objects. For more
information on drawing classifier, see The Drawing Classifier (p. 324).

Colors and gray

shades

Name

Pen

Invisible
Black
Red
Green

9
7
1
3

Tekla Structures
color

Black and
white

Gray scale Lightness

Invisible
0%
0%
0%

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

39

40

Name

Pen

Blue
Cyan
Yellow
Magenta
Brown
Dark green
Dark blue
Blue-green
Orange
Gray
Special

5
4
2
6
15
110
141
111
31
8
-

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Introduction to Drawings

Tekla Structures
color

Black and
white

Gray scale Lightness

0%
0%
0%
0%
30%
50%
70%
90%
100% white
60%
-

Introduction

Getting Started with

Drawings

This chapter explains how to create drawings and work with them in Tekla Structures.
If you are new to Tekla Structures, we recommend that you read Introduction to Drawings (p.
21) first, to gain a basic understanding of Tekla Structures drawings.
This chapter is divided into the following sections:

Opening drawings (p. 41)

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)
Creating drawings (p. 48)
Working with drawings (p. 90)
Saving and closing drawings (p. 98)
Drawing reference (p. 98)

2.1 Opening drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla
Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one.
To open a Tekla Structures drawing:
In the Model
Editor

In the Drawing
Editor

1.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... (Ctrl + L) or icon on the General toolbar

2.
3.

.
Select a drawing from the list in the Drawing List dialog box.
Click Open, or double-click the drawing to open it.

1.
2.
3.

Click Drawing File > Open... (Ctrl + O) or icon on the Drawing Tools toolbar .
Select a drawing from the list and click Open, or double-click the drawing to open it.
If you want to open the previous drawing on the list, click Drawing File > Open Previous
or use shortcut Ctrl + Page Up.
If you want to open the next drawing on the list, click Drawing File > Open Next or use
shortcut Ctrl + Page Down.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

41

If you want to select all the visible drawings on the drawing list, use the shortcut Ctrl + A when
the drawing list is selected, or right-click the list and select Select All from the pop-up menu.
See also

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Drawing List fields and buttons (p. 44)
Drawing status flags (p. 46)

2.2 Drawing List contents and markings

All drawings from the Tekla Structures model appear on the list in the Drawing List dialog
box. Drawing List displays the following information about each drawing:

42

Column

Description

Flags

Flags are graphical symbols at the beginning of each row.

They indicate the drawing status.

Dates

The creation and modification dates of the drawing.

Revision

The revision number or mark of the drawing.

Size

The paper size the drawing uses.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Column

Description

Type

The drawing types are identified by the following letters:

W for single-part drawings.

A for assembly drawings.
C for cast-unit drawings.
G for general arrangement drawings.
M for multi-drawings.

If a U (unknown) drawing appears in the drawing list, delete

it, then recreate it. You can also check the database. See
Checking multi-user databases.
Mark

The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the
drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks.
You can choose to have Tekla Structures base the mark of
cast unit drawings on the position number or the ID of the
cast unit.

Name

You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the
drawing properties dialog box.

Title 1

Extra drawing titles added in the drawing properties dialog

box.

Title 2
Title 3
Userdefined
attributes

Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists. To

include a user-defined attribute in drawing lists, the userdefined attribute must have variable special_flag set to
yes in the objects.inp file.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows either revision numbers
or revision marks on the Drawing List. By default, it shows revision
numbers. To see revision marks instead, set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST=TRUE.
See also

Opening drawings (p. 41)

Drawing List fields and buttons (p. 44)
Drawing status flags (p. 46)
Drawing revisions (p. 95)
Drawing size (p. 126)
Common drawing properties (p. 236)
User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)
Creating cast unit drawings (p. 71)
Drawing types (p. 32)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

43

Drawing List fields and buttons

Buttons and
fields on top

The following table explains what the fields and buttons on the top of the Drawing List dialog
box do.

Field/Button

Description

Enter search
criteria

Use the Enter search criteria field to find drawings.

Search in

You can limit the searches based on different columns

by entering the name of the column in the Search in
field.

Search within the

currently visible
drawings

Select the Search within the currently visible

drawings option to limit the search to the currently

Store

Click the Store button to save the searches you have

made.

You can make text-based searches by entering the

desired criteria in the field.

visible drawings.

The Store button opens Store Search Result dialog

box.
Store Search
Result

Enter a name for the search result in Store Search

Result dialog box.

The searches are saved in the

DrawingListSearches, which is created in the
model folder. You can move the saved searches to
your environment, company or project folder. After
you have saved the search, it will be visible in the
predefined drawing sets.
or select drawing
set

To display drawings from various predefined sets,

select an option from the or select drawing set
dropdown list.
For example, if you wish to see general arrangement
drawings only, select "GA drawings" from the or
select drawing set dropdown list.

44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Buttons on righthand side

The following table explains what the buttons on the right-hand side of the Drawing List dialog
box do.

Button

Description

Filter Show all

Lists all existing drawings.

Filter Invert

Inverts the contents of the current list.

Filter Selected

Lists selected drawings.

Filter Up to
date

Lists only up-to-date drawings. To see a list of

drawings that need updating, click the Invert button
after using this button.

Model Select
objects

When you select a drawing and then click Select

objects, Tekla Structures selects and highlights the
corresponding part(s) or assemblies/cast units in the
model.

Model By parts

Only lists the drawings associated with the parts you

have selected in the model. Use this button to identify
the drawings associated with a specific part.
This works only in visible search result.

Lock On

Prevents the selected drawings from being opened,

modified, or deleted. Tekla Structures still displays the
update flag

for locked drawings.

Lock Off

Unlocks the selected drawings and allows you to open,

modify, and deleted them.

Freeze On

Freezes the selected drawings so that only parts are

updated in the drawings. Views or associative objects
are not updated in frozen drawings.

Freeze Off

Unfreezes the selected drawings so that also

associative objects, such as dimensions and marks, are
updated in the drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

45

Button

Description

Issue On

Flags the selected drawings as issued

Issue Off

Removes the issue flags from selected drawings.

Revision...

Allows you to define drawing revisions.

Buttons on
bottom

The following table explains what the buttons on the bottom of the Drawing List dialog box do.

Button

Description

Open

Updates the selected drawing and then opens it in the

Drawing Editor. You can only select one drawing from
the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you
have more than one drawing selected.
You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open
it.

Update

Updates selected drawings. A drawing marked with an

update flag
must be updated before using it.
Locked drawings are not updated.

See also

Clone...

Clones the selected drawing for a similar part. Does

not update the source drawing.

Delete

Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked

drawings.

Cancel

Closes the dialog box.

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Opening drawings (p. 41)
Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 93)
Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings (p. 82)
Locking and freezing drawings (p. 91)
Locking and freezing drawings (p. 91)
Issuing drawings (p. 95)
Drawing revisions (p. 95)
Drawing status flags (p. 46)

Drawing status flags

Tekla Structures uses certain symbols, which are called flags, to indicate the status of the
drawings. Flags appear at the beginning of each row in the Drawing List dialog box. If a
drawing does not have any flag symbol, it is up to date.

46

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Sym
bol

Column

Textual
status
information

Description

More
information
Updating
drawings when
the model changes
(p. 93)

Up to date

Parts
modified

The parts in the drawing have

changed, for example parts
have been added or deleted, or
part properties have changed.

Up to date

Quantity
increased

The actual drawing is up to

date, but the number of
identical parts has changed.

Quantity
decreased
Up to date

Original
parts
deleted

The part from which the

drawing was originally created
has been deleted.

Up to date

All parts
deleted

All the parts related to the

drawing have been deleted.

Lock

The drawing is locked.

Freeze

The drawing is frozen.

Master

The drawing has been added as

a master drawing in the Master
Drawing Catalog.

Locking and
freezing drawings
(p. 91)

Up to date

Linked
drawing
changed

A linked drawing has been

modified.

Up to date

Original
parts
deleted,
others exist

A drawing, whose original

parts have been deleted,
has been updated, and
there are still other parts
relevant to the drawing in
the model.

A copied drawing has been

modified.

A frozen drawing has been

updated.

Copied view
changed
Drawing
updated

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

47

Sym
bol

Column

Textual
status
information

Up to date

Cloned

Issue

Issue

See also

Issued
drawing
changed

Description

More
information

The drawing is a cloned

drawing.

Cloning singlepart, cast-unit and

assembly
drawings (p. 82)

The drawing has been issued.

For example, you might reissue drawings that have been
sent to site.

Issuing drawings
(p. 95)

The issued drawing has been

edited or otherwise changed.

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Drawing List fields and buttons (p. 44)

2.3 Creating drawings

Once you complete a model, you can start creating drawings to issue. You should also create
drawings (and reports) periodically while modeling to check if:

The predefined drawing properties and filters suit your needs, or should you modify them
The details, dimensions, etc. in the model are correct.

Prior to creating or editing assembly, single-part, cast-unit, or multidrawings, you need to number the model. This ensures that Tekla
Structures connects the right objects to the right drawings. If you try to
create drawings without numbering the model, Tekla Structures prompts
you to do so.
In this section

This section explains, in general terms, how to create different types of drawings. For more
detailed instructions, follow the links in each topic.

See also

Before creating drawings (p. 48)

Setting drawing properties and rule sets (p. 49)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)
Using drawing-type-specific commands to create drawings (p. 69)
Using AutoDrawings to create drawings (p. 80)
Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

Before creating drawings

Prior to creating assembly, single-part, cast-unit, or multi-drawings in Tekla Structures:
1.

48

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Update the numbering of model objects.

If you do not update the numbering, you are prompted to perform

numbering when you create a drawing

2.
3.

Create test drawings of different types of parts to see how well the predefined drawing
properties and layouts suit your needs.
Modify drawing properties and layouts if necessary, and save them. Enter a name for the
properties file and click Save as.

Setting drawing properties and rule sets

Tekla Structures creates drawings using the properties defined for each type of drawing.
To view or modify drawing properties, select a drawing type from the Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings menu in the Model Editor. You can change the drawing
layout by selecting Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout. You
need to ensure that the drawing properties are set and the necessary drawing property files
are created before creating drawings using the menu commands and toolbar commands,
and before creating drawings on the basis of saved settings in the Master Drawing
Catalog.

When you are using the cloning templates in Master Drawing Catalog to create drawings,
ensure that the settings of the drawing you are going to use as a template are correct, and
that the drawing contains everything you want it to have. Open the drawing from the
Drawing List and check the contents and properties.

When you are using rule sets in Master Drawing Catalog, ensure that all settings and
selections are correct in the rule sets in the Master Drawing Catalog .

The layout and drawing views in a drawing affect drawing size. For
more information, see Drawing Layout (p. 113) and Drawing
Properties (p. 235).

Master Drawing Catalog

Master Drawing Catalog is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating drawings. In
Master Drawing Catalog, all drawing creation commands are available in one centralized

location.

A master drawing is a Tekla Structures drawing or a set of drawing properties that is used for
creating new drawings that look the same as the master drawing. There are several types of
master drawings:

Cloning templates: Cloning templates are Tekla Structures drawings that you have added
to Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List. You can also use cloning templates
from other models.

Saved settings: By saved settings we mean drawing property files. There are several
predefined property files, and you can also create your own in the drawing properties
dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

49

Rule sets: Sets of rules on how to create new drawings for different object types. By rule
set we mean a combination of object groups (selection filters) and master drawing settings
(cloning template, saved settings) that define which objects to include in the drawing, and
which drawing settings to use. You can use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files or
create your own rule sets.

The master drawing type you should use also depends on the type of the drawing that you want
to create. In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings only with the old
AutoDrawings wizard files, and general arrangement drawings by using saved settings.
The figure below shows the search view of the Master Drawing Catalog as a thumbnail list.
The toolbar commands and view areas pointed out in the figure are shortly described .

50

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Click this button to create drawing(s) of the object(s) you have selected in the
model, on the basis of the master drawing you have selected from the catalog.
Switch to search view.
Switch to folder view.
Display the master drawings in a detail list or thumbnail list. The thumbnail list
shows the master drawings as thumbnails, which are smaller versions of the saved
preview images, whereas the detail list shows textual information about the master
drawings. You can display a preview image of the master drawing by selecting the
master drawing, right-clicking and selecting Preview. If you double-click the
master drawing, Tekla Structures displays the catalog properties of the drawing,
Display the master drawing description at the bottom of the dialog box.
Select the models from which you want to show master drawings.
Define rule sets for creating drawings.
Display Drawing List.
Enter search conditions here and then click the Search button.
Click the Store button to save your search results.
Select the category of master drawings that you want to see in the catalog list. All
shows all the master drawings you have in the models you have selected.
List of master drawings. The character after the name of the master drawing
indicates its type. When you point to a master drawing, Tekla Structures displays
a tooltip that tells the master drawing category, the type of the drawing to be
created, and the path and name of the model:
The figure below shows the search view of the Master Drawing Catalog as a detail list. Here
you can easily see the name of the drawing, the master drawing type, and the drawing type to
be created.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

51

The figure below shows an example of the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog. In this
view, you can organize your master drawings into folders you create. By doing so you can limit
the number of drawings shown in the list and find the desired master drawings more easily. The
toolbar commands are the same as in the search view.

52

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

See also

Saved settings (p. 54)

Rule set (p. 54)
Wizard file (p. 55)
Cloning template (p. 56)
Cloning (p. 56)
Selecting the displayed master drawings (p. 65)
Displaying master drawing descriptions (p. 65)
Working with folders (p. 66)
Using search in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 67)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

53

Adding saved settings to Master Drawing Catalog (p. 57)

Editing master drawing properties of saved settings (p. 57)
Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 58)
Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog (p. 59)
Editing master drawing properties of rule sets (p. 60)
Editing master drawing properties and contents of wizard files (p. 61)
Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)
Adding a new cloning template to Master Drawing Catalog (p. 62)
Editing master drawing properties of cloning templates (p. 63)
Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 64)
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog (p. 69)
Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)

Saved settings
The Saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog are drawing property files that have been
created and saved in the drawing properties dialog boxes for different drawing types. There are
many predefined drawing property files and you can create new ones.

See also

Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 58)

Rule set
A typical rule set includes several sets of drawing requests containing drawing, attribute and
part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The order of sets is
important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object.

54

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

For example, a rule set creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the selection filter
criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for that object,
even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same rule set file.

See also

Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)

Wizard file
A wizard file consist of several sets of drawing requests containing drawing, attribute and part
settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important,
as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object. Earlier wizard files could be
edited through the AutoDrawings dialog box, but now your can edit them in Master Drawing
Catalog. However, creating new wizard files is not possible in Master Drawing Catalog.

In Master Drawing Catalog, the only way to create multidrawings is to

use the wizard files.

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Notice the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)

This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in
parentheses. The options are:

Option

Creates

single

workshop drawings

assembly

assembly drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

55

Option

Creates

multi_single

workshop multi-drawings

multi_single_with_layout

workshop multi-drawings with layout

multi_assembly

assembly multi-drawings

multi_assembly_with_layout

assembly multi-drawings with layout

cast_unit

cast unit drawings

set_drawing_attributes(column)

This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings.
The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_filter(column_filter)

This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to
create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses.
create_drawings()

Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after
the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.

Cloning template
Cloning templates are Tekla Structures drawings that are used as templates for creating new
drawings. You can select a drawing from the Drawing List and add it to the Master Drawing
Catalog. You can also use cloning templates from other models.

You cannot clone general arrangement drawings through Master

Drawing Catalog. You can clone general arrangement drawings using
the Clone command in the Drawing List dialog box.

See also

Cloning (p. 56)

Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 64)

Cloning
You should consider cloning drawings when:

There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model

The drawings need a lot of manual editing

You need to produce single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawings of similar parts,

assemblies, or cast units

For example, you can create a drawing for one truss, edit the drawing, and then clone it for
similar trusses. Then you only need to modify the cloned drawings where the trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more parts than the original drawing. Part properties, marks,
associative notes and related text objects are cloned from a similar part in the original drawing.

56

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must

have the same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit from
which the original drawing was created. For example, the upper
chords of the original and the cloned truss could be main parts.

When you clone an assembly drawing that includes single-part

drawings, Tekla Structures does not include the single-part
drawings in the cloned assembly drawing by default. To include
them, set the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED to
TRUE in Tools > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.

Adding saved settings to Master Drawing Catalog

To add a new drawing property file in Master Drawing Catalog to be used as saved settings:

See also

1.

Modify the drawing properties in the Single-part drawing properties, Cast unit
drawing properties, Assembly drawing properties, or General arrangement
drawing properties dialog box.

2.

Give a name to the property file and click Save as. The new property file is
automatically added to Master Drawing Catalog. If it is not displayed in the list, press
F5 to refresh the view.

3.

Modify the catalog properties of the master drawing by selecting it, right-clicking and
selecting Edit properties. Add a preview image, and enter a description and keywords.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Editing master drawing properties of saved settings (p. 57)
Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 58)

Editing master drawing properties of saved settings

Each saved setting type of master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog has its own catalog
properties. You can search for master drawings on the basis of the master drawing name,
description and keywords entered in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. Through the
catalog properties you also have access to drawing properties.

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

To edit the catalog properties of saved settings:

1.

Double-click a master drawing of the desired type, or select the master drawing, rightclick and select Edit Properties. The type of the master drawing and the type of the
drawing to be created are shown in the dialog box

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

57

2.

Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.

3.

Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.

4.

Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.

5.

To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You
can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.

6.

If you want to edit the drawing properties of the master drawing, click Edit drawing
properties to display the drawing properties dialog box. Edit the properties and save

them. Ensure that you have the correct drawing property file name at the top.
7.
See also

Click OK to save your changes.

Drawing Properties (p. 235)

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)
Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)
Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 58)

Creating drawings using saved settings

In Master Drawing Catalog you can create drawings using saved settings (drawing property
files).
To create drawings using the saved settings:

58

1.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.

2.

Select the desired master drawing (drawing property file) from the catalog.

3.

Select the object(s) from the model. If you are creating a general arrangement drawing,
you do not need to select objects.

4.

Click the Create drawings button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

For other drawing types than general arrangement drawings you are prompted to
perform numbering if you have not done that yet.

If you are creating a general arrangement drawing, the drawing properties dialog
box and the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box are displayed.
Modify the properties of necessary. In the Create General Arrangement
Drawing dialog box, select the views that you want the drawing to be produced of
and select the desired option from the Options list. Click Create to create the
drawing(s).

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. You can click
the button in the toolbar to open the Drawing List.
See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog

To add a rule set to the Master Drawing Catalog:
1.

Click the Add rule set toolbar command button

Drawings dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the type of drawings you want to create. The choices are Single-part drawings,
Assembly drawings and Cast unit drawings. You can select several drawing types.
For example, you can use the same rule set to create single-part drawings and assembly
drawings.

3.

Click Next.

4.

In the next dialog box, click Add rule and define the object groups for which you want
to create drawings, and select a master drawing for each group. Only those master
drawing types are listed that can be used for the type of drawing that you selected in the
previous dialog box.

. The Define Rules for Creating

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

59

If necessary, use the Move up and Move down buttons to move rules upwards and
downwards in the list. If a rule that is higher in the list creates a drawing of an object,
another rule that would create a drawing of the same object will not do it again.
Use the Properties button to check or modify the properties of a master drawing that
you have selected on the list.
Use the Preview button to display a preview image of the selected master drawing.

See also

5.

Click Next. If you have selected several drawing types, repeat the previous steps for all
drawing types that you have selected.

6.

In the next dialog box, enter a name for the rule set, a short description and keywords.
All these can be used in search.

7.

If you have a screenshot that you want to use as a preview image for the rule set, click
Browse and select the image. You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, and .png images.
This screenshot is displayed as a thumbnail in the Master Drawing Catalog thumbnail
list. You can display the preview image in a larger view by selecting the thumbnail,
right-clicking and selecting Preview.

8.

Click Finish. The rule set is added in the Master Drawing Catalog.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)

Editing master drawing properties of rule sets

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

60

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

To edit the master drawing properties of rule sets:

See also

1.

Double-click a master drawing of the desired type, or select the master drawing, rightclick and select Edit Properties. The type of the master drawing and the type of the
drawing to be created are shown in the dialog box

2.

Modify your drawing type selections if necessary. Click Next.

3.

Add or remove object groups and select the appropriate master drawing type.

4.

Click Next and do the same for all selected drawing types.

5.

Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.

6.

Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.

7.

Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.

8.

To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You
can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.

9.

Click Save to save your changes.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)
Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)

Editing master drawing properties and contents of wizard files

Wizard files are rule sets that you can edit using a text editor. Through the catalog properties of
the wizards you can access the files and edit them. The wizard files could earlier be edited and
used only through AutoDrawings dialog box. Now you can edit them in Master Drawing
Catalog . To edit the master drawing properties of wizard files and the wizard contents:

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

See also

1.

In the catalog list, double-click a wizard file.

2.

Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.

3.

Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.

4.

Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.

5.

To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You
can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.

6.

To edit the contents of the wizard file, click Edit drawing properties. The wizard file is
opened in a text editor. Modify the contents of the file, and save and close it.

7.

Click OK in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.

Wizard file (p. 55)

Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

61

Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)

Wizard files (dproc)

Creating drawings using rule sets

In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings on the
basis of rule sets. You can use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files or create your own rule
sets.

In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings only by

using the wizard files.

To create drawings using a rule set:

1.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.

2.

Select the rule set from the list.

3.

Select the object(s) from the model.

4.

Click the Create drawings button. You are prompted to perform numbering if you have
not done that yet.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. You can click
the button in the toolbar to open the Drawing List.

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Rule set (p. 54)
Wizard file (p. 55)

Adding a new cloning template to Master Drawing Catalog

You can add drawings to Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List. These drawings are
called cloning templates.

You cannot add general arrangement drawings or multidrawings to

Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List. You can clone general
arrangement drawings using the Clone command in the Drawing List
dialog box.
Before you add a cloning template to Master Drawing Catalog, create a drawing with the
desired properties and contents in the Model Editor and save it.
To add a new cloning template:

62

1.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List or click the drawing list icon
the Drawing List.

2.

Select the drawing that you want to add in the Master Drawing Catalog as a cloning
template, right-click and select Add to Master Drawing Catalog, or select the drawing
and press Ctrl + M.

3.

The Master Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed. On the General tab, enter a
name for the cloning template, a short description and keywords. All these can be used
in search.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

to open

4.

If you have a screenshot that you want to use as a preview image for the cloning
template, click Browse and browse to and select the image. This screenshot is displayed
as a thumbnail in the Master Drawing Catalog thumbnail list, and opened in a larger
view when you select and right-click a master drawing and select Preview.

5.

Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are created, and
select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing.

6.

Click OK.
is displayed
The new cloning template is added to Master Drawing Catalog. Icon
in the Master column of the Drawing List next to the drawing you added.

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 64)
Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)

Editing master drawing properties of cloning templates

Each cloning template type of master drawing in Master Drawing Catalog has its own catalog
properties. You can search for master drawings on the basis of its name, description and
keywords entered in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. The cloning template catalog
properties also define how dimensions and marks are created, and which objects are cloned
from the master drawings.

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

63

If you want to modify the drawing properties of cloning templates,

change them first in the actual drawing and add the drawing in Master
Drawing Catalog after that.

To edit the catalog properties of cloning templates:

1.

Double-click a master drawing of the desired type, or select the master drawing, rightclick and select Edit Properties. The type of the master drawing and the type of the
drawing to be created are shown in the dialog box

2.

Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.

3.

Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.

4.

Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.

5.

To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You
can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.

6.

Go to the Drawing creation tab.

, Marks, and Marks for welds in model, define whether you
a
For he Dimensions
t
want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing
(Create) or Ignore them in cloning.
b

7.
See also

Select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing: Drawing welds, Level
marks, DWG/DXF, Text files, Texts, Symbols, Graphics, and Hyperlinks).

Click OK to save your cloning settings.

Creating and adding preview images (p. 65)

Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 64)

Creating drawings using cloning templates

In Master Drawing Catalog you can create drawings using cloning templates that you have
added in the Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List.
Before you start, ensure that you have a cloning template with all the necessary properties and
contents in the Master Drawing Catalog.
1.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.

2.

Double-click the desired master drawing of type cloning template.

3.

Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are cloned. You
can select to ignore the dimensions and marks, clone them, or recreate them. The Marks
option controls revision marks and all marks for model objects. Then select the objects
to be cloned from the master drawing.

4.

Select the object(s) from the model.

5.

Click the Create drawings button.

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. You can click
the drawing list toolbar command to open the Drawing List.

See also

Cloning (p. 56)

Cloning through Drawing List (p. 82)
Marks in cloned drawings (p. 89)

64

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Checking dimensions and views in cloned drawings (p. 90)

Creating and adding preview images

You can create preview images in Tekla Structures and use them as preview images of master
drawings in Master Drawing Catalog.
To create and add the preview image:
1.

Create a drawing using the desired master drawing.

2.

Open the drawing in Drawing Editor. Delete all unnecessary objects from the drawing.

3.

Click Tools > Create Preview Image. The image is saved in the \drawings folder
under the model folder.

4.

Close the drawing to go to the Model Editor.

5.

To open the Master Drawing Catalog, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.

6.

Locate the desired master drawing and double-click it to open the Master Drawing
Properties dialog box.

7.

Add the image you created.

a
For master drawings of type saved settings, cloning templates, and wizard files,
click Change image and browse for the image you just created. Click OK to save
the image as a preview image.
b

See also

For rule sets created in Master Drawing Catalog, click Next until you get to the
page where you can add the preview image. Click Browse and browse for the
image you just created. Click Save to save the image as a preview image. Now
you can display the preview image by selecting the master drawing on the catalog
list, right-clicking and selecting Preview.

Editing master drawing properties of saved settings (p. 57)

Editing master drawing properties of rule sets (p. 60)
Editing master drawing properties and contents of wizard files (p. 61)
Editing master drawing properties of cloning templates (p. 63)

Selecting the displayed master drawings

You can select what type of master drawings you show in the Master Drawing Catalog . You
can also show cloning template type of master drawings from other models.
To select which models and master drawings to show:

See also

1.

In Master Drawing Catalog, click the

Master Drawings dialog box.

icon to open the Models Containing

2.

Select the master drawings that you want to show from the current model.

3.

To show master drawings from other models, click Add model and browse to the
desired model. You can show only cloning templates from other models.

4.

Click OK to save your selection.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Displaying master drawing descriptions

You can display a master drawing description in the folder view and in the search view. To do
this:

Click the master drawing description icon

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

65

The description entered in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed at the
bottom of the view.

Working with folders

In the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog you can do the following:

Example

Add new, rename, and delete folders

Copy master drawings to another folder
Delete master drawings from folders
Change the folder location in the tree

In the following example, we will create a new folder and two subfolders, change the order of
the subfolders, rename a folder and add master drawings to a subfolder. Then we will copy
master drawings to another folder and delete them from the original folder.

Deleting master drawings from a folder or copying them to another

folder does not affect the catalog contents in any way. The folder view is
just another way to help you to keep you master drawings well
organized.

66

1.

Open the Master Drawing Catalog by clicking Drawings & Reports > Create
Drawings.

2.

Click the folder view icon

3.

Right-click the tree area of the folder view and select Create new folder and type a
name for the folder. In this example, we use the name Master Drawings for
PROJECT2008.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

to go to the folder view.

See also

4.

To create a subfolder, select the folder, in this case Master Drawings for
PROJECT2008, right-click and select Create new subfolder. Type a name for the
folder. In this example, we use the name Site12. Create another subfolder (Site10)
in the same way.

5.

We notice that the name of the subfolder Site10 is not correct, it should be Site11.
To rename a folder, select the folder, right-click and select Rename or press F2, and
type a new name.

6.

Next, we want to move a folder upwards in the folder list. To move a folder upwards,
select the folder, in this case Site11, right-click,and select Move up to move the folder
one step upwards.

7.

Next we will copy drawings to the created folders. Open the folder containing the master
drawings that you want to copy. In this example, we have a search folder called
Single-part drawings for PROJECT2008 that contains all single-part
drawings for this project. Select the drawings that you want to copy. You can use Ctrl
or Shift to select several drawings.

8.

To copy the selected master drawings, right-click and select Add to and then select the
desired folder, in this case Site11. The master drawings are copied.

9.

We notice after copying that some of the drawings we just copied should be in the
Site12 folder. Copy the drawings there in the same way as above.

10.

Now you can delete the copied drawings from the original folder, in this case Site11
subfolder. To delete, select the copied drawings, right-click and select Delete or press
Del. The drawings are deleted from the subfolder.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Using search in Master Drawing Catalog

In the Master Drawing Catalog search view, you can do the following:

Search for master drawings on the basis of text that you have entered in the name,
description and keyword boxes in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.

Save your search results and, in the folder view, copy master drawings from a search
results folder to a folder that you have created for a certain purpose to make it easier for
you to locate the needed master drawings.

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

To search for master drawings and save the search results:

1.

Enter the search criteria in the box next to the Search button.

2.

Click Search. The results are listed.

3.

To save the search results, click Store, type a name for the search, and click OK.
a
The search results are added in the category list in the search view.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

67

Example

The search results are also displayed as a folder in the folder view. There you can
rename the saved search results, and copy the found drawings to the folders of
your choice.

If you want to remove the search results, select the results from the category list
and click Remove.

In this example, we want to find master drawigs that create drawings of single parts only:
1.

We type single in the search box and press Search.

The search found the following results:

We notice that the search results also contain lot of other types of rule sets than those
creating only single-part drawings, and we want to narrow the search.
2.

Next, we will make a new search by entering of single parts only and clicking

Search.

Now the results look like below. The description of the master drawings are written so well
that we can use quite precise search string and find exactly the two master drawings we
want to find.

68

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

3.

See also

Next, we save the search results by clicking Store and giving a name for the search. The
new search results with the specified name are added in the folder list in the folder view
and in the categories list in the search view

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog

You can delete master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog. You can delete master
drawings both in folder view and in search view.
To delete a master drawing:
1.

In the Master Drawing Catalog, select the master drawing(s) you want to delete.

2.

Right-click and select Remove from Catalog or press Del. Confirm the deletion.
Tekla Structures removes the master drawing(s) from the catalog. The drawings that you
have created on the basis of the removed master drawing are not removed, they are still
listed in the Drawing List. The catalog properties that you have entered for the master
drawing are not deleted. They are still available for the master drawing if you decide to
add the master drawing back to the catalog.

See also

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Using drawing-type-specific commands to create drawings

In the Model Editor, you can create drawings using menu commands and toolbar commands.
To create drawings using menu commands:
1.
2.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings, and select a drawing type.
Use the drawing properties dialog box to select the appropriate predefined drawing
properties, and then click Load.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

69

Select predefined properties

3.
4.

Click Apply or OK.

Click Edit > Selection Filter... and select an appropriate selection filter to select the parts
from which you want to create drawings.

Activate only Select parts on the Select switches toolbar when

selecting parts. Otherwise selection could take a long time in large
models.

5.
6.
7.

Select the entire model.

On the Drawings & Reports menu, select the drawing-type-specific command.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings. The created drawings are listed in the Drawing List
dialog box.

If you want to create drawings of individual parts, assemblies, model views, or existing
drawings, select those objects, select the desired object(s) and use the right-click pop up menu
to create the drawings.
See also

Before creating drawings (p. 48)

Creating single-part or assembly drawings (p. 70)
Creating cast unit drawings (p. 71)
Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 72)
Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 73)
Creating multi-drawings (p. 78)
Creating multiple drawings of the same part using properties dialog box (p. 79)
Opening drawings (p. 41)
Working with drawings (p. 90)
Selecting objects
Creating a selection filter

Creating single-part or assembly drawings

You can create all single-part or assembly drawings for a certain part type at the same time,
instead of selecting the parts one by one. You probably want the drawings for the same parts to
look similar and have the same properties.

70

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

To create single-part or assembly drawings of one type of part:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Use the selection filter to select the part type, for example, columns. Select the whole
model.
Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part Drawing... (or Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing...) to display the Drawing Properties
dialog box.
Select the predefined properties from the list box and click the Load button.
Click Apply or OK.
To create drawings, click Drawings & Reports > Create Single-Part Drawing (or
Drawings & Reports > Create Assembly Drawing).

To disable the drawing wizard from creating single-part and assembly

drawings from concrete parts, set the variable
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONC
RETE_PARTS to TRUE.

To prevent Tekla Structures from creating end views when you create an
assembly drawing and choose to include single-part drawings, set the
variable
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS to
TRUE.

If you do not want to create assembly drawings for assemblies that

contain only one part, set the
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_LOOS
E_PARTS to TRUE.
See also

Create Single-Part Drawing (p. 100)

Create Assembly Drawing (p. 101)

Creating cast unit drawings

Create cast unit drawings when you need several drawings of one cast unit to show information
about:

Dimensions
Formwork
Reinforcement
Cast-in fittings
Edge chamfers
Hard and soft insulation, see also Insulation (p. 359).

You can only create cast unit drawings of concrete parts and cast-in embeds (steel parts or
assemblies added to a cast unit). Cast unit drawings also show the bolts and welds in steel parts.
The volume and weight information of the cast unit remains accurate even if there are cuts
inside the cast unit. Edge chamfers can also be shown, and depending on the selected part
representation, edge chamfers also remove material.
Method

Create cast unit drawings:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

71

By cast unit position

Tekla Structures associates the drawing with the position number of the cast unit and all
cast units that have the same position number.

By cast unit ID

Tekla Structures associates the drawing with a specific cast unit, using its unique ID.
Sheet number

You can define sheet numbers for cast-unit drawings.

Steps

To create cast unit drawings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select the cast units, or use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model.
Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Cast Unit Drawing to open the drawing
properties dialog box.
Select the predefined properties you want to use from the list, and then click the Load
button.
Select the cast unit definition method: By cast unit position or By cast unit ID (default).
Click Apply or OK.
Click Drawings & Reports > Create Cast Unit Drawing.
Tekla Structures creates the cast unit drawings.

For detailed instructions on how to create cast unit drawings and to learn more about cast unit
drawing properties, see Create Cast Unit Drawing (p. 103).
For a general description of drawing types, see Cast unit drawing (p. 35).

Creating general arrangement drawings

To create a general arrangement drawing, click Drawings & Reports > Create General
Arrangement Drawing... in the Model Editor. For more detailed instructions on how to create
this type of drawing, see Create General Arrangement Drawing... (p. 104).

72

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

You do not need to update numbering to create or open general

arrangement drawings.

You can create general arrangement drawings from a named model view without opening the
view. You have the option to:

Create one drawing for each selected view

Add all selected views to one drawing

As an alternative, you can create an empty drawing, and then add model views to it using the
Drawing Editor. For detailed instructions on how to create drawing views, see View > Create
Drawing View > Of Entire Model View (p. 108) and View > Create Drawing View > Of
Selected Area in Model (p. 108).
See also

Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 73)

Creating anchor bolt plans

An anchor bolt plan is a special type of general arrangement drawing that displays the anchor
bolt layout.

To create an anchor bolt plan:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing.

In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, click Drawing properties...
In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click View...
In the General - View Properties dialog box, go to the Anchor bolt plan tab and set the
option Show as anchor bolt plan to Yes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

73

5.

If needed, set the option Create detail views to Yes to create separate detail views. If you
select No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the main drawing view. In this
dialog box, you can also control the enlarged part view scale. You can also create detail
views and control the detail view scale. All enlarged and detail views of an anchor bolt
plan are rotated with the main view.

6.
7.
8.

Click OK to close the General - View Properties dialog box.

Click OK to close the General Arrangement Drawing dialog box.
In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, click Create.

Define the drawing as an anchor bolt plan when you are creating the
drawing. You cannot convert a general arrangement drawing
afterwards to an anchor bolt plan.

When you create an anchor bolt plan, you can select only one view
and the view must be in the xy-plane. If these conditions are not
met, Tekla Structures displays a warning message and the anchor
bolt plan is not created.

If you selected to create detail views in the anchor bolt plan, Tekla Structures groups similar
detail views so that the similar details are drawn only once. If the detail views are not shown,
Tekla Structures displays the bolt dimensions in the enlarged view.
When details are compared, the following aspects are taken into account:

bolt dimensions
column profile
column orientation (coordsys)
plate profile

To see the ghost outline of the rest of the model in the anchor bolt plan,
use white drawing background with colored lines. In the Drawing Editor,
click Tools > Options > Drawing Color Mode and make sure that the
option Black and White is not selected.
Defining the
objects included
in an anchor bolt
plan

74

Tekla Structures selects the objects that are included in the anchor bolt plan based on the
following criteria:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

The part is a column or an almost vertical beam.

The part is the main part of an assembly.
A base plate is included in the assembly, and it is located lower than the main part. If there
is more than one part in the column assembly that fulfills the rules, the lowest part of them
is considered to be the base plate.

Bolts are attached to the base plate.

The assembly is cut by the view plane.
The boundary box of the base plate in X-Y direction intersects the boundary box of the
column.

If the default rules listed above do not produce the desired result, you can limit the number of
visible objects by using filtering to determine the parts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.
Use the following variables in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties
to indicate the names of the filters:

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER: the name of the filter for columns

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER: the name of the filter for bolts
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER: the name of the filter for base
plates

If you do not set the variables, the default rules are used to determine columns, baseplates, and
anchor bolts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.
You can also add parts to the anchor bolt plan that do not meet the above criteria. You may
want to add parts such as anchor rods and leveling plates that are not usually included in a
column assembly. This can be done by defining a drawing filter and entering the name of the
filter as the value for the variable
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER in Advanced Options >
Drawing Properties. For more information about adding additional parts in an anchor bolt plan
and for step-by-step instructions, see Adding additional parts in anchor bolt plan using a
drawing view filter (p. 76).
Bolt dimensions
in an anchor bolt
plan

Tekla Structures creates the bolt dimensions in an anchor bolt plan in the directions of the bolt
group coordinate system. If the angle between the bolt group and the view coordinate systems
is not orthogonal, Tekla Structures adds angle dimensions to the detail view.
To create the dimensions in the x and y directions of the main view, set the variable
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS
to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.

Include
assemblies in
anchor bolt plans

You can specify the distance of an assembly from the view plane for the assembly to be
included in the anchor bolt plan. To specify the distance, use the variable
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Drawing Properties. Define the distance in millimeters. The default
value is 200 mm.

Manual
dimensions

To add dimension points to the dimensions inside the enlarged views:

1.
2.
3.

Select the enlarged view frame.

Select the dimension to modify.
Right-click and select Add dimension point.

You cannot create new dimension lines that have dimension points
inside both the enlarged views and the main view.

See also

Examples of anchor bolt plans (p. 76)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

75

Adding additional parts in anchor bolt plan using a drawing view filter
You can use a drawing view filter to add parts thatare not usually part of a column assembly to
an anchor bolt plan, such as anchor rods or leveling plates. You need to define the name of the
filter as the value for the variable XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER. In
the following example we will make anchor rods and leveling plates visible in an anchor bolt
plan.
Usage

1.

2.
3.
4.

Result

Select Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties and enter the name
of the general arrangement drawing filter in
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER. In this example,
we will use the name SHOW_IN_ABPLAN.
In the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box, select Filter and go to the

Parts tab.

Enter ANCHOR*LEVEL* in the Name text box and select the checkbox next to the field.
Enter the name of the filter, SHOW_IN_ABPLAN, in the Save as text box and click Save

as.

When you create an anchor bolt plan, both the anchor rods and the leveling plates are shown in
the drawing. In the drawing below, the name of the anchor rod is "ANCHOR ROD" and the
name of the leveling plate is "LEVELING PLATE."

Examples of anchor bolt plans

Below are some examples of anchor bolt plans.
First an example of a typical situation, where all columns fall on the grid lines:

76

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

If the column reference point does not fall on the grid line, Tekla Structures dimensions the
reference point automatically relative to the grid lines:

If the column is rotated relative to the drawing, the rotation is also automatically dimensioned.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

77

If you set the associative option

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS
to FALSE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties and create the
drawing, all dimensions are in the drawing coordinate system.

Creating multi-drawings
Create multi-drawings when you need to:

78

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Include more than one assembly on a sheet

Place several single-part drawings on one sheet

Of what

You can include several types of objects in multi-drawings:

With or without
layout

Existing drawings
Model and drawing views
Selected parts and assemblies

If you create multi-drawings from existing drawings, you can choose to include their individual
layouts. If you want to have separate lists, tables, and call-offs for each part or assembly, you
should include the individual drawing layouts. You can also include lists and tables for all parts
or assemblies in the multi-drawing.

To remove extra space between drawing view labels and drawing views,
set the variable:
XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP to TRUE

For detailed instructions on how to create this type of drawing, see Create Multidrawings (p.
105).

Creating multiple drawings of the same part using properties dialog

box
You can create several drawings from the same part as multiple drawing sheets. The number of
sheets is not limited, and each drawing can have it's own properties. This is useful when you
need extra sheets for details and section views, and especially when you want to have several
drawings of an assembly with different presentation options: one with large 3D image of the
assembly, one with additional section views, and one where only certain parts or subassemblies
of the assembly are marked and dimensioned.
Usage

To create multiple drawings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

Open the drawing properties dialog box.

Adjust the drawing properties and change the name so that it refers to the type of drawing
you want to create, for example FRAME 3D. Do not touch the Sheet number.
Click Apply to keep the changes and leave the dialog box open.
Create a drawing of the object by selecting the appropriate command from the Drawings &
Reports menu.
In the drawing properties dialog box, adjust the drawing properties again and change the
name to match the type of the new drawing, for example FRAME FRONT. Change the
sheet number in the Sheet number text box to get another drawing of the same assembly
with a different sheet number.

Click Apply and create a new drawing of the same object.

Continue making all the sheets you need in the same way as above.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

79

Example

An example how the Drawing List shows the multiple drawings:

Using AutoDrawings to create drawings

The AutoDrawings wizard combines a series of actions so that you can create drawings using a
single command. You can use AutoDrawings to create single-part drawings, assembly
drawings, cast-unit drawings and multi-drawings.
AutoDrawings wizards contain instructions telling Tekla Structures which drawing type,
selection filter, and drawing properties to use. You can edit AutoDrawings wizard files or
create your own.
To see which wizards are available,click Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing... in the Model
Editor.

This command is displayed on the Drawings & Reports menu, if you

have set the variable XS_ENABLE_AUTODRAWINGS_IN_MENU to TRUE
in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
FALSE is the default. You can also create drawings using wizard files
(rule sets) in the Master Drawing Catalog.

Wizard log

By default, Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log
files contain information such as errors, number of drawings created, commands used, etc.

See also

AutoDrawings Wizard log

Creating AutoDrawings wizard files
Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing... (p. 107)

80

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Creating multiple drawings of the same part using AutoDrawings

You can create several drawings from the same part by defining multiple drawing attributes in
the AutoDrawings dialog box.
Usage

1.

Select Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing... to open the AutoDrawings dialog box.

2.

In the AutoDrawings dialog box, select the wizard file.

3.

Click Edit to open the wizard file.

4.

In the file, give the names of the drawing properties you want to use to create the
multiple drawings. Give the names in parenthesis in the set_drawing_attributes
row as shown below:
set_drawing_type(cast_unit)
set_drawing_attributes(sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()

5.

Save the wizard file.

6.

Click Show in the AutoDrawings dialog box. Tekla Structures displays the updated
wizard file.

7.

Select the part of which you want to create the drawings in the model.

8.

Click Create from selected in the AutoDrawings dialog box. Tekla Structures creates
the drawings.

Creating drawings from drawing templates using AutoDrawings

You can also load drawing templates using the AutoDrawings wizards. Each drawing template
can be from a different model.

This command is displayed on the Drawings & Reports menu, if you

have set the variable XS_ENABLE_AUTODRAWINGS_IN_MENU to TRUE
in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
FALSE is the default. You can also create drawings using wizard files
(rule sets) in the Master Drawing Catalog.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing .

In the AutoDrawings dialog box, select the drawing type and click Edit.
In a text editor, replace the string set_drawing_attribute with a string
set_template_drawing.
Enter a definition for set_template_drawing. Give the model path and the name of the
drawing template, for example
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]") and save the file.
Below is an example of how contents might look like.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]")
set_filter(beams)
create_drawings()

5.
See also

Click Create from all or Create from selected. AutoDrawings creates new drawings
using the defined drawing template.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

81

Cloning through Drawing List

You should consider cloning drawings when:

There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model

The drawings need a lot of manual editing

You need to produce single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawings of similar parts,

assemblies, or cast units

For example, you can create a drawing for one truss, edit the drawing, and then clone it for
similar trusses. Then you only need to modify the cloned drawings where the trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more parts than the original drawing. Part properties, marks,
associative notes and related text objects are cloned from a similar part in the original drawing.
In this section, you learn how to clone drawings in the Clone Drawing dialog box, which you
can access from the Drawing List. You can also clone drawings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. Also AutoDrawings dialog box allows you to clone using the drawing templates.
See also

Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 64)

Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings (p. 82)
Marks in cloned drawings (p. 89)
Checking dimensions and views in cloned drawings (p. 90)
Cloning general arrangement drawings (p. 83)
View-specific dimension cloning (p. 88)
Defining objects to be cloned (p. 85)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings

When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must have the
same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit from which the
original drawing was created. For example, the upper chords of the
original and the cloned truss could be main parts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.

82

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to clone.

In the model, select the parts or assemblies to include in the drawing.
In the Model Editor, click Drawings Reports > Drawing List... to open the drawing list.
Select the finalized drawing on the drawing list.
Click Clone....
In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types you want to clone into
the new drawing.
Select Create in the Dimensions and Other marks list box to recreate the dimensions and
other marks automatically when you clone a drawing. This option is useful if cloning the
dimensions or other marks do not produce satisfactory result. Using this option does not
create any new views.
Click Clone selected.
In the drawing list, the * character indicates a cloned drawing.

When you clone an assembly drawing that includes single-part drawings, Tekla Structures does
not include the single-part drawings in the cloned assembly drawing by default. To include
them, set the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED to TRUE in Tools >
Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.

Cloning general arrangement drawings

You can clone general arrangement drawings one plane view at a time.
1.

Edit a general arrangement drawing so that it includes everything that you want it to
have.

2.

In the Model Editor, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing List....

3.

Select the general arrangement drawing you want to clone from the list of drawings in
the Drawing List dialog box.

4.

Select the model view you want to use.

5.

Click Clone... in the Drawing List dialog box.

6.

In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types that you want to clone
into the new drawing, and the actions for each object type.

7.

Click Clone selected.

The cloned drawing appears in the list of drawings in the Drawing List dialog box.

Section and detail views are not cloned when cloning general
arrangement drawings.

Example

In this example we have an edited general arrangement drawing of the first floor of a building
to speed up the editing of the corresponding general arrangement drawing of the second floor.

The general arrangement drawing of the first floor has been slightly edited.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

83

We have completed the above steps to clone the drawing. In step 4, we selected the model view
that represents the second floor.

In the cloned drawing:

84

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

The drawing view plane has been moved to match the model view PLAN 2nd Floor plane.

If there are parts in matching places, the marks have been cloned to the new location and
the content has been updated.

Dimensions are cloned.

Other marks and notes are cloned.

Defining objects to be cloned

You can clone drawings for similar parts, assemblies, or cast units to produce single-part,
assembly, cast unit and general arrangement drawings, using the properties in the Clone
Drawing dialog box:

Field

Description

More information

Clone from

Select the sourcedrawing

or clone from a cloning
template.

XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOW
ED is set to TRUE.

Objects and actions

in cloning

Indicate which objects to

clone:

See also

Modeling welds are only available, if

Dimensions
Drawing welds
Modeling welds
Level marks
Revision marks
Other marks
Texts
Symbols
Other graphic
objects
Text files
DWG/DXF
Hyperlinks

Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings (p. 82)

Cloning general arrangement drawings (p. 83)
Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)
Creating drawings from cloning templates using Clone Drawing (p. 85)
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED

Creating drawings from cloning templates using Clone Drawing

Using the cloning feature you can create drawings from cloning templates, which you define in
the Tekla Structures template library.
To create a drawing from a cloning template:
1.

In the user.ini file located in the folder

..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin, set the variable
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY to point to the model folder that contains
the cloning templates (template library):
set XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=%XS_RUNPATH%\DrawingLibrary

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

85

For example:
set
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\CloningTempla
te

(where CloningTemplate is the model name).

2.
3.
4.
5.

See also

Create a cloning template in the folder defined by the variable

XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY.

To open the Clone Drawing dialog box, click Clone... in the drawing list dialog box.
Use the Objects and actions in cloning options to define the drawing objects to use in the
new drawing.
Select the Clone from > Other model option and click the Select template... button. You
can also use Browse to browse to the model folder containing the cloning templates that
you want.

6.

In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select the cloning template.

7.

Leave the list open and clone the cloning template drawing by clicking Clone selected.

Creating preview images of cloning templates (p. 86).

Creating preview images of cloning templates

You can create preview images of cloning templates. These screenshots are automatically
saved in the \drawings folder as .png files. You can later browse through the preview
images easily through Clone Drawings dialog box, and quickly find the cloning template you
are looking for. To create a preview image of a drawing and view the preview images that you
have created:
1.

86

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Open the drawing of which you want to make a preview image by double-clicking the
drawing in the Drawing List dialog box.

2.

Select Tools > Create Preview Image.

3.

Open the Clone Drawing dialog box by clicking Clone in the Drawing List.

4.

Select Other model and browse for the model.

5.

Click the Select template button to open the list of drawings that the selected model
has. On the list, there is a small icon in the Preview column if the drawing has a preview
image.

6.

Double-click the drawing to open the preview image.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

87

View-specific dimension cloning

You can clone the dimensions separately for the selected view only. With this feature you can
create automatic dimensions in the front view and clone the dimensions in section and end
view, for example.
Usage

88

1.

Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.

2.

Select Dimension creation method in this view > Clone on the Attributes 2 tab.

3.

Save and close the drawing.

4.

Open the Drawing List, select the drawing and click Clone.

5.

In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the objects to be cloned and the dimension
cloning option (Ignore, Clone, Create).

6.

Click Clone selected.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

The dimension cloning options in the Clone Drawing dialog box affect all views, whereas with
Dimension creation method in this view in the View Properties dialog box you can set the
dimension creation method for the selected view only. Selecting Clone as the dimension
creation method overwrites the dimension cloning option selected from the Dimensions list
box in the Clone Drawing dialog box.
Examples of different combinations of selections:

If you select Dimension > Ignore, the dimensions will be cloned only for those views that
have Dimension creation method in this view set to Clone.

If you select Dimension > Clone, the dimensions will be cloned for all views.
If you select Dimension > Create, the dimensions will be created for all views except for
those that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Do not create.

Marks in cloned drawings

Tekla Structures clones only marks that can be mapped to the original drawing. No marks are
created for new parts that you might have added in a cloned drawing. To create all marks to a
cloned drawing where new parts have been added, set the variable
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING to TRUE in Tools > Options >
Advanced options > Marking: General. The default is FALSE.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

89

Checking dimensions and views in cloned drawings

After cloning a drawing, you should always check it to ensure the dimensions and view sizes
are correct.
The size of section views is updated according to the main part even if the main part does not fit
into the view depth.
In single-part drawings, Tekla Structures automatically marks with a red dimension point
invalidity symbol the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part. To use
this feature in general arrangement, multi, and assembly drawings, set the variable
XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS to GMA.
If the cloned drawing contains less parts than the original drawing, the dimensions to the
missing parts are automatically removed.

In order to add and remove dimension points and to remove dimension

point invalidity symbols, you may have to adjust the drawing view size
so that the dimension points are inside the view.

To remove the red dimension point invalidity symbols in cloned drawings, do one of the
following:

In the Drawing Editor, click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Point Invalidity Symbol > Single and select the circle to remove.
Or to remove all circles, click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol > All.

Create a new dimension point (Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add Dimension
Point) at the correct position and delete the existing dimension point (Dimensioning >
Edit Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point).

When you delete incorrect dimensions, the red dimension point invalidity symbols will
also disappear. You can then recreate the dimensions.

2.4 Working with drawings

Use the Drawing List dialog box to work with and manage drawings.
To open the Drawing List dialog box, do one of the following:

Click the Open drawing list icon.

In the Model Editor, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... or press Ctrl + L.
In the Drawing Editor, select Drawing File > Open... or press Ctrl + O.

There you can open, update, edit, freeze, lock, clone, and delete drawings. You can also sort,
select, and display drawings according to different criteria, and print lists of certain drawings.
You can also use the drawing list to find the connections between the drawings and the parts in
the model.
See also

Locking and freezing drawings (p. 91)

Drawing objects associated with model objects (p. 91)

90

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 93)

Editing Drawings (p. 341)
Cloning single-part, cast-unit and assembly drawings (p. 82)
Creating drawings from cloning templates using Clone Drawing (p. 85)
Issuing drawings (p. 95)
Drawing revisions (p. 95)
Moving views to another drawing (p. 97)
Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)
Drawing List fields and buttons (p. 44)
Drawing status flags (p. 46)
Producing reports on selected drawings (p. 404)
Exporting drawings

Locking and freezing drawings

You can lock and freeze drawings so that they are not accidentally modified.
Locking

Locking prevents the drawings from being opened, updated, cloned, deleted, or modified, even
if the model changes. Tekla Structures flags locked drawings for update if the model changes.
See also Drawing status flags (p. 46).

Freezing

Freezing prevents the drawing views or associative objects, such as dimensions and marks,
from being updated. In frozen drawings only parts are updated. See Drawing objects
associated with model objects (p. 91).
If there have been changes in the model, the drawing views or associative objects may not
always be placed correctly in a general arrangement (GA) drawing. Use Freeze to solve the
situation.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Close the drawing without saving it.

Open the Drawing List dialog box and select the drawing.
Set Freeze to On.
Open the drawing.

Drawing objects associated with model objects

Tekla Structures drawings are associative. This means that objects in the drawing are linked to
model objects, so that most objects in the drawing are automatically updated if the model
changes, but you do not lose manual changes made to drawings. This applies to all drawing
types, created manually or automatically.
Tekla Structures updates the following drawing elements to reflect the changes in the model:

Parts
Marks
Dimensions
Welds
Views
Section marks
Detail marks

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

91

Associative notes
Lines and other shapes

Tekla Structures keeps the following manual changes made to drawings:

Base points of objects; for example, if you dragged the object to a new location
Object properties; for example, color, font, and line type

When you have frozen a drawing in Tekla Structures, the changes that
you make in associative objects afterwards in the model are no longer
available in the drawing.

Associative symbol
In the Drawing editor, the associative symbol
indicates which drawing objects are
automatically updated. The symbol does not appear in printed drawings.

To hide the associative symbol in drawings, click Tools > Options >
Associative Symbol, or use the shortcut Shift + A.

Highlight changes in associative dimensions, marks, and notes

Tekla Structures highlights the dimension text and mark contents that have been changed, and
the dimension points that have been moved. Tekla Structures highlights also the changes in
angle dimensions, level marks, and associative notes.
To enable the highlighting, set the variables
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES and
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES to TRUE.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following ways:

92

A change symbol (by default a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the new point and the
dimension values, or around the changed mark content or note.

An arrow is drawn from the old point to the new point.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

To change the appearance and the height of the change symbol, use the variables
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL and
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE.
To remove the change symbols, go to Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Change Symbol or Annotating > Review Marks > Remove Mark Change
Symbol or Remove Associative Note Change Symbol. Select Single or All, depending on
how many symbols you want to remove.

Change symbols in printed drawings

You can define the color and the visibility of the change symbol.
You can include the automatic change symbols in printed drawings and select the color of the
change symbol. To change the color of the change symbol, use the variable
XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR.

If you use the default color (magenta), the symbols are displayed on the
screen but they will not appear in the printed drawings.

Creating static drawings

To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating drawings if the model changes, clear
the value field of the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED.
See also Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 93).

Updating drawings when the model changes

This section explains how to create or update drawings of parts that have changed after
numbering. This section does not apply to general arrangement drawings.
Renumbering model objects after creating drawings may generate flags.
After changing a model:
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

Check the numbering settings. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering
Settings... and use the Compare to old settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box for
both the new and modified parts.
Renumber modified model objects (Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number
Modified Objects).
Check the drawing list for status flags.
To find out which drawings have been affected, select each drawing on the drawing list
with a
flag and click the Select objects button. Tekla Structures highlights the
affected parts in the model.
Check the numbering history log for renumbered parts. Click Tools > Display Log File >
Numbering History.... Part or Assembly at the beginning of a line in the numbering
history log indicates that Tekla Structures has renumbered parts or assemblies, as in the
following example:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

93

6.
7.

Select the affected drawings on the drawing list and click Update.
Create drawings of new parts.

To find which parts have been renumbered, select the relevant entries
from the numbering history log. Tekla Structures highlights the
corresponding part(s) in the model.
To view the properties of renumbered parts, right-click an entry in the
numbering history log and select Properties... from the pop-up menu.

When you update a drawing that has not been modified, the drawing is
recreated. The drawings are automatically recreated unless the drawing
has been edited and then saved, or the drawing has been issued using the
Issue functionality in the drawing list. Use the variable
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS to control the
recreation of unmodified drawings.
See also

Finding parts that have no drawings (p. 94)

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)
Drawing status flags (p. 46)

Finding parts that have no drawings

To identify and select parts that do not have drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Open a model view where all parts are visible.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... to open the Drawing List dialog box.
Select all the drawings.
Click Select objects. Tekla Structures highlights the parts that have drawings.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select the entire model. Tekla Structures highlights the parts
that do not have drawings.

Ensure that you have only the Select parts select switch active on the
Select toolbar when selecting parts. Otherwise selecting objects can
take a long time in large models.

94

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Modifying multiple drawings

To modify several drawings at the same time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the drawings to modify from the Drawing List dialog box.
Right-click and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
Modify the drawing properties.
Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
Click Modify in the drawing properties dialog box.

See also Editing Drawings (p. 341).

Issuing drawings
Use the drawing list to mark issued drawings:

Select the drawings and click the Issue On button.

Tekla Structures adds

flag to the selected drawings in the drawing list and saves the issue
date in the model database, so you can use it in reports and drawings.

To show the issue date in a report, add the template field DATE_ISSUE in
a report template.

To remove issue flags, select the drawings on the drawing list and click Issue Off.

Drawing revisions
When you revise drawings, you can attach information to them about the changes you have
made. Tekla Structures displays this information alongside the revision number or mark. The
revision date also appears in the revision table within drawings. The revision number or mark is
also shown on the drawing list by default.
The report drawing_issue_rev.xsr shows the most recent revision dates of drawings.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or
the revision marks on the drawing list. By default, it shows the revision
numbers. To see the revision marks on the list, set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST=TRUE.
See also

Producing reports on selected drawings (p. 404)

Add Revision Mark (p. 396)
Creating revisions (p. 96)
Changing revisions (p. 96)
Deleting revisions (p. 96)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

95

Creating revisions
Each drawing has its own unique revision number, but several drawings
can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the
same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select
multiple drawings from the drawing list.
To create a revision:
1.
2.

In the Drawing List dialog box, select the drawing(s) to revise.

Click Revision.... The Revision Handling dialog box is displayed.

3.

Enter a mark (minimum requirement). You can also enter a date for the revision, and add a
maximum of three lines of Text about the changes.
Click Create.

4.

Changing revisions
To modify an existing revision:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

In the Drawing List dialog box, select the drawing(s) to revise.

Click Revision....
In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the number of the revision in the list box next
to the Mark field.
Change the revision information.
Click Modify.

Deleting revisions
To delete a revision:
1.
2.
3.
4.

96

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Select a revised drawing from the drawing list.

Click Revision
In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number in the list box next to the
Mark field.
Click Delete. When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the
remaining revision numbers for that drawing. The revision marks do not change.

Moving views to another drawing

You can move section and detail views to another drawing in the drawing list. When you move
views to another drawing, the source drawing and target drawing will contain references to
each other.
To move drawing views to another drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

In the Drawing List dialog box, open the drawing.

Select the drawing view you want to move, right-click and select Move to drawing from
the popup menu.
Select the target drawing from the drawing list.
Click Move in the Move view to drawing dialog box.
Tekla Structures moves the view to the target drawing and creates references between the
source and target drawings.

Source drawing B.1 - 1 containing the section view.

The section view label contains a reference to the target drawing C.1 - 1.
Target drawing C.1 - 1.The view label contains a reference to the source
drawing B.1 - 1.
Label texts

To edit the reference text in the labels, use the following variables (in Tools > Options >

Advanced Options... > Drawing Properties):

XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE - the section view label

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE - the section symbol label
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE - the detail view label
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE - the detail symbol label

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

97

2.5 Saving and closing drawings

To save a drawing, click Drawing File > Save, or

Tekla Structures automatically saves drawings at set intervals. For information on how to
define the location of autosave files and set their location see Autosave.

To close a drawing, close the drawing window, or click Drawing File > Close (Back to
Model). A confirmation dialog box is displayed where Tekla Structures prompts you to
save the drawing.

2.6 Drawing reference

This section consists of the reference pages for the commands you can use to manage drawings.
To create drawings, select a command on the Drawings & Reports menu, or use the icons on
the Drawings toolbar in the Model Editor. The following table lists the drawing commands and
gives a short description of each one.

Command

98

Icon

Description

Numbering

Opens a submenu containing the

numbering commands

Create Drawings

Opens the Master Drawing Catalog where

you can create new drawings on the basis of
saved settings (drawing property files), rule
sets (wizards), and cloning templates.

Create Single-Part
Drawing (p. 100)

Creates single-part drawings of selected

parts.

Create Assembly
Drawing (p. 101)

Creates assembly drawings of selected

assemblies.

Create Cast Unit

Drawing (p. 103)

Creates cast unit drawings of selected cast

units.

Create General
Arrangement
Drawing... (p. 104)

Creates general arrangement drawings of

selected model views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Command

Icon

Description

Create Multidrawing

Opens a submenu containing commands

that create multi-drawings of selected
drawings, parts, or views.

Drawings & Reports >

AutoDrawing... (p. 107)

Displays the AutoDrawings dialog box and

automatically creates drawings of selected
parts.
This command is displayed on the

Drawings & Reports menu, if you have set

the variable

XS_ENABLE_AUTODRAWINGS_IN_MENU to
TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options > Drawing Properties. FALSE is

the default. You can also create drawings

using wizard files (rule sets) in the Master
Drawing Catalog.
To add views to drawings, use the icons on the View toolbar, or select a command on the View
menu in the Drawing Editor.

Command

Icon

Description

View > Create Drawing

View > Of Entire Model
View (p. 108)

Creates a drawing view of a model view

within a drawing.

View > Create Drawing

View > Of Selected Area
in Model (p. 108)

Creates a drawing view of the selected

area in the model.

View > Create Drawing

View > Of Selected Area
in Drawing View (p.
108)

Creates a new drawing view from an

existing drawing view within a
drawing.

View > Create Drawing

View > Of Selected Part
in Drawing View >
Front, Top, Back,
Bottom, 3D (p. 109)

Creates another view of a part from

another direction within a single-part,
assembly, or cast-unit drawing.

View > Create Drawing

View > Section View (p.
109)

Creates a section view from an existing

view.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

99

Command

See also

Icon

Description

View > Create Drawing

View > Curved Section
View (p. 110)

Creates a curved section view from the

existing view.

View > Create Drawing

View > Detail View (p.
110)

Creates a view from a detailed area of

an existing view in another scaled-up
view.

Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Copying and linking drawing views (p. 382)
DWG and DXF files in drawings (p. 362)
Numbering the Model
Create Multidrawings (p. 105)

Create Single-Part Drawing

Synopsis

Creates single-part drawings of the selected parts.

Preconditions

Numbering has to be up-to-date.

Description

Tekla Structures creates single-part drawings using the current properties in the Single-part
Drawing Properties dialog box. You can open the dialog box by selecting Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part Drawing. The filename extension of a saved

properties file is wd.

Field/Button

Description/More information

Name

The name of the drawing. See Common drawing

properties (p. 236).

Sheet number

You can create several sheets for a drawing. See

Creating multiple drawings of the same part using
properties dialog box (p. 79).

Title

User-definable text for drawing headers. See Common

drawing properties (p. 236).

Layout...

Scale and location of drawing views (p. 123), Drawing

size (p. 126)

View...

Drawing view properties (p. 241)

Section view...

Section view properties (p. 259)

Dimension...

Dimension properties (p. 222)

Dimensioning.
..

Dimensioning properties (p. 216)

Part...

Part and neighbor part properties (p. 269)

Neighbor
part...

100

Bolt...

Bolt and weld properties (p. 278)

Part mark...

Part mark properties... (p. 334)

Bolt mark...

Bolt mark properties... (p. 335)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Usage

Field/Button

Description/More information

N. part mark...

Marks for neighboring parts. See Part mark

properties... (p. 334).

Connection
mark...

Connection mark properties... (p. 336)

Protection...

Protection (p. 238)

Grid...

Grids in drawings (p. 320)

Surface
treatment...

Surface treatment properties (p. 288)

Surface
treatment
mark...

Surface treatment mark properties... (p. 338)

User-defined
attributes...

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

1.
2.

In the Model Editor, select the parts from which to create drawings using the appropriate
filters.
Do one of the following:

Click the Create single-part drawing icon.

On the Drawings & Reports menu, click Create Single-Part Drawing.
Right-click then select Create Drawings > Single-Part Drawing from the pop-up
menu.

To automatically open a drawing after you create it, hold down the Ctrl + Shift keys when you
create the drawing.
See also

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Creating drawings (p. 48)
Creating single-part or assembly drawings (p. 70)
Section view label and mark (p. 262)

Create Assembly Drawing

Synopsis

Creates assembly drawings of the selected assemblies.

Preconditions

Numbering must be up to date.

Description

Tekla Structures creates assembly drawings using the current properties in the Assembly
Drawing Properties dialog box. You can open the dialog box by selecting Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing. The filename extension of a saved
properties file is ad.

Field/Button

Description/More information

Name

The name of the drawing. See Common drawing

properties (p. 236).

Title

User-definable text in drawing headers. See Common

drawing properties (p. 236).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

101

Field/Button

Description/More information

Sheet number

You can create several sheets for a drawing. See

Creating multiple drawings of the same part using
properties dialog box (p. 79).

Layout...

Scale and location of drawing views (p. 123), Drawing

size (p. 126)

View...

Drawing view properties (p. 241)

Section view...

Section view properties (p. 259)

Dimension...

Dimension properties (p. 222)

Dimensioning.
..

Dimensioning properties (p. 216)

Part...

Part and neighbor part properties (p. 269)

Neighbor
part...

Bolt and weld properties (p. 278)

Bolt...
Weld...
Part mark...

Part mark properties... (p. 334)

Bolt mark...

Bolt mark properties... (p. 335)

Neighbor part
mark...

Marks for neighboring parts. See Part mark

properties... (p. 334).

Connection
mark...

Connection mark properties... (p. 336)

Protection...

Protection (p. 238)

Surface
treatment...

Surface treatment properties (p. 288)

Surface
treatment
mark...

Surface treatment mark properties... (p. 338)

Grid...

Grids in drawings (p. 320)

User-defined
attributes...

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

1.

Usage

2.

In the Model Editor, select the assemblies of which to create drawings. Use appropriate
filters.
Do one of the following:

Click the Create assembly drawing icon.

On the Drawings & Reports menu, click Create Assembly Drawing.
Right-click and select Create Drawings > Assembly Drawing from the pop-up
menu.

To automatically open a drawing after you create it, hold down the Ctrl + Shift keys when you
create the drawing.
See also

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Creating drawings (p. 48)
Creating single-part or assembly drawings (p. 70)
Section view label (p. 265)

102

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Create Cast Unit Drawing

Synopsis

Creates cast-unit drawings of the selected cast units.

Preconditions

Numbering must be up to date.

Description

Tekla Structures creates cast-unit drawings using the current properties in the Cast Unit
Drawing Properties dialog box. You can open the dialog box by selecting Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Cast Unit Drawing. The filename extension of a saved
properties file is cud.

Field/Button

Description/More information

Cast unit
definition
method

Creating cast unit drawings (p. 71)

Sheet number

You can create several sheets for a drawing. See

Creating multiple drawings of the same part using
properties dialog box (p. 79).

Name

The name of the drawing. See Common drawing

properties (p. 236).

Title

User-definable text in drawing headers. Common

drawing properties (p. 236).

Layout...

Drawing size (p. 126)

View...

Drawing view properties (p. 241)

Section view...

Section view properties (p. 259)

Dimension...

Dimension properties (p. 222)

Dimensioning...

Dimensioning properties (p. 216)

Part...

Part and neighbor part properties (p. 269)

Neighbor part...
Part mark...

Part mark properties... (p. 334)

N. part mark...

Marks for neighboring parts. See Part mark

properties... (p. 334).

Bolt...

Bolt and weld properties (p. 278)

Weld...
Bolt mark...

Bolt mark properties... (p. 335)

Reinforcement...

Reinforcement properties (p. 282)

Reinforcement
marks...
Surface
treatment...

Surface treatment properties (p. 288)

Surface
treatment mark...

Surface treatment mark properties... (p. 338)

Protection...

Protection (p. 238)

Grid...

Grids in drawings (p. 320)

User-defined
attributes...

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

103

1.

Usage

2.

In the Model Editor, select the cast units from which to create drawings using appropriate
selection filters.
Do one of the following:

Click the Create Cast Unit drawing icon.

On the Drawings & Reports menu, click Create Cast Unit Drawing.
Right-click, and then select Create Drawings > Cast Unit Drawing from the pop-up
menu.

To automatically open a drawing after you create it, hold down the Ctrl + Shift keys when you
create the drawing.
See also

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Creating drawings (p. 48)
Creating cast unit drawings (p. 71)
Section view label (p. 265)

Create General Arrangement Drawing...

Synopsis

Displays the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box and creates general
arrangement (GA) drawings of the selected model views.

Preconditions

The model views must exist.

Description

Tekla Structures creates GA drawings using the current properties in the General
Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box. You can open the dialog box by selecting
Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing or by clicking
Drawing Properties... in the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box.
The filename extension of a saved properties file is gd.

Field/Button

Description/More information

Name

The name of the drawing. See Common drawing

properties (p. 236).

Title

User-definable text in drawing headers. Common

drawing properties (p. 236).

Layout...

Drawing size (p. 126)

View...

Drawing view properties (p. 241)

To create anchor bolt plans, use the Anchor bolt plan
tab. See Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 73).

Filter...

Defines which parts are visible in the drawing.

Neighbor part
filter...

Defines which neighboring parts are visible in the

drawing.

Part...

Part and neighbor part properties (p. 269)

Neighbor part...
Bolt...

Bolt and weld properties (p. 278)

Weld...

104

Reinforcement...

Reinforcement properties (p. 282)

Part mark...

Part mark properties... (p. 334)

Bolt mark...

Bolt mark properties... (p. 335)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Field/Button

Description/More information

N. part mark...

Marks for neighboring parts. See Part mark

properties... (p. 334).

Connection
mark...

Connection mark properties... (p. 336)

Reinforcement
marks...

Usage

Protection...

Protection (p. 238)

Grid...

Grids in drawings (p. 320)

Surface
treatment...

Surface treatment properties (p. 288)

Surface
treatment mark...

Surface treatment mark properties... (p. 338)

Reference
objects...

Displaying reference models in drawings (p. 369)

User-defined
attributes...

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

1.
2.

Create the model view(s) you need.

Do one of the following:

3.

Click the Create general arrangement drawing icon.

On the Drawings & Reports menu, click Create General Arrangement Drawing....
Right-click in a view and select Create General Arrangement Drawing... from the
pop-up menu.

In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, select the model view(s) to
include in the drawing(s). You can:

Create one drawing for each selected view.

Add all selected views to one drawing.
You can also create an empty drawing, and then add model views to it.

4.
5.
6.
See also

To view or set the drawing properties, click Drawing properties.... Modify the properties
if necessary, and then click Apply or OK.
To open the drawing immediately after it is created Tekla Structures, select the Open
drawing checkbox.
Click Create.

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Creating drawings (p. 48)
Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 72)
Creating anchor bolt plans (p. 73)
Section view label and mark (p. 262)

Create Multidrawings
Synopsis

Creates multidrawings of the selected drawings, parts, or views.

Description

You have the following options to indicate which objects to include, and how to create
multidrawings:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

105

Command

Icon

Description

Empty Drawing

Creates empty multidrawings to which

you can add views and/or drawings.

Selected Drawings

Creates multidrawings of the selected

drawings. Select the drawings from the
drawing list before initiating the
command.

Selected Drawings with

Layout

Creates multidrawings of the selected

drawings, keeping the layout of each
selected drawing.

New Single-Part
Drawings of Selected
Parts

Creates single-part drawings of the

selected parts and places the drawings
in a multidrawing.

New Single-Part
Drawings of Selected
Parts with Layout

Creates single-part drawings of the

selected parts, keeping the layout of
each drawing, and places the drawings
in a multidrawing.

New Assembly
Drawings of Selected
Parts

Creates assembly drawings of the

selected parts and places the drawings
in a multidrawing.

New Assembly
Drawings of Selected
Parts with Layout

Creates assembly drawings of the

selected parts, keeping the layout of
each drawing, and places the drawings
in a multidrawing.

Tekla Structures creates multidrawings using the current properties in the Multidrawing
Properties dialog box. You can open the properties dialog box by selecting Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Multidrawing. The single-part or assembly drawings you
include retain their original properties.
The filename extension of a saved properties file is md.

Usage

106

Field/Button

Description/More information

Name

The name of the drawing. See Common drawing

properties (p. 236).

Title

User-definable text in drawing headers. See Common

drawing properties (p. 236).

Layout...

Select the layout for the drawing, select whether to list

hidden objects in templates, and modify size settings. See
Drawing size (p. 126).

Protection...

Protection (p. 238)

User-defined
attributes...

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

1.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Select the objects/drawings, views, or parts from which to create multidrawings. Use
appropriate filters.

2.

Do one of the following:

See also

Click the desired Create Multidrawing icon.

Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing and then select an option.
Right-click and then select Create Drawings > Multidrawing and an option from the
pop-up menu.

Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)

Creating drawings (p. 48)
Creating multi-drawings (p. 78)

Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing...

Synopsis

This command is displayed on the Drawings & Reports menu, if you

have set the variable XS_ENABLE_AUTODRAWINGS_IN_MENU to TRUE
in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
FALSE is the default. You can also create drawings using wizard files
(rule sets) in the Master Drawing Catalog.
Displays the AutoDrawings dialog box and automatically creates drawings of the selected
parts.
Preconditions

The appropriate wizard files must exist and numbering must be up to date.

Description

Tekla Structures AutoDrawings wizards create single-part, assembly, cast-unit or multidrawings using the settings in the wizard files, which control how the drawings are created.
You can choose from the predefined wizard files in the system folder, edit them, or create your
own. The AutoDrawings dialog box lists the available wizard files.

Usage

1.

Select the parts from which to create drawings. You can also select the entire model and
use filters to fine-tune your selection.

Use selection filters in the wizard file if you need to. If you do, your
selection can include parts that will not be included in the drawings.

2.
3.
4.
5.
See also

Select Drawings & Reports > AutoDrawing....

In the AutoDrawings dialog box, select a wizard file. To view the file, click Show. To edit
the file, click Edit.
On the Advanced tab, select whether to create a log file, what information it should
include and name the log file.
Click Create from selected.

Creating drawings using rule sets (p. 62)

Using AutoDrawings to create drawings (p. 80)
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files
Creating drawings from cloning templates using Clone Drawing (p. 85)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

107

View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View

Synopsis

Creates a drawing view of a model view in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have both the model view and the drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures calculates the boundaries of the view to fit the entire model view into the
drawing view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the drawing View
Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing,
but you can move the view.

Usage

1.
2.

In the Drawing Editor, click View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View.
Select the model view.

See also

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model

Synopsis

Creates a drawing view of a selected area in the model.

Preconditions

You must have a model view open.

Description

Pick two points in the model to define the x and y dimensions of the drawing view. The x and y
directions use the coordinate system of the model view. The view depth of the drawing view is
the same as the depth of the model view.
Tekla Structures creates drawing views using the current properties in the drawing View
Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing,
but you can move the view.

Usage

1.
2.
3.

In the Drawing Editor, click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model.
Pick the first corner of the model view.
Pick the second corner.

See also

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Drawing View
Synopsis

Creates a new drawing view from an existing drawing view within a drawing.

Preconditions
Description

Tekla Structures creates drawing views using the current properties in the drawing View
properties dialog box. A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the
mouse pointer and allows you to see where you are about to place the view.

1.

Usage

2.
3.
See also

In the Drawing Editor, click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in

Drawing View.

Select the area of which you want to make a view.

Select a position for the new view.

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

108

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Part in Drawing View > Front,
Top, Back, Bottom, 3D
Synopsis

Creates an additional front view of a part within a single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawing.

Preconditions
Description

You can select which part plane Tekla Structures uses to create the drawing view or create a 3D
view. The plane can be:

Front
Top
Back
Bottom

You can only select planes which do not already have a drawing view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the drawing View
properties dialog box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing,
but you can move the view.

Usage

In the Drawing Editor, click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Part in Drawing
View > Front, Top, Back, Bottom or 3D View and select the part plane.

See also

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

View > Create Drawing View > Section View

Synopsis

Creates a section view from an existing view.

Preconditions

Drawing must contain at least one view.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the section views in GA drawings always so that the Z axis points up:

In section views for XY plane views, or gently sloped planes like roof planes, the
viewpoint is rotated so that section views vertical axis will be parallel to the global Z axis.

In section views for XZ or YZ planes, the Z axis points up.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the drawing View

Properties dialog box.

Usage

In the Drawing Editor,

1.

Click View > Create Drawing View > Section View.

2.

Pick the first point on the cut plane (1).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

109

3.
4.
5.
6.

Pick the second point on the cut plane (2).

Pick a point to indicate the cut box (3).
Pick another point to indicate the cut box (4).
Pick a point to indicate the location of the section view in the drawing.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the mouse pointer and
allows you to see where you are about to place the view.

7.
See also

Tekla Structures creates the section view and adds a section mark in the original view.

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Adding views to drawings (p. 379)

View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View

Synopsis

Creates a curved section view from an existing view.

Preconditions

Drawing must contain at least one view.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the drawing View
Properties dialog box.

Usage

In the Drawing Editor,

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click View > Create Drawing View > Curved section view.
Pick the first point on the cut plane. Then pick a second and third point on the cut plane.
Pick a point to indicate the cut box. Then pick another point to indicate the cut box.
Pick a point to indicate the location of the curved section view in the drawing.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the mouse pointer and
allows you to see where you are about to place the view.

5.

Tekla Structures creates the curved section view and adds a section mark in the original
view.

View > Create Drawing View > Detail View

Synopsis

Creates a view from a detailed area of an existing view in another scaled-up view.

Preconditions
Description

Tekla Structures creates the detail view using the current properties in the drawing View

Properties dialog box.

110

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Detail view can either be in the same drawing as the existing view or you can move it to
another drawing.
Usage

In the Drawing Editor,

1.
2.

Click View > Create Drawing View > Detail View.

Pick the first corner of the detail view
OR
Pick the center point of the circle, if the symbol shape is set to Circle.

3.

Pick the second corner

OR
Pick a point on the circle.

4.
5.
6.

Pick a the position of the detail symbol.

Pick the insertion point for the detail view
Tekla Structures creates the detail view and adds a detail mark in the original view.

Detail label
Detail mark
Detail view
See also

Detail properties (p. 267)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

111

112

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Getting Started with Drawings

Introduction

Drawing Layout

This chapter describes drawing layout and explains how to define it in Tekla Structures.
To produce finalized drawings, you usually need to include a lot of other information, such as
lists and tables, for example. You also need to specify paper size, scale, and perhaps the types
of frames you want to use. This is what the layout is all about.

Audience

The sections Table layouts (p. 114) and Working with tables (p. 116) are primarily aimed at
administrators who define drawing templates. They also contain introductory information that
general users might find very useful.

Contents

This chapter is divided into the following sections:

How to use this

chapter

Introducing layouts (p. 113)

Table layouts (p. 114)
Working with tables (p. 116)
Key plan (p. 120)
Scale and location of drawing views (p. 123)
Drawing size (p. 126)

If you are using predefined layouts, and they suit your purposes, you might choose to read
Introducing layouts (p. 113), and then from Key plan (p. 120) onwards.

3.1 Introducing layouts

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of the layout and drawing views, e.g. plans, side views,
and section views.
Layout

A layout connects a set of table layouts and a set of drawing sizes. Before you create a
drawing, you must select a layout. Tekla Structures then selects the smallest defined drawing
size which will fit the drawing views and the connected table layout. This tells Tekla Structures
which elements to automatically include in your drawings.

Tables and
drawing sizes

A layout defines which drawing tables to include and sets the rules for increasing the drawing
size. Each layout has its own:

Table layouts

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

113

Fixed drawing sizes

Calculated drawing sizes

To define layouts, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout... in the
Model Editor. Tekla Structures displays the Layout dialog box. For more information, see
Working with tables (p. 116).
Tekla Structures includes several predefined layouts, which are connected to drawing types.
Each drawing type, assembly, single-part, cast-unit, general arrangement, and multi-drawing,
has its own layout. You can also define your own layouts.
Example

Using different layouts you can set assembly drawings to use A1 and A3 size drawing sheets,
and single-part drawings to use A3 and A4 sheets. You can also use layouts to include a
material list in assembly drawings, and not in general arrangement drawings.

Using layouts

To use layouts in drawings, open the drawing properties dialog box. Click Layout... and select
an option in the Layout list box.

Saved layouts

Tekla Structures saves the new layouts in separate files with the filename extension lay.
Layout files are located in the model folder. You can copy them to other projects.

To create drawings without a layout, create and use a layout with an

empty table layout.

See also

Table layouts (p. 114)

Drawing size (p. 126)

3.2 Table layouts

Tables and
templates

In Tekla Structures, we use the term tables to refer to various elements of the drawing layout,
such as:

Tables (e.g. revision table)

Title blocks
Lists (e.g. part and bolt lists)
General notes
Key plans
DWG/DXF files

Tables include information on drawing objects. If you change the model, Tekla Structures
updates the contents of the affected drawings and tables.
Table layout

A table layout is a group of tables which appear together in a drawing of certain type and size.
Table layouts define:

Which tables appear

Where the tables are located
How much space Tekla Structures leaves between the drawing frame and views

The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views. The
drawing views are blue, and the elements of table layout are red.

114

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Drawing views
and sizes

Table layouts only define the background, not the number or location of the drawing views to
include. You can use the same table layout with different drawing sizes, or give each drawing
size its own table layout.
For example, if the number of views changes in a drawing and Tekla Structures chooses a new
drawing size, Tekla Structures may also choose another table layout.

Drawing frames and foldmarks are not included in table layout. You
define them when you print drawings. See Drawing frames and
foldmarks (p. 413).

See also

Defining margins and spaces in drawings (p. 115)

Working with tables (p. 116)
Key plan (p. 120)
Scale and location of drawing views (p. 123)
Drawing size (p. 126)

Defining margins and spaces in drawings

Table layouts define the margins between the drawing views and the frame, and the space
between two drawing views.
A margin is the width or height from the outermost drawing views to the drawing frame. A
space is the horizontal or vertical distance between two drawing views.
Use the Table Layouts dialog box to define margins and spaces for table layouts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select a layout and click Table layout....
Select the table layout on the list. To create a new table layout, enter its name and click
Add.
Enter margins and spaces.
Click Update.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

115

6.
7.
See also

Repeat step 35 for each table layout.

Click Apply or OK.

Table layouts (p. 114)

Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 413)

3.3 Working with tables

Use the Tables dialog box to work with tables and define table layouts.
To open the Tables dialog box:
1.
2.
3.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select a layout and click Table layout....
Select the table layout and click Tables....

To define a table layout for drawings:

116

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Select the tables you want to include.

Define the location of each table in the table layout.
Set the scale and transparency of each table.
Define the distances between the tables.

Template Editor

Tekla Structures includes many predefined tables. You can also create your own tables and
modify existing ones using the Template Editor (TplEd). To open the Template Editor, click
Drawings & Reports > Template Editor... in the Model Editor or Tools > Template Editor...
in the Drawing Editor. See also Template Editor Users Guide.

See also

Selecting tables to be included in the table layout (p. 117)

Defining the location of tables in the table layout (p. 117)
Defining distances between tables (p. 118)
Setting table scales and transparency (p. 118)
Replacing a table with another one (p. 119)
Opening tables in Template Editor (p. 119)

Selecting tables to be included in the table layout

To select the tables to include in a table layout:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
See also

Open the Tables dialog box (Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout > Table Layout > Tables...).
On the Available tables list, double-click each table you want to include in the table
layout. You can also use the arrow buttons to add and remove tables.
Set the table properties as required. See Defining the location of tables in the table
layout (p. 117) and Setting table scales and transparency (p. 118).
Click Update.
Click Apply or OK.

Working with tables (p. 116)

Key plan (p. 120)

Defining the location of tables in the table layout

You define the location of each individual table in a table layout by binding it to the drawing
frame, or to another table.
Example

In the illustration below, the lower right corner of the drawing title (the table) is bound to the
lower right corner of the drawing frame (the reference object).

To define the location of tables in a table layout:

1.
2.

Open the Tables dialog box (Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout > Table Layout > Tables...).
Open the Tables dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

117

3.
4.

Select a table from the Chosen tables list.

Choose one of the table corners as its reference point, and select the checkbox in that
corner.
5. In the Reference list box, select the reference object (i.e. another table or the drawing
frame).
6. Choose the reference point of the reference object, and select the checkbox in the
appropriate corner.
7. In the Vector between corners fields, define the horizontal and vertical distances of the
table from the reference object.
8. Click Update.
9. Repeat steps 27 for all the tables on the Chosen tables list.
10. Click Apply or OK to save the table layout.

Two reference
points

You can also position a table to the midpoint of a frame or table boundary by selecting two
reference points, for example, the lower left and right corners.

If you do not use the right combinations of reference points for tables
and binding objects, Tekla Structures may position drawing tables
outside the drawing.

See also

Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 413)

Working with tables (p. 116)
Selecting tables to be included in the table layout (p. 117)
Setting table scales and transparency (p. 118)

Defining distances between tables

By default, Tekla Structures places tables side by side. If you need a space between tables, you
can define a vector between the table reference point and the binding object reference point.
Use the x and y fields to enter the distances.

Setting table scales and transparency

Scale

118

You can scale tables created with the Template Editor and DWG/DXF files to different sizes.
Each table and DWG/DXF file in a table layout can have its own scale. The values you enter
determine the size of the scaled object relative to the original.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Transparency

You can also define whether tables in drawings are transparent or not. A transparent table can
overlap with another table, view, or drawing object. For example, if you use DWG/DXF
drawing frames, you should make them transparent. Otherwise you will not be able to locate
any other objects inside the frames.
To make a table transparent, select the Transparent checkbox in the Tables dialog box.

See also

Working with tables (p. 116)

Replacing a table with another one

Changing tables

When you delete a table from a table layout and replace it with a new one, you will need to
define the location of the new table relative to the remaining tables. The new table does not
automatically inherit the location of the deleted table. See Defining the location of tables in
the table layout (p. 117).

Checking
references

You should also check that the remaining tables do not use the deleted table as their reference.
If they do and you delete the table, you cannot see any tables at all in the layout.

Opening tables in Template Editor

If you need to modify the tables in the drawing, then you will need to open them in Template
Editor (TplEd). In the Template Editor, tables are called templates.
1.
2.
3.

Open the drawing.

In the drawing, double-click the table you want to modify.
Tekla Structures shows the following message:

4.

Click OK. Template Editor appears with the selected template.

You can only open tables with templates created or saved in Template
Editor version 3.2. or greater.

See also

Template attributes in System Manual contains a list of fields that can be used in
templates.

TplEd User's Guide explains how to use the Template Editor.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

119

Adding images in drawing templates

You can add images in the graphical templates (.tpl). You might want to include a company
logo in your drawing, for example. Tekla Structures supports the following image formats in
graphical templates: .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg ..tif, .tiff,and .png.
Before you start, open an existing template in Template Editor or create a new one. See
Template Editor Users Guide or online help for details.
To add images in Template Editor:
1.

Select a component were you want to add the image.

2.

Click Insert > Picture. This displays the Select Picture File dialog box. By default, this
dialog box displays the contents of the ..\environment\common\symbols
folder. Only the supported image file types are displayed.

3.

Select an image from the list and click OK.

4.

Draw a frame for the image. Template Editor adds the image in the frame.

Do not add images of extensive size, as they update very slowly.

When you export the drawing to DWG, Tekla Structures copies the
images in the same folder as the DWG file. If the image for some
reason is not in the same folder, only the name of the image is
displayed together with an empty frame instead of the image in the
DWG.

When you open the drawing that contains images inserted in the
template, Tekla Structures first looks for the images from the
..\environment\common\symbols folder and then from the
model folder.

The image may look different in the image editor than in the
printout or in the exported DWG file.

3.4 Key plan

A key plan is a small map in a drawing that locates an assembly, a cast unit, or a part in the
model. The key plan includes the model grid and the assembly, cast unit, or part shown in the
drawing.

120

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Key plan
Key plans are Tekla Structures drawings, or key plan drawings, which contain a drawing view
or a DWG/DXF file.
See also

Drawing view as a key plan (p. 121)

DWG/DXF as a key plan (p. 122)
Adding a key plan to a drawing layout (p. 122)

Drawing view as a key plan

When you use a drawing view as a key plan, Tekla Structures automatically includes the
correct part in it.
As a key plan, you can use only drawings that contain only one view (of the right scale and
size). Tekla Structures only uses the view from the drawing. The view position, drawing size,
and templates are not relevant to a key plan drawing.
Set the view properties for the key plan as follows:

Tekla Structures uses the scale of the key plan view in every drawing using it.

Other drawing view properties also affect the key plan. If you set part and bolt marks to be
visible in the key plan view, they will also be visible in the small key plan included in the
drawing.

Tekla Structures automatically includes the correct part when you insert the small key plan
into the drawing.

In the drawing view properties, set the drawing view boundaries (Extrema) so that all parts
are visible.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

121

You should not filter anything with not in drawings that will be used as
key plans. Tekla Structures clears the not check boxes in the drawing
filter automatically when the key plan is inserted into another drawing.

See also

Adding a key plan to a drawing layout (p. 122)

DWG/DXF as a key plan (p. 122)

DWG/DXF as a key plan

You can also include a DWG or DXF file in a key plan drawing. Using this method means you
can also include other Tekla Structures drawing objects in the key plan.
To create the key plan drawing:
1.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement

Drawing....

2.

In the Options list box, select Empty drawing. Select the Open drawing checkbox. Click
Create. Tekla Structures opens the Drawing Editor.

3.

Click View > Add DWG / DXF File..., and then locate the DWG/DXF file you want to use
as the key plan. Click Apply or OK.
Pick the top left corner point of the rectangle.
Add text, lines, or other drawing objects as required.
Click Drawing File > Save to save the drawing.

4.
5.
6.

To add the key plan to a drawing layout, follow the instructions in Adding a key plan to a
drawing layout (p. 122).

Do not create views in the key plan drawing if it already contains a

DWG/DXF object.

See also

Drawing view as a key plan (p. 121)

Adding a key plan to a drawing layout

First you need to add the key plan drawing to table layout(s). Then you need to check the
drawing properties to ensure that the drawings are using the right layout.
To add the key plan to a table layout:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

122

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select the layout you want to modify. Click Table layout....
Select the table layout you want to modify. Click Tables....
From the Available tables list, double-click Key plan. The drawing list appears.
Select the key plan drawing and click OK.
From the Chosen tables list, select Key plan and set the key plan location. See Defining
the location of tables in the table layout (p. 117).

You cannot scale the key plan in the Tables dialog box. The properties
of the key plan drawing view define the key plan scale and size.

7.
8.

Click Update.
Quit with OK.

3.5 Scale and location of drawing views

This section explains how to set the scale and location of drawing views, using the drawing
properties dialog box.
See also

Automatically scaled drawing views (p. 123)

Location of views in drawings (p. 124)
Drawing Properties (p. 235)
Drawing view properties (p. 241)
Drawing section view properties (p. 258)
Defining which drawing views to create (p. 242)
Adding section views to drawings (p. 259)

Automatically scaled drawing views

You have the following options for setting the scale of drawing views:

Specify exact scales for views.

Let Tekla Structures automatically determine the appropriate scales (using the layout,
included tables, and drawing size).

The following topics explain how to scale drawing views automatically.

If you prefer certain drawing view scales for certain drawing sizes, see Defining exact
drawing view scales (p. 242).
See also

Specifying drawing size (p. 127).

Using autoscale (p. 123)
Scale change mode (p. 124)
Preferred size (p. 124)

Using autoscale
Having Tekla Structures automatically scale drawing views limits the size of the drawing.
When you use Autoscale, Tekla Structures first tries to use the preferred scale, then the
alternative scales. You define these in the drawing properties dialog box.

Preferred scale

To use Autoscale, select click Layout... > Scale > Autoscale > Yes.

You can define different preferred scales for main and section views. In the drawing properties
dialog box, click View... (or Section view...) > Attributes > Scale and enter the scale.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

123

Alternative scales

If you are using Autoscale and drawing views do not fit into a drawing using the preferred
scale, Tekla Structures tries the alternative scales.
You can define different scales for main and section views. In the drawing properties dialog
box, click Layout... > Scale > Main views scale (or Section view scales) and enter the
scales.

To list the alternative scales, enter the denominators of scales and

separate them with spaces. For example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales
1/5, 1/10, 1/15, and 1/20.

Scale change mode

To define the relationship between the scales of main and section views within a drawing, click
Layout... > Scale > Scale change mode in the drawing properties dialog box. The following
options are available:

main = section

The scales of main and section view are equal.

main < section

Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.

main <= section

Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section view scales.

Preferred size
Tekla Structures tries to use the preferred size as the maximum drawing size when it
automatically scales drawing views. See also Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings (p.
129).

Location of views in drawings

The following settings tell Tekla Structures how to place views in drawings. You set them in
the drawing properties dialog box. Click the Layout... button, and go to the Other tab. To
define which views Tekla Structures creates, see Defining which drawing views to create (p.
242).
See also

Setting the projection type (p. 124)

Setting the section and end view location (p. 125)
Including single part views in assembly drawing (p. 126)
Expanding shortened parts (p. 126)

Setting the projection type

Projection type defines how Tekla Structures places the projections of a part in cast-unit,

single-part, and assembly drawings. You can select:

To set the projection type, click Layout in the drawing properties dialog box and go to the
Other tab.

124

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

First angle (also referred to as European projection)

Third angle (also referred to as American projection).

Example

Description
First-angle projection

Third-angle projection

Setting the section and end view location

You can set Tekla Structures to always place section views and end views next to the main
view in a single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawing, or in any empty location in the drawing.
1.
2.
3.
4.

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Layout and go to the Other tab.
Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
Click OK or Apply.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

125

Example

Description
End section views in any
location

End section views beside the

main view

Including single part views in assembly drawing

In assembly drawings, you can include single-part drawings of the assembly parts. See Singlepart views in assembly drawings (p. 246).

Expanding shortened parts

After Tekla Structures has scaled drawing views and selected the drawing size, it may stretch
shortened views to fill up empty areas of the drawing. You can control this in the drawing
properties dialog box (Layout... > Other > Expand shortened parts to fit (Yes)). See also
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254).
For information on placing, moving, rotating, copying, and linking drawing views, see
Working with drawing views (p. 378).

3.6 Drawing size

In Tekla Structures, you have two options how to set the drawing size. You can either:

126

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Specify exact sizes for drawings.

Let Tekla Structures find appropriate drawing sizes (according to the layout, tables in it,
and the drawing view scales).

If you prefer to use a specific drawing size rather than specific drawing view scales, read
Specifying drawing size (p. 127). If you prefer to use specific drawing view scales rather than
a specific drawing size, read Automatically sizing drawings (p. 128).
See also Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings (p. 129).

The drawing size should always be smaller than the actual paper size to
accommodate printer margins. For more information on paper sizes and
print areas, see The printer catalog (p. 422).

See also

Specifying drawing size (p. 127)

Automatically sizing drawings (p. 128)
Defining fixed drawing sizes (p. 128)
Defining calculated drawing sizes (p. 129)
Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings (p. 129)

Specifying drawing size

If you prefer to use a specific drawing size rather than specific drawing view scales, do the
following before creating the drawings.
In the drawing properties dialog box:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

To specify the drawing size, click Layout... > Drawing size > Size definition mode
(Specified size).
Enter the specified drawing size.
Select the table layout.
To let Tekla Structures automatically scale the drawing views, click the Scale tab and
select Autoscale (Yes).
Enter the scales you want Tekla Structures to use in main and section views. See Using
autoscale (p. 123).
Select the scale change mode. See Scale change mode (p. 124).
Enter the preferred size.
Click Apply or OK.

The Drawing size and Scale tabs and steps 47 above only relate to
single-part, assembly, and cast-unit drawings.

You can also have Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes for drawings, when the number, size,
or location of drawing views may change and affect the drawing size. See Automatically
sizing drawings (p. 128).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

127

Automatically sizing drawings

You can let Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes and table layouts for drawings. This is very
useful if, for example, the number, size, or location of drawing views might change. Tekla
Structures automatically updates drawings to adapt to these changes by using different drawing
sizes and table layouts.
If you prefer to use specific drawing view scales rather than a specific drawing size, do the
following before creating the drawings.
In the drawing properties dialog box:
1.
2.

Click Layout... > Drawing size > Size definition mode (Autosize).
Select the set of drawing sizes for Tekla Structures to use. You have the options:

3.
4.

Calculated sizes
Fixed sizes
Calculated/fixed sizes

To fix the scales of drawing views, click the Scale tab and select Autoscale (No). Tekla
Structures will use the preferred scales of the main and section views. See also Defining
exact drawing view scales (p. 242).
Click Apply or OK.

The Drawing size and Scale tabs and step 3 above only relate to singlepart, assembly, and cast-unit drawings.

See also

Drawing sizes (p. 128)

Table layout (p. 128)

Drawing sizes
For more information on the drawing sizes, see:

Defining fixed drawing sizes (p. 128)

Defining calculated drawing sizes (p. 129).

If you decide to use both calculated and fixed sizes, Tekla Structures selects the smallest of the
suitable drawing sizes.
For information on using a specific drawing size, see Specifying drawing size (p. 127).
See also Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings (p. 129).

Table layout
If Tekla Structures changes the size of the drawing, it may also need to change the table layout
to adapt to the new drawing size. It will then use another appropriate table layout within the
same layout specified in the drawing properties dialog box. See also Table layouts (p. 114).

Defining fixed drawing sizes

The fixed drawing sizes are included in specific layouts and have a specific size (width and
height), and table layout.
To define the fixed drawing sizes included in a layout:

128

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select the layout and click Fixed sizes....
Select a fixed size on the list. To create a new size, enter its name and click Add.
Enter the width and height.
Select the table layout.
Click Update.
Repeat steps 36 for each fixed size.
Click Apply or OK.

Use fixed sizes when you print drawings to small (A4 and A3) print
devices.
Single-part and assembly drawings also typically use fixed drawing
sizes.
See also

Automatically sizing drawings (p. 128)

Defining calculated drawing sizes (p. 129)

Defining calculated drawing sizes

You use calculated drawing sizes to define the rules Tekla Structures follows when it
automatically adjusts drawing size. You can also connect layouts to drawing sizes which meet
certain criteria.
To set the rules and connect layouts:
1.
2.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select the layout and click Calculated sizes....

Size calculation

Using Increasing step to define the interval by which Tekla Structures increases the drawing
size when it needs to. This can be set individually for drawing width and height. You can also
define the maximum size of the drawing. If the drawing exceeds the width or height limit you
set here, Tekla Structures uses an oversize sheet with no table layout.

Connected table
layouts

You can connect a layout to drawings which meet one of the following size criteria:

Size A4 for drawings exactly this size

Size A3 for drawings exactly this size
Height = A3 for drawings the same height as an A3 sheet (=297 mm)
Height > A3 for drawings with a larger height than A3.

For each size, Tekla Structures makes the table layouts available depending on the layout you
select.
See also

Automatically sizing drawings (p. 128)

Defining fixed drawing sizes (p. 128)

Both autoscaling and autosizing drawings

If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, it is a good idea to
let Tekla Structures take care of both. When you use both autoscaling and autosizing at the
same time, Tekla Structures follows the steps below:
1.

Find a drawing size into which drawing contents fit.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

129

2.
3.

Fix the drawing size.

Scale up drawing views as far as drawing contents fit. Use alternative scales for main and
section views, and the drawing size fixed in step 2.

Preferred size should be equal to one of the fixed drawing sizes of the
layout.

130

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Layout

Dimensioning

There is a multitude of options for creating and controlling dimensions in Tekla Structures.
Very often modifying one dimension setting affects how other settings work. You may want to
experiment with these settings.
See also

Dimension basics (p. 131)

Part dimensions (p. 137)
Bolt dimensions (p. 142)
Position dimensions (p. 145)
Dimensioning nested assemblies (p. 164)
Reinforcement dimensions (p. 157)
Using check dimensions (p. 164)
Controlling dimensions (p. 166)
Dimension appearance and location (p. 197)
Automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings (p. 176)
Dimension reference (p. 215)

4.1 Dimension basics

To define the dimension properties for drawings:
1.
2.
3.
See also

Select Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and the desired drawing type to open the
drawing properties dialog box.
Click the Dimensioning... button to define which dimensions Tekla Structures creates
automatically.
Click the Dimension... button to define how Tekla Structures shows dimensions in
drawings.

Dimension types (p. 132)

Automatic dimensioning (p. 133)
Manual dimensioning (p. 133)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

131

Dimension planes (p. 135)

Dimension types
Tekla Structures includes the following dimension types:

Image

Name

Description

Relative

Point to point dimensions.

Absolute

Dimensions from a common

starting point.

Relative and
absolute

Combination of point to point and

common start point.

US absolute

Dimensions from a common

starting point, which include a
running dimension mark (RD).

US absolute
2

Similar to US absolute, but it

changes short dimensions to
relative.

Absolute
plus short
relatives

Similar to Absolute, but it changes

short dimensions to relative.

Absolute
plus all
relatives
above the
absolutes

Similar to Relative and absolute,

but it places the relative dimensions
above the absolute.

Elevation

Creates an elevation dimension at a

picked point. Only available for
manual dimensions in the Drawing
Editor.

To make internal and shape dimensions relative, use the variables

XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS and
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS.

US absolute 2 changes the dimension line type to relative if the

dimension text is too long to fit the dimension line. The variables
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT and
XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR
control the limit when the dimension type is changed.

132

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Automatic dimensioning
Use the drawing properties dialog box to set up dimensions for cast-unit, assembly, and singlepart drawings. Two buttons open the dialog boxes for Dimension Properties and
Dimensioning Properties.

Dimensioning Properties controls which dimensions Tekla Structures creates.

Dimension Properties controls how Tekla Structures presents the dimensions in the

drawing. For more information, see Dimension appearance and location (p. 197).

Pre-defined dimension defaults

The Load list box in the drawing properties dialog box, contains several pre-defined default
settings that affect how Tekla Structures automatically generates appropriate dimensions.

For more information on drawing properties, see Drawing Properties (p. 235).

Manual dimensioning
You can use several tools to modify automatically generated dimensions and add new
dimensions to them. All these commands are available in the Dimensioning menu in the
Drawing Editor.

Command

Icon

Description

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Add/
Remove Dimension
Point (p. 228)

Lets you add a new dimension point.

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Add/
Remove Dimension
Point (p. 228)

Lets you remove an existing dimension

point.

Edit Dimensions > Flip

Outside Dimension

Place the outside dimension on the

other side of the extension line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

133

Command

Icon

Description

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Point
Invalidity Symbol (p.
229) > Single

Deletes a single dimension point

invalidity symbol without deleting the
dimension line.

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Point
Invalidity Symbol (p.
229) > All

Deletes all red dimension point

invalidity symbols without deleting the
dimension line.

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Change
Symbol (p. 230)> Single

Deletes a single dimension change

symbol.

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Change
Symbol (p. 230) > All

Deletes all dimension point change

symbols.

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Check
Dimension Point
Validity (p. 229) >

Check the validity of a single

dimension point.

Single

134

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Dimensioning > Review

Dimensions > Check
Dimension Point
Validity (p. 229) > All

Check the validity of all dimension

points.

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Set
Dimension Start Point
(p. 229)

You can pick a new start point for

running dimensions.

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Combine
Dimension Lines (p.
227)

Combines a group of two or more

parallel dimension lines into one line.

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Link
Dimension Lines (p.
228)

Connects the ends of two non-parallel

dimension lines.

Dimensioning > Edit

Dimensions > Unlink
Dimension Lines (p.
228)

Disconnects dimension lines.

Dimensioning > Add

Horizontal Dimension
(p. 223)

Creates a dimension in the x direction.

Dimensioning > Add

Vertical Dimension (p.
224)

Creates a dimension in the y direction.

Command

Icon

Description

Dimensioning > Add

Orthogonal Dimension
(p. 224)

Creates an orthogonal dimension in the

y or x direction.

Dimensioning > Add

Parallel Dimension (p.
224)

Creates a dimension parallel to a line

defined using two points.

Dimensioning > Add

Perpendicular
Dimension (p. 224)

Creates a dimension perpendicular to a

line defined using two points.

Dimensioning > Add

Free Dimension (p. 224)

Creates a dimension parallel to the line

between any two picked points.

Dimensioning > Add

Curved Dimension >
With Orthogonal
Reference Lines (p. 225)

Creates a curved dimension line

between two picked points.

Dimensioning > Add

Curved Dimension >
With Radial Reference
Lines (p. 225)

Creates curved dimensions with radial

reference lines.

Dimensioning > Add

Curved Dimension >
With Orthogonal
Reference Lines (p. 225)

Creates curved dimensions with

orthogonal reference lines.

Dimensioning > Add

Radial Dimension (p.
226)

Creates a radial dimension.

Dimensioning > Add

Angular Dimension (p.
226)

Creates an angular dimension.

Dimensioning > Add

Dimensions for all Parts
(p. 227)

Recreates all dimensions automatically

in drawings.

Dimension planes
You can define how Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For example,
you can have Tekla Structures always dimension round bars to the middle of the profile and
large I profiles to the top.
To define dimension settings, you need to use a dimension planes table. This is a text file
(dim_planes_table.txt) that you can edit using any text editor, for example Notepad. It
is located in the \environments\*environment*\profil folder.
To use the table, set the variable XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE as follows in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: Parts:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt

This variable defines the path to the part dimension planes table.
To use the new settings in drawings, you need to restart Tekla Structures and recreate the
drawings. Changing the file does not automatically update existing drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

135

Dim planes table

Here is an example of a dimension planes table:

dim_planes_table.txt
FLANGE

WEB

ProfType,MaxSize, middle,right, left,

middle, right, left

=======================================================
=
1,

300.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE,

7,

-1.0,

TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE,

FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE

TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE

The line beginning with 1 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions I-profiles (ProfTyp =
1) smaller than 300 mm (MaxSize = 300) to the middle of the flange and to the right edge of the
web, no matter how the part was created.
The line beginning with 7 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions round tubes
(ProfTyp = 7) to the middle of the profile
The ProfTyp numbers run in the same order as the profiles in the Profile catalog:

1 = I-profile
2 = L-profile
3 = Z-profile
4 = U-profile
5 = plate
6 = round bar
7 = round tube
8 = square pipe
9 = C-profile
10 = T-profile
15 = ZZ-profile
16 = CC-profile
17 = CW-profile
51 = polygon_plate etc.

Use a value of -1.0 in the MaxSize column to indicate that there is no size limit for the profile.
The asterisk after TRUE indicates it is the default value.

The variable XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER also affects how Tekla

Structures dimensions the I profiles.

To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically displaying the profile

dimensions of concrete parts in cast-unit drawings, use the variable
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONC
RETE.

136

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

4.2 Part dimensions

The Dimensioning Properties dialog boxes contain the options that control what gets
dimensioned in a drawing. Combinations of options create different dimensioning effects. You
can experiment with the options to achieve different effects.
The Part dimensions tab contains the options for dimensioning main parts and assembly parts.

Topics

Overall dimensions (p. 137)

Internal dimensions (p. 139)
Shape dimensions (p. 139)
Radius and bevel dimensions (p. 140)
Unfolding dimensions (p. 141)
XS_USE_LONG_POINTS_IN_DIMENSIONING

Overall dimensions
Example of overall dimensions:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

137

Main part overall

You can create a main part overall dimension for one or all views, or omit it. In cast-unit,
assembly, or single-part drawing properties, click Dimensioning... > Part dimensions > Main
part overall dimensions and select one of the following options:

None

Creates no overall dimensions for the main part

Once

Creates one overall dimension for the main part

All

Creates overall dimensions in all views (The Assembly part overall dimension settings
have some effect on these options)

Assembly part overall

To create overall dimensions for an entire assembly or cast unit, in the assembly or cast-unit
drawing click Drawing File > Drawing Properties... > Dimensioning > Part Dimensions >
Assembly part overall dimension. Select one of the following options:

Length only

Creates overall dimensions to x-direction only.

All

Creates overall dimensions in all directions.

Off

Creates no overall dimensions.

Part mark on dimension line

To define on which dimension line Tekla Structures writes the part information, in the castunit, assembly, or single-part drawing properties, click Dimensioning... > General > Part
mark on dimension line and select one of the options:

None

Creates no part mark on the dimension line

Assembly overall dimensions

Creates the part mark on the assembly overall dimension line

Extreme bolts

Creates the part mark on the dimension line between the outermost bolts
To define the contents of the part mark separately for assembly and single part drawings, set
the following variables:
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY

138

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE

Internal dimensions
To dimension the secondary parts connected to the main part using internal dimensioning, in
the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Part
dimensions > Internal and select one of the following options:

None

Does not dimension secondary parts

Necessary

Creates only the dimensions necessary for assembling the parts. See also Recognizable
distance (p. 174).

All

Creates all dimensions for the secondary part

Shape dimensions
Use shape dimensions to dimension notches and other cuts in the main part.

In the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Part
dimensions > Main part shape (On).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

139

In the single-part drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Part
dimensions > Shape dimensions (On).

By default, Tekla Structures automatically draws shape dimensions on both ends of a beam,
even if the ends are symmetrical.

To indicate when to leave out one of the symmetrical shape dimensions,

set the variable
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
to the desired part length.
Single part

You can switch shape dimensions of single part views on or off using these variables:
On (default): set XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE=1
Off: set XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE=0
Tekla Structures automatically creates radius dimensions for curved chamfers in single-part
drawings when you use shape dimensions.

Radius and bevel dimensions

Main part radius
dimensions

To create radius dimensions for curved chamfers and round holes in the main part, click
Dimensioning... > Part dimensions > Main part radius dimensions (On). This option is
available only the Main part shape dimensions switch is on.

To dimension the round hole center point, set the variable

XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS to TRUE.

Bevel dimension

140

To create linear dimensions of a bevel, click Dimensioning... > Part dimensions > Bevel
dimension (On). See also Dimensioning > Add Angular Dimension (p. 226)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Bevel angle

To define which side of a bevel to dimension, click Dimensioning... > Part dimensions >

Bevel angle and select an option.

Angle of beam
Angle of cut
See also Selecting angle (p. 201).

Unfolding dimensions
In single-part drawings, you can unfold polybeams and bent plates created using the Create
polybeam command. To do this, open the single-part drawing properties dialog box, and click
View... > Attributes > Unfolded (Yes).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

141

To control the dimensions Tekla Structures produces using this option, set the following
variables in the List of variables dialog box:

XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING=TRUE

Creates bending line dimensions for unfolded parts

XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING=TRUE

Creates angle and radius dimensions for unfolded parts

XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING=A=

Sets a prefix text for an angle dimension

XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING=R=

Sets a prefix text for a radius dimension

XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING=TRUE

For angle text dimensions, shows the interior angle instead of the exterior angle

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT=1

Sets the format for angle text. These are the same values as on the General tab of the
dimension properties dialog box. See also Format (p. 203).

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION=10

Accuracy of the angle text. These are the same values as on the General tab of the
dimension properties dialog box. See also Precision (p. 203).

4.3 Bolt dimensions

The options on the Bolt dimensions tab determine how Tekla Structures dimensions bolts in
drawings. The options include locating the bolts on the main and secondary parts, and in
relation to the work points.

142

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Topics

Bolt internal dimensions (p. 143)

GOL, C/C, GAGE (p. 144)
Using check dimensions (p. 164) (Distances between extreme bolts)
Preferred dim side (p. 206)
Combining bolt groups (p. 172)

Bolt internal dimensions

You can dimension bolt groups in main and secondary parts separately. For skewed bolt
groups, you can also indicate whether the dimensions are parallel to the part or the bolt group.

Main and secondary part bolt internal dimensions

You can select how much of the internal dimensioning for bolt groups and holes appears in
main and secondary parts. In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Bolt
dimensions > Main, or Secondary part bolt internal dimensions, and select one of the
options:

Internal

Creates bolt group internal dimensions (distances between bolts).

All

Creates edge distance and bolt group internal dimensions.

None

Creates none of the internal bolt dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

143

Main part bolts internal dimensions All

Skewed bolt groups

The following directions are available for dimensions of skewed bolt groups:

No dimensions
In part direction
In bolt group direction

GOL, C/C, GAGE

You can show all bolt or hole dimensions in the front view of the main assembly.

To create the dimensions, you have to add certain elements to a bolt or hole mark. In drawing
properties dialog box, click Bolt mark... > Content > Available elements and select one of the
elements:

144

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)

Center-to-center distance (C/C or Gage)

The following variables control the names and format of the mark elements:

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING=GOL%%VALUE%%
Sets the format of the element Gage of outstanding leg.

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING=GAGE =
%%VALUE%%=GAGE = %%VALUE%%

Sets the format of the element Center-to-center distance, when the bolts are in the same
part (e.g. in a column or beam flange).

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING=C/C =
%%VALUE%%

Sets the format of the element Center-to-center distance, when the bolts are in different
parts (e.g. in a pair of clip angles).

4.4 Position dimensions

Position dimensions define the position of secondary parts relative to the main part.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

145

See also

Position bolts to and Position parts to (p. 147)

Secondary part (p. 149)
Embedded objects (p. 150)
Skew secondary parts (p. 150)
Changing the direction of running dimensions (p. 151)
Main part bolt position (p. 151)
Main part skew position (p. 152)
Skew position (p. 153)
Centered parts and bolts (p. 153)
Elevation dimensions (p. 155)
Leading or trailing edge (p. 157)

146

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Position bolts to and Position parts to

You can indicate from where Tekla Structures creates bolt and part position dimensions.
In the assembly drawing dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position dimensions >
Position bolts to or Position parts to. For cast-unit drawings, you can only speficy from
where to create part positions, and the only choice available is Position to. Select one of the
options:

None

Creates no position dimensions.

Main part

Creates the dimensions from the main part reference line.

Working points

Creates the dimensions between the work points, such as the intersections of main and
neighbor part reference lines. See also Using check dimensions (p. 164) and
XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

147

Example of Position bolts to > Working points selection

Both

Uses the main part and working points to create the dimensions.
To dimension the position of parts to the edge that is nearest to the neighbor part, set
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR to TRUE in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: Parts. The default is FALSE.

148

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Secondary part
You can create position dimensions for locating the secondary part. With position dimensions
you can represent the bolt hole location or the edge of the secondary part.
In assembly drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position dimensions >
Secondary part and select one of the options:

None

No position dimensions

By bolts

Dimensions bolt hole locations in the secondary parts

By parts

Dimensions edges of secondary parts

By both

Dimensions bolt hole locations and edges of the secondary part

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

149

Embedded objects
You can create position dimensions for locating embedded objects in cast-unit drawings. The
embedded objects are custom components attached to the cast unit.
In cast-unit drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position dimensions >
Embedded objects and select one of the options:

As secondary objects

Dimensions embedded objects in cast-unit drawings the same way as secondary parts.

By reference points

Dimensions embedded objects to their reference point, which is the origin of the custom
component.

Skew secondary parts

You have two options Secondary part dimension direction and Position from to dimension
secondary parts that are skew to the main part, for example, sloped beams with a clip angle
connection at the end of a beam. You can only use them for clip angles and shear plates that are
bolted to a neighboring part.

Running dimensions start from the intersection of the main and

secondary part (=work point)
Dimensions aligned with the neighboring part
To create the dimensions in the picture above, select the following options in the assembly
drawing properties dialog box:
1.
2.
3.

150

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Secondary part (By bolt)

Secondary part dimension direction (Neighbor part)
Position from (Work points)

Changing the direction of running dimensions

You can change the direction of running dimensions. This makes it possible to set the zero
point to the end of a member rather than to the start.
Usage

1.

Double-click the background of a drawing to display the drawing properties dialog box.

2.

Click Dimensioning...

3.

On the Position dimensions tab, select Yes in the Reversed direction for running
dimensions list box.

Main part bolt position

To dimension bolt hole locations in the main part, in the assembly drawing properties dialog
box, click Dimensioning... > Position dimensions > Main part bolt position and select one
of the options:

Off (bolt internal dimensions on)

On (bolt internal dimensions on)

Additional bolt position dimensions

To create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts, set the following variable:
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT=TRUE

By default, Tekla Structures does not create these dimensions. The examples below shows a
maximum bolt dimension of 40:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

151

Example

Description
Before setting the variable

After setting the variable

See also

Bolt internal dimensions (p. 143)

Main part skew position

You can create check dimensions to show the skew position of the main part. This
dimensioning type is created specifically for vertical and horizontal braces.
In the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position
dimensions > Main part skew position (Yes) to create the skew check dimensions.
Tekla Structures creates horizontal and vertical dimensions between the work points of the
main part. These dimensions are located in the front view. Their location depends on the Main
dimension side option you select on the General tab. When the main dimensions are above
the part, the skew dimensions are below, and vice versa.

See also

152

Using check dimensions (p. 164)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Skew position
The skew position defines how Tekla Structures dimensions skewed secondary part positions.
In the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position
dimensions > Skew position and select an option:

None

No dimensions

Angle

Creates an angle dimension for the secondary part. For more information on appearance,
see Selecting angle (p. 201).

Dimensions

Creates dimensions for the skewed position of the secondary part.

Both

Creates both the angle and the dimensions.

Centered parts and bolts

To control the dimensions of centrally placed parts and bolts, open the drawing properties
dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Position dimensions, and select one of the options:
Centered part

Defines how Tekla Structures dimensions centered parts. The options are:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

153

Centered bolt

154

Option

Description

Internal

Dimensions the
centered parts overall
size.

Position

Dimensions the part

to the main part
center-lines.

None

Creates no centered
part dimensions.

Example

Defines how Tekla Structures dimensions centered bolt groups. Centered bolt overrides the
Secondary part bolt internal option for centered bolts. This only applies to bolts located
centrally on the part. The options are:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Option

Description

Internal

Dimensions the
centered bolts spread.

Position

Dimensions the bolts

to the main part
center-lines.

None

Creates no centered
bolt dimensions.
Using this option, you
can omit the
dimensions of
symmetrically placed
bolt groups, even if
all the other bolt
groups are
dimensioned.

Example

Elevation dimensions
To create elevation dimensions for the start and end points of parts:
1.
2.

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning...

Go to the Position dimensions tab, and select On in the Elevation dimensions list box.
Tekla Structures creates the elevation dimensions:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

155

Skew parts

Tekla Structures creates elevation dimensions for skew parts if the parts are in the same
position in the drawing as they are in the model (the coordinate system must be set to the
model). For more information on the coordinate system, see Defining part orientation in
drawing views (p. 247).
If you are using local, oriented, or brace coordinate systems, Tekla Structures does not draw the
elevation dimensions for skewed parts by default. If you want to create an elevation dimension,
you must set the variable XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS to TRUE in Tools >
Options > Advanced options... > Dimensioning: Parts.

Modifying
reference point

Tekla Structures dimensions elevations relative to a reference point, which you can change. For
example, if the elevation is 5000 mm, and you make the reference point 200, the elevation
changes to 4800 mm.
To change the reference point used to dimension elevations:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Go to Drawing File > Drawing Properties...

Click View...
On the Attributes tab, select Specified from the Datum point for elevations list box.
Enter a specific value in the Datum level field.

To measure reference points relative to the view plane, select View plane from the Datum
point for elevations list box.
Mark prefix

Tekla Structures uses a language dependent variable in elevation dimensions. In the English
version the default is EL. You can change the default by editing the following line in the file
TeklaStructures/*version*/messages/dim_operation.ail:
string dim_operation_dim_elevation_prefix{

Enter the prefix you want to use in place of EL.

156

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

entry = ("enu", "EL");};

Leading or trailing edge

Leading

To dimension all plates to the leading edge (see the illustration below):
1.

Disable the variable XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING.:

2.
3.
51,

Click Tools > Options to open the Advanced options dialog box.
In the left pane, select Dimensioning: Parts.
In the right pane, clear the Value field for XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING

To dimension plates to the leading edge of beams, set the variable

XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE=TRUE.
Plates for columns are dimensioned to the top of the part by default. To dimension plates to
the leading edge of columns, add the following lines to the dim_planes_table.txt:
-1.0,

FALSE,

FALSE,

FALSE,

FALSE,

FALSE,

FALSE

See also Dimension planes (p. 135).

Trailing

To dimension all plates to the trailing edge:

1.
2.

Model

Switch off the variable XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING in the initialization file

(rem set XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING=1).
Switch off the variable XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE=TRUE.

To dimension plates using their original reference points, switch on the variable
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING.

Tekla Structures dimensions plates using their original reference points.

So, if you have created one plate from left to right and another from right
to left, Tekla Structures dimensions them differently in drawings.

4.5 Reinforcement dimensions

The options on the Reinforcement dimensions tab determine how Tekla Structures
dimensions reinforcing bar groups. You can select the dimension mark type and location and
close dimensions to part edges. Both the dimensions that you have manually added to
individual reinforcing bars and automatic reinforcing bar dimensions for the whole reinforcing
bar group are associative.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

157

See also

Reinforcement dimension marks (p. 158)

Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions (p. 159)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 221)
Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually (p. 161)
Adding closing dimensions manually (p. 163)

Reinforcement dimension marks

You can show two types of dimension marks on reinforcing bar groups: dimension marks and
tagged dimension marks.
Example of dimension marks:

Example of tagged dimension marks:

158

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

See also

Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions (p. 159)

Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 221)
Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually (p. 161)
Adding closing dimensions manually (p. 163)

Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions

You can create dimensions with dimension marks for reinforcing bar groups automatically
through selections in the cast unit drawing properties.
You can adjust the settings both in the Model Editor before creating a new drawing and in the
Drawing Editor when you have a drawing open. To create automatic reinforcing bar group
dimension.
Usage

1.

If you have the drawing open in the Drawing Editor, double-click the drawing
background to display the Cast Unit Drawing Properties dialog box. If you are creating
a cast unit drawing in Model Editor, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Cast Unit Drawing.

2.

Click Dimensioning... and go to the Reinforcement dimensions tab.

3.

To create the dimensions, select Dimensions for reinforcing bar groups > On.
Selecting On activates the other options on this tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

159

4.

Adjust other dimension options:

a
Select the location for the dimension mark from the Mark location list box.
Option

creates a non-tagged dimension mark and the rest of the

options tagged dimension marks.

5.

To edit mark contents, click Edit mark contents. The Dimension Mark Content
Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the desired elements one by one from
the Available elements list and add them in the Elements in mark list by
clicking Add. Click OK to save your selections.

Select Close dimensions to binding geometry > Yes to add closing dimensions
to the edge of the part. If you select No, only the reinforcing bar group is
dimensioned.

If you are editing the drawing properties in Drawing Editor, click Modify . If you are
creating the drawing in Model Editor, click Apply and select Drawings & Reports >
Create Cast Unit Drawing to create the cast unit drawing.

Example

The settings that you have defined in the Cast Unit - Dimension
Properties dialog box also apply to reinforcing bar group dimensions.

Example of dimension marks:

160

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Example of tagged dimension marks:

Example of closing dimensions:

See also

Reinforcement dimensions (p. 157)

Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually (p. 161)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 221)

Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually

You can add dimensions and dimension marks and tagged dimension marks manually in a cast
unit drawing.
Adding tagged
dimension marks
manually

To add dimensions and tagged dimension marks to the reinforcing bar groups:
1.
2.
3.
4.

In the cast unit drawing, select the reinforcing bar group you want to dimension.
Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark > Tagged Dimension Mark
from the pop-up menu.
Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension Properties dialog box.
The default content of the dimension marks is defined in a standard file. Load the standard
file tagged_dimension_mark and go to the Marks tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

161

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Click the ... button next to <<Mark>> to adjust the contents of the upper right tag.
In the Dimension Right Upp er Corner Tag Mark Properties dialog box, select the
elements to include and click OK.
In the Dimension Properties dialog box, make other property changes on other tab pages,
if necessary.
If you want to save the settings in the standard file tagged_dimension_mark, click
Save.
Click Modify to apply the changes in the selected dimension.

Example of tagged dimension marks:

Adding
dimension marks
without tags
manually

To add dimensions and dimension marks without tags to the reinforcement:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

In the cast unit drawing, select the reinforcing bar group you want to dimension.
Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark > Dimension Mark from the
pop-up menu.
Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension Properties dialog box to.
The default content of the dimension marks is defined in a standard file. Load the standard
file dimension_mark.
Go to the Marks tab and change the selections, if necessary.
Make other property changes on other tab pages, if necessary.
If you want to save the settings in the standard file to save the settings in the standard file
dimension_mark, click Save.
Click Modify to apply the changes in the selected dimension.

Example of dimension marks without tags:

162

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

See also

Adding closing dimensions manually (p. 163)

Adding closing dimensions manually

If you use tagged dimension marks, you can manually add closing dimensions to the edge of
the part. You can also add closing dimensions automatically in the drawing properties dialog
box, see Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions (p. 159) for details.
Preconditions

Create a cast unit drawing containing reinforcing bar groups.

To add closing dimensions:

Usage

1.

In the cast-unit drawing, select the dimension line.

2.

Right-click the dimension line and select Add dimension point from the pop-up menu.

3.

Select the points where you want to add closing dimensions.

Tekla Structures adds the closing dimensions.

See also

XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY

Adding reinforcement dimension lines

You can add dimension lines to reinforcing bar groups. Each reinforcing bar group with
identical spacing has a mark and dimension line.
To create a dimension line:
1.
2.

Open a cast unit drawing.

Right-click a reinforcing bar and select Create dimension marks from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

163

3.

To change the appearance of the dimension line, double-click it to display the Dimension
Properties dialog box. You can also modify the mark contents on the Marks tab. For more

information about mark contents, see Adjusting dimension mark contents (p. 211).

4.

You can drag a reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement bar group. When
you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the reinforcing bar to the dimension
line. If the new location is in the reinforcement area, the reinforcing bar mark follows the
intersection of the reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.

4.6 Dimensioning nested assemblies

You can define the dimensioning properties for nested assemblies on the Sub-assemblies tab
in the Assembly - Dimensioning properties dialog box. To define the properties, go to
Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing...

To define whether to measure parts in sub-assemblies, use the options in Dimension parts
inside sub-assemblies:

Yes: Creates internal dimensions for parts inside sub-assemblies.

No: Does not create internal dimensions for parts inside sub-assemblies.

To define the position from which the sub-assembly is measured, use the options in Measure
sub-assembly position from:

None: Does not measure the sub-assembly position.

Extrema points: Measures the position of the sub-assembly from the bounding box of the

Reference point: Measures the position of the sub-assembly from the reference point.

Bolt: Measures the position of the sub-assembly from the bolts. If bolts are not included in

the sub-assembly or if it is not possible to measure the position from bolts, Tekla
Structures measures the sub-assembly position from the reference point.
sub-assembly.

4.7 Using check dimensions

Check dimensions are additional dimensions you can use for checking. They are not required
for fabrication or erection. They are only used to check detailing, not to assemble parts.

164

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Work points

Tekla Structures uses work points to create check dimensions. Work points can be:
1.
2.

The points between which the part was originally created

The intersection point of the partsreference lines

Reference line location depends on part position depth (set in the part
properties dialog box). If it is middle, the reference line is the center
line, if front the line is located in part front edge, etc.

Appearance

Check dimensions usually in finer text than other dimensions. To define their appearance, click
the Dimension button in the drawing properties dialog box and go to the Advanced tab.
This is an illustration of check dimensions:

Mark

Dimension

Dialog box Tab

Between
outermost work
points

Dimensioning Part
dimensions

Between
outermost bolts

Dimensioning Bolt
dimensions

Field; Value
Main part work points;

Yes
Extreme bolts;

-Assembly
-Main part

A part mark on
dimension line

Dimensioning General

Part mark to dimension

line;

Extreme bolts

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

165

Mark

Dimension

Dialog box Tab

From outermost
work point to first
bolt

Dimensioning Bolt
dimensions

Field; Value
Extreme bolts;

Assembly or Main part

Extreme bolts to work
points;

Yes
F

See also

Horizontal and
vertical
dimensions
between the work
points in a
skewed brace

Dimensioning Position
dimensions

Main part skew position;

Yes

Using knock off dimensions (p. 166)

Setting Advanced dimension options (p. 213).

Using knock off dimensions

Knock off dimensions display the distance from work points to the end of the part.
In the drawing properties dialog box:

To create knock off dimensions, click Dimensioning... >Part dimensions > Knock-off

dimension > On.

To set the style of knock off dimensions, click Dimension... > Advanced and select a
Knock off dimension type. See also Knock off dimension types (p. 215).

4.8 Controlling dimensions

You can control dimensions by combining short dimensions into a longer dimension line.
Combining dimensions make drawings clearer and easier to understand.
Topics

Combining dimensions (p. 167)

Combination distances (p. 170)
Combining bolt groups (p. 172)
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line (p. 173)

166

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Forward offset (p. 173)

Recognizable distance (p. 174)
Closing dimensions (p. 175)

Combining dimensions
You can combine separate dimensions into a longer dimension line.
Automatic
dimensioning

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > General > Combine
dimensions and select the level of combination.

The larger the number, the more Tekla Structures combines the
dimensions.
Examples

The first figure below shows the part position and internal dimensions not combined. The
second figure shows the internal and the position dimension combined, using the Combine dim
lines option.

Position dimension
Internal dimension

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

167

Internal combined with position dimension

Bolt group internal dimensions and edge distance dimensions not combined

No option
The No option prevents dimensions from being combined.

168

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

First option
The first option (1) combines the position dimensions of parts with the internal dimensions of
parts, and the bolt group internal dimensions with bolt edge distances. Bolt position dimensions
are not combined with bolt internal dimensions.

Second option
The second option (2) combines the position dimensions of parts with part internal dimensions
and the bolt group internal dimensions. Bolt internal dimensions are combined with bolt
position dimensions. Edge distances are shown separately.

Third option
The third option (3) combines the bolt internal dimensions and position dimensions in the same
dimension line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

169

Fourth option
The fourth option (4) combines bolt group position dimensions with part position dimensions.
Part and bolt internal dimensions are not combined with this option, but bolt internal
dimensions are combined with bolt edge distances.

Fifth option
The fifth option (5) combines internal dimensions and the position dimension of bolt groups
where there are several bolt groups.

4.5 option
The combine option type 4.5 for dimensions uses combination type 5 for main part and
combination type 4 for secondary parts.

Combination distances
To define the distance for combining dimensions, open the drawing properties dialog box and
click Dimensioning... > General and set the distance values for the following fields:
Distance

170

The distance within which Tekla Structures combines internal dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Distance field = 5-0

Distance field = 1-0
Min distance

Another criterion for combining internal dimensions. If the distance between two details is less
than the minimum distance, Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

171

Min distance field = 5-0

Min distance field = 5"

Combining bolt groups

For dimensioning and marking purposes, Tekla Structures treats bolt groups located close
together as one group, as illustrated below:

Bolt group 1
Bolt group 2
Combine bolt
dimensions

You can combine bolt group internal dimensions, and display them in the format 3*60 or
3*60=180, or have single dimensions.
Open the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Bolt dimensions > Combine
bolt dimensions and select a format.
To define the minimum number of bolt dimensions that Tekla Structures combines, enter a
number in the Minimum number to combine field.
You can change the @ character using the variable XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER.

172

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line

You can group identical parts, bolts, components and cuts or shapes to the same dimension
line. When the repeated objects are grouped to a single dimension line, you also have the option
to include information to the dimension line tags automatically or define what information is
displayed in the tag.

To group identical objects to the same dimension line:

1.
2.
3.

In the drawing, right-click and select Properties... from the pop-up menu to display the
properties dialog box of the drawing.
In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning...
In the dimensioning properties dialog box, go to the Dimension grouping tab. Set the
properties as required:

Activate dimension grouping: Select the objects which you want to group.
Grouping properties: Select the elements by which you define the identical

conditions.

Automatic tagging: Select the appropriate option to include information to the

dimension line tags automatically.

To define the information displayed in the dimension line tags:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Double-click the dimension line for the tag you want to modify.
In the Dimension properties dialog box, click the Marks tab.
In Tags, replace the << Automatic >> value with the required text.
Click Modify.

Forward offset
You can change the location of a dimension line by using forward offset. The Forward offset
defines the search distance for the base point of a dimension. If Tekla Structures does not find a
base point (corner) within the Forward offset search distance, it uses an edge point.
To set the forward offset, open the drawing properties dialog box, click
Dimensioning... > General > Forward offset and enter a value for the search distance.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

173

You will find that the setting Dimensioning... > Position

dimensions > Centered bolt will have an effect on how the dimension
is displayed.

Forward offset greater than the 1-8 dimension to the hole group.
Forward offset distance set to a smaller value.

Recognizable distance
In some cases it is important to look at the asymmetrical relationship of parts, so that an
asymmetric secondary part is correctly connected to a main part. In part dimensioning or bolt
internal dimensioning, you can use Recognizable distance to have asymmetry reflected in
dimensioning. If the asymmetry is smaller than the distance you enter here, Tekla Structures
represents it using a dimension.
Setting the
distance

174

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > General > Recognizable

distance and then enter a distance.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Closing dimensions
You can close dimension lines using dimensioning settings.

Open dimensioning
Closed dimensioning
Close dimension

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > General > Close dimension,
and select an option:

No does not close dimensions

In X only closes dimensions in the x direction and leaves others open
All closes all dimensions

This setting is part-specific and is not relevant to profile shape

dimensions. See also Shape dimensions (p. 139).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

175

Close short
dimensions

To manage how Tekla Structures closes short dimensions, click

Dimensioning... > General > Close short dimensions. With the Yes option Tekla Structures
closes short dimension(s). With the No option the open dimension is the middle one rather than
the short end dimension. See the illustration below.

Close short dimensions = No

When you leave short dimensions open, Tekla Structures leaves out the longer dimension line
in dimension lines that contain two dimensions. If dimension lines contain three dimensions,
Tekla Structures leaves out the middle one. This option does not affect dimension lines with
more than three dimensions.

4.9 Automatic dimensioning of general arrangement

drawings
You can automatically add dimensions to grids and parts in general arrangement drawings in
the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.

176

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Grid dimensions
Part dimensions

Adjusting automatic grid dimensions

The General - Dimensioning properties dialog box allows you to adjust the grid line
dimension and overall dimension creation settings and the positioning of the grid dimensions in
general arrangement drawings.

Grid line
dimensions

To adjust the grid line dimensions:

1.
2.
3.

Click the Dimensioning button in the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog
box.
Go to the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.
Set Grid line dimensions to Off if you do not want the drawing to have grid line
dimensions.
Set Grid line dimensions to On to have grid line dimensions in the drawing. See below
for an example of grid line dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

177

Overall
dimensions

To adjust the overall grid dimensions:

1.
2.
3.

Click the Dimensioning button in the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog
box.
Go to the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.
Set Overall dimensions to Off if you do not want the drawing to have overall dimensions.
Set Overall dimensions to On to have overall dimensions in the drawing. See below for
an example of overall dimensions.

178

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Horizontal
dimension
positioning

To adjust the horizontal grid dimension positioning:

1.
2.
3.

Click the Dimensioning button in the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog
box.
Go to the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.
Use the setting Horizontal > Left, Right or Both to control where Tekla Structures
positions vertical grid line dimensions in the horizontal direction.
Below is an example of Horizontal > Left.

Below is an example of Horizontal > Right.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

179

Below is an example of Horizontal > Both.

180

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Vertical
dimension
positioning

To adjust the vertical grid dimension positioning:

1.
2.
3.

Click the Dimensioning button in the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog
box.
Go to the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.
Use the setting Vertical > Above, Below or Both control where Tekla Structures positions
horizontal grid line dimensions in the vertical direction
Below is and example of Vertical > Above.

Below is and example of Vertical > Below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

181

Below is and example of Vertical > Both.

182

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Adjusting automatic part dimensions

You can adjust the part dimensions of a general arrangement drawing on the Parts tab in the
General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.

See also

Adjusting maximum leader line length (p. 183)

Dimensioning parts not entirely in the view (p. 184)
Adjusting the maximum number of outside dimensions (p. 185)
Using object group dimensioning rules in defining the dimensioned parts (p. 186)
Adjusting part dimension position (p. 188)
Adding automatic text tags to part dimension lines (p. 196)

Adjusting maximum leader line length

Use the Maximum leader line length options on the Parts tab of the General - Dimensioning
Properties dialog box to control how close the dimension lines are positioned to the parts they
are dimensioning.
1.
2.
3.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning...

Go to the Parts tab.
Set a value for the Outside dimensions option if you want the outside dimension lines to
take the maximum leader line length from the grid line. See below for an example:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

183

4.

Set a value for the Inside dimensions option if you want the inside dimension lines to take
the maximum leader line length from the part reference point. See below for an example:

Dimensioning parts not entirely in the view

In general arrangement drawings, you can select whether to dimension parts that are not
entirely inside the view. To do this:
1.
2.
3.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning.

Go to the Parts tab.
Select Include parts not entirely in view > On to dimension the parts that are partly
outside the view. Select Off if you do not want to dimension the parts.
In the example below only one corner of the plan view is shown. By changing the setting
you can get also partially visible parts dimensioned automatically.

184

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Adjusting the maximum number of outside dimensions

Use the Maximum number of outside dimensions option on the Parts tab of the General Dimensioning Properties dialog box to specify the maximum number of dimension lines

allowed outside the grid. Once the desired maximum is reached, Tekla Structures creates the
dimensions inside the grid.
1.
2.
3.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning.

Go to the Parts tab.
Set a value for the Maximum number of outside dimensions option. See below for an
example, where 3 has been defined as the value for this options: Three dimensions have
been created outside the grid and the rest inside the grid:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

185

Using object group dimensioning rules in defining the dimensioned

parts
You can use object groups to specify different objects to be dimensioned on different
dimension lines. To do this:
1.
2.
3.

186

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning, and
go to the Parts tab.
Before you can add the dimensioning rules, you need to have the object groups created.
Go back to the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box Parts tab and add the
desired object groups to dimensioning rules by clicking Add rule and selecting the rule
from the list box in the Object group column.

In this example, we created several beam groups, one for each beam size to be
dimensioned. In the drawing, the different beams are dimensioned on different dimension
lines as follows:

See also

Creating an object group

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

187

Adjusting part dimension position

Use the positioning options in columns Positioning, Horizontal position and Vertical
position to define the position of the part dimensions.
1.
2.
3.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Dimensioning.

Go to the Parts tab.
Select the desired value in the columns Positioning, Horizontal position and Vertical
position, see below for details.

Positioning

Option

Description

No dimensions

Does not create dimensions to the parts.

Inside grid

Dimensions to parts are created next to or near the

parts being dimensioned.
All part dimensions are placed inside the grid when the
parts are inside the grid. Where the parts are in the end
bay and the end which is being dimensioned to is next
to the outside, then the dimension will still be outside,
even if you have selected Inside grid.

Outside grid

Dimensions to parts are created and positioned outside

the grid.

Either

Dimensions to parts are created and positioned either

inside or outside the grid depending on the part
position, in conjunction with the maximum number of
outside dimensions.
You must use the Either option if you define the
Maximum number of outside dimensions, so that
Tekla Structures can position dimensions inside the
grid when the maximum number of dimensions is
reached outside the grid.

Example of Inside grid:

188

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Example of Outside grid:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

189

Horizontal
position

Option

Description

Left side

All dimensions to horizontal parts are positioned to the left of the

grid.

Right side

All dimensions to horizontal parts are positioned to the right of

the grid.

Distributed to both
sides

All dimensions to horizontal parts are positioned to the grid

nearest the part they are dimensioning.

Example of Left side:

190

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Example of Right side:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

191

Example of Distributed on both sides:

192

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Vertical position

Option

Description

Above

All dimensions to vertical parts are positioned to the top of the

grid.

Below

All dimensions to vertical parts are positioned to the bottom of the

grid.

Distributed to both
sides

All dimensions to vertical parts are positioned to the grid nearest

the part they are dimensioning.

Example of Above:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

193

Example of Below:

194

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Example of Distributed on both sides:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

195

Adding automatic text tags to part dimension lines

You can add automatic text tags to part dimension lines in the general arrangement drawings in
the General - Dimension Properties dialog box. For example, if you have different automatic
dimensions for columns and purlins, you can include this information to the dimension line tag.
Preconditions

Before you can add the text tags, first create the object groups and add the object group
dimension rules. For more information on doing this, see Using object group dimensioning
rules in defining the dimensioned parts (p. 186) in the online help.

Usage

1.

In the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning and go
to the Parts tab.

2.

In the Tag column, enter the texts that you want to display for the different object
groups.

3.

Click Modify.

Example

196

Here the beam sizes are added:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

4.10 Dimension appearance and location

Use the Dimension Properties dialog box to set dimension properties.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

197

Save, Save as,

Load

Use Save to save your settings as the standard ones.

If you need to vary your standard settings for a particular project, make the changes and use
Save as. Use a unique name for these settings.
Select the name of a saved set of properties from the list box and click Load to use those
settings.

See also

Accessing dimension settings (p. 199)

Selecting the dimension types (p. 200)
Selecting angle (p. 201)
Selecting the type of curved dimension (p. 202)
Setting the dimension format (p. 202)
Placing dimensions (p. 204)
Aligning sloped dimension text (p. 207)
Adjusting dimension appearance (p. 207)
Adjusting dimension mark settings (p. 211)

198

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Setting Advanced dimension options (p. 213)

Accessing dimension settings

See also

To access automatic dimension settings, open the drawing properties dialog box in the
Model Editor and click Dimension....

To access the settings for manual dimensions, open the drawing in the Drawing Editor, and
click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties to open the Dimension Properties dialog
box.

Selecting the dimension types (p. 200)

Setting the dimension format (p. 202)
Creating short extension lines (p. 200)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

199

Selecting angle (p. 201)

Selecting the type of curved dimension (p. 202)
Placing dimensions (p. 204)

Selecting the dimension types

Go to the Dimension Properties dialog box, and select dimension types for straight
dimensions (common setting) and for dimensions in the x direction (special setting). For more
information on all the available types of dimensions, see Dimension types (p. 132). There are
two basic types, all the others are combinations of these basic types:

Relative
Shows linear distances or length

Absolute
Shows the linear distance from an origin point to the dimensioned edge, hole, etc.

Creating short extension lines

1.
2.

Open the drawing properties dialog box and click Dimension.

Select an option from the Short extension line list box:

No

200

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Select Short extension line > Yes option to create extension lines all the same length:

Yes

Use the option On grid lines only to use the short extension line automatically if a
dimension line falls on a grid line. Elsewhere the extension line will be as usual.

To adjust the extension line length, use the following variables:

set XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR to 1.5

set XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR to 1.0

Text height * 1.0

Text height * 1.5

Selecting angle
In the Dimension Properties dialog box, select the type of angle to use. The Angle defines the
type of angle measurement Tekla Structures displays. Select among the following options:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

201

Image

Description

More information

Shows the angle

dimensions in degrees on
side
Shows the angle
dimensions in dimension at
angle vertex
Shows the angle
dimensions using a triangle

You can also set the Triangle

base length. This controls the
base dimension shown for bevel
dimensions.

Angle options affect the appearance of the following dimensions:

Bevel dimensions (Radius and bevel dimensions (p. 140))

Skew position (Skew position (p. 153))
Skewed bolt groups (unless XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS is set), see Bolt
internal dimensions (p. 143)

Selecting the type of curved dimension

Adding dimensions using the Drawing Editor gives you additional options for curved
dimensions:
Curved

Select the type of curved dimension from the list box:

To display the length of the arc, select Distance (the dimension has orthogonal reference
lines).

To display the angle in degrees, select Angle (the dimension has radial reference lines).

You cannot mirror or rotate curved dimensions.

Setting the dimension format

To set the format to use for dimensioning, open the drawing properties dialog box, and then
click Dimension... > General. Set the units, precision, format, grouping, and combining
options.
Units

Select the units to use from the options in the list box, as shown below:

Field

Description

automatic

Uses the units defined in model

mm

millimeters

cm

centimeters

meters

foot - inch

feet and inches

Inches are converted into integer
feet, and the remaining inches are
shown in inches.

202

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Field

Description

cm / m

centimeters and meters

Dimensions under 100 cm are
shown in centimeters, and
dimensions above 100 cm are
shown in meters. Millimeters are
shown as superscript.
For more information on defining
the size of the superscript, see
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_
FACTOR

inch
Precision

inches

Select the level of precision for dimensions using the Precision list box. The format you use
also affects dimension precision. For example, if you set the format to ###.# you get 1/10
precision, not 1/1000 precision.
You need to enter values as integers when setting variables for unfolding. See Unfolding
dimensions (p. 141).

Format

Field

Integer
value

0.00

0.50

0.33

0.25

For defining precision with

rounding. For example, with
precision 0.33 the actual
dimension 50.40 is shown as
50.33.

1/8

For imperial units

1/16

1/32

1/10

1/100

1/1000

10

Description

For defining precision without

rounding

Use the Format list box to select a format for displaying dimensions. Tekla Structures only
uses the information in brackets when necessary and it is optional. For example, the dimension
500.00 is shown as 500 if you use the format ###.[#] and as 500.0 if you use the format ###.#.

Field

Integer value

###

###[.#]

###.#

###[.##]

###.##

###[.###]

###.###

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

203

Decimal
separator

Field

Integer value

### #/#

###/##.###

To define the character to be used as a decimal separator in dimension marks, use the variable
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR in Tools > Advanced Options >
Dimensioning: General.

With this variable, you can change the separators in dimension objects in
drawings only, not in part marks or templates.

Use grouping

To select how to display large dimension values, use the options in the Use grouping list box:

Field

Description

Yes

Uses different grouping

options to display large
dimensions more clearly.

No

Does not use any

grouping options.

To define how to display large dimension values, use the variables

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER and
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options > Dimensioning: General.
Combine equal
dimensions

To define the format of combined dimensions in drawings, select either 3*60 or 3*60=180.
Indicate the minimum number of dimensions to combine in the Minimum number to combine
field.

Placing dimensions
Use the Placing options to control the space between parallel dimension lines and the location
of the dimensions in relation to the object they dimension.

Dimension line
spacing

The Dimension line spacing option allows you to define the space between parallel dimension
lines

Short dimensions

The Short dimensions options allow you to choose whether to place short dimension text
inside or outside of the dimensions.

204

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Inside moves the dimension text further away or closer to the dimension
line.
Outside moves the dimension text outside the extension lines.
If you select the text to be outside the dimension lines, you can select on which side of the
extension line the dimension text is placed. To change the side of outside dimension, go to
Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Flip Outside Dimension, and select the dimension you
want to change.
See also

Place (p. 205)

Place
To define the location of automatic dimensions, open the drawing properties dialog box, click
Dimension..., and then click Place.
To manually edit dimension locations, you need to set the dimension placing properties in the
Drawing Editor. Click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties... to open the Dimension
Properties dialog box and then click the Place... button.
The Dimension placing dialog box appears.

Placing and Direction are only available for manual dimensions in the

Drawing Editor

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

205

Field

Description

More information

Placing

Method used to place

dimension:

Only available for manual

dimensions.

free

Tekla Structures
decides the location and
direction of the
dimension based on the
Direction settings.

fixed

You can place the

dimension at any point.
Search
margin

The farthest distance

Tekla Structures uses
when searching for an
empty space for the
dimension.

Minimal
distance

The closest distance

Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty
space for a dimension.

Direction

The side on which

Tekla Structures places
dimensions (relative to
the object being
dimensioned).

Preferred dim side

To indicate whether dimensions should appear on the front or side view for adjoining parts, in
the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimensioning... > Part dimensions > Preferred dim
side, and then select one of the options:

206

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Aligning sloped dimension text

Tekla Structures aligns slightly-sloped dimension text as shown below:

Example

Description
Tekla Structures aligns slightly-sloped
(<5.74) dimension text in the same
way as vertical dimension text.

If the dimension text is sloped more

than >5.74, Tekla Structures flips the
text.

The default limit for aligning dimension text is 0.1 (sin 5.74). To adjust this limit, use the
variable:
set XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS=0.1

Adjusting dimension appearance

The settings on the Appearance tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box control the
appearance of dimensions in the drawing.

To define the appearance of automatic dimensions, open the drawing properties dialog
box in Model Editor, then click Dimension... and go to the Appearance tab.

To define the appearance of manually created dimensions in the Drawing Editor, click
Dimensioning > Dimension Properties to open the Dimension Properties dialog box,
and go to the Appearance tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

207

In addition to the settings on the Appearance tab, you can change the default appearance
settings of drawing dimensions on the Drawing dimensions page of the Options dialog box.
See also

Text options (p. 208)

Line, Arrow options (p. 209)
Creating exaggerated dimensions (p. 209)
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions (p. 210)

Text options

208

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Field

Description

Text color

Controls the color of the text. The color

controls the line weight.

Text height

Controls the height of the text used in

the dimensions in the drawing.

Font

Controls which font is used in the

dimension.

Frame

Defines a frame for the dimension mark

Place

Defines how the dimension is placed

relative to the dimension line

Line, Arrow options

The Line, Arrow options define the appearance of dimension lines and arrowheads in the
drawing.

Field

Description

Color

The color of the dimension line. This

controls the line weight in printed
drawings.

Arrow shape

Controls the type of the mark used with

the dimension line

Arrow size

Sets the size of the arrowhead

Creating exaggerated dimensions

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read.
To set the exaggeration:
Usage

1.

Go to Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions.

Use Exaggeration limit field to set the exaggeration limit value. All the dimensions that
are narrower than the limit you set are exaggerated in the drawings.

2.

Select Paper or Model as the exaggeration scaling method, and click OK.
If you select Paper, the exaggeration limit is multiplied by the view scale. For example,
if the scale is 1:10 and the limit is 10 mm, then all the dimensions smaller than 100 mm
are exaggerated.If you select Model, and the scale is 1:10, all the dimensions smaller
than 10 mm are exaggerated regardless of the drawing scale.

3.

Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties to display the Dimension Properties

dialog box.

4.

On the Marks tab, set Exaggeration to Specified to enable the exaggeration.

5.

Set the values for Direction, Origin, Width, Position and Height.

6.

Click Apply.

When you have selected to show the dimensions as exaggerated, a dimension that is narrower
than the limit you set is exaggerated. If there are many exaggerated dimensions, they are rearranged so that all dimensions are placed correctly.

Depending on whether you set the exaggeration for one dimension or the
whole set of dimensions, the exaggerated dimensions may look different.

Example

Example of exaggerated dimensions:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

209

Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions

You can select whether to show zero at the zero point of the absolute dimensions, and also
change the orientation of the absolute dimensions.
To change the appearance of absolute dimensions:

Example

210

1.

Click Tools > Options > Options, and go to the Drawing dimensions page.

2.

Set Show zero in absolute dimensions to No if you do not want to show zero at the
zero points in absolute dimensions. Yes is the default value

3.

Set Draw absolute dimension values parallel to dimension line to Yes to show
dimensions parallel to dimension lines in absolute dimensions. No is the default value

4.

Click OK.

In the following example, dimensions are parallel to the dimension line and zero is shown at
the zero point.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Adjusting dimension mark settings

In the Drawing Editor, select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties and use the options on
the Marks tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to control dimension mark contents,
tags and plate side marks.
See also

Adjusting dimension mark contents (p. 211)

Creating dimension tags (p. 211)
Creating plate side marks manually (p. 213)
Creating plate side marks automatically (p. 215)

Adjusting dimension mark contents

Usage

1.
2.

Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties to display the Dimension properties

dialog box and go to the Marks tab.
Adjust the settings in the Dimension mark contents group box:

Prefix

Displays the selected text before the numeric value of the dimension.

Visibility of numeric value

Defines whether the numeric value of the dimension is visible or hidden.

If you hide the numeric value of the dimension, the prefix and postfix
text will still be shown.

Postfix

Displays the selected text after the numeric value of the dimension.

The prefix and postfix values cannot be plain numbers. Also, the prefix
value cannot end with a number and the postfix value cannot start with a
number when the numeric value of the dimension is visible.

See also

Creating dimension tags (p. 211)

Creating dimension tags

To add user-defined text tags to dimension lines, use the fields in the Tags section.
Usage

1.
2.
3.

Select the dimension line to add the tag to.

Right-click and select Properties... from the pop-up menu to display the Dimension
Properties dialog box.
Go to the Marks tab, and add the desired tag.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

211

You can add text tags to single and combined dimensions. The middle column in the dialog box
(C in this example) only applies to single dimensions.
Linking
associative
dimension tags
to object
properties

212

The dimension tags are fully associated to the objects the dimension belongs to. You can add
extra information in the drawings and have that information automatically updated with any
changes made in the model.
1.

On the Marks tab, click the ... button next to the text field of the tag where you want to add
the associative mark to. For example, to add the associative mark to the upper left tag,
select the button marked in the image below.

2.

In the dimension mark properties dialog box, select the desired mark element in the list of
available elements and click Add.

3.

Click Modify. Tekla Structures adds the associative mark as text into the dimension tag.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Creating plate side marks manually

You can create plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate
whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example a plate, web, or
flange.
Usage

To create plate side marks:

1.
2.
3.

Plate side mark

symbols

Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties to display the Dimension properties

dialog box.
On the Marks tab, set Type in Plate side marks to Specified to manually control the
symbol and insert plate side mark symbols in the drawing.
Modify the other properties of the plate side marks if necessary:

Left and right plate side marks: Appearance of the mark symbol on the dimension
leader line

Size: Size of the symbol

Color: Color of the symbol
Offset: Offset from the dimension line along the leader line

To define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in plate side marks, use the following variables in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General:

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT

The plate side mark symbols are in the symbol file dimension_marks.sym located in the
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\*environment*\symbols
folder. You can customize them in Symbol editor, if necessary. If you change them, the
pictures in the dialog box do not change, but the change is visible in the result.
See also

Creating plate side marks automatically (p. 215)

Setting Advanced dimension options

The Advanced tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box controls the type and appearance
of plate side marks and some check dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

213

1.
2.
3.

Select Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing properties that
you want to adjust.
Click the Dimension button.
Go to the Advanced tab.

Plate side marks

See Creating plate side marks automatically (p. 215)

Check
dimensions

Line and text color and text height only apply to position dimensions to work points and bolt
holes in a main part. Use the following options in the Dimensioning dialog box to create these
dimensions:

214

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Position tab > Position to (Working points) or (Both)

Position tab > Main part bolt position (On)

Knock off
dimension types

These are the options for knock off dimension type:

Typical dimension style

Set-back style

The field for creating the knock off dimensions is located on the Part tab in the Dimensioning
properties dialog box.
See also

Using check dimensions (p. 164)

Using knock off dimensions (p. 166)

Creating plate side marks automatically

You can create plate side marks automatically to both automatic and manual plate dimensions.
1.
2.
3.

In the drawing properties dialog box, click Dimension.

In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Advanced tab.
In Plate side marks > Type, select Automatic.

Example

See also

Creating plate side marks manually (p. 213)

4.11 Dimension reference

This section consists of the reference pages for the dimensioning commands.
The following table lists the commands used in dimensioning and gives a short description of
each one.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

215

See also

Command

Description

Dimensioning
properties (p. 216)

Defines which dimensions to create,

how to combine them, etc.

Dimension properties
(p. 222)

Defines the appearance and location of

dimensions.

Dimensioning > GA
Dimensioning Settings...
(p. 230)

Defines dimension options for general

arrangement drawings.

Manual dimensioning (p. 133)

Dimensioning properties
Synopsis

Displays the dimensioning properties dialog box for the drawing.

Description

Tekla Structures creates dimensions in the drawing view using the current properties in the
Dimensioning Properties dialog box. To view the properties on different tabs, click the
following links:

General dimensioning properties (p. 216)

Part dimensioning properties (p. 217)
Bolt dimensioning properties (p. 218)
Position dimensioning properties (p. 219)
Dimension grouping properties (p. 220)
Sub-assemblies (p. 221)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 221)
Automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings (p. 176)

General dimensioning properties

The options on the General tab are:

Field

Description

Dimensioning type

Standard is used for almost all

More information

dimensioning.

The Truss option meets the specific

requirements needed to dimension
truss drawings. It dimensions the
position and length of the diagonals.
The dimensioning is done only if
the diagonals are secondary parts
that are welded to upper and lower
chords, which are main parts and
not welded to any parts. If the truss
welding is done some other way,
standard dimensioning is used.
Number of views

216

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Minimizes the number of views that Also check the settings in the
Tekla Structures creates.
drawings View properties

Field

Description

More information

Combine dimensions

Combines several single

dimensions into one dimension line.

Controlling dimensions (p.

166)

Close dimensions

Completes dimension lines to

include the entire part.

Closing dimensions (p. 175)

Forward offset

The distance Tekla Structures uses

to search for the location of a
dimension line.

Forward offset (p. 173)

Recognizable
distance

The limit for dimensioning

asymmetry in secondary parts.

Recognizable distance (p.

174)

Part mark to
dimension line

Adds a part mark to a dimension

line.

Part mark on dimension line

(p. 138)

Main dimension side

Defines the side on which Tekla

Structures places the Assembly
overall, Main part work point, and
Knock-off dimensions.

Up places the skew position

dimensions of the main part
below the part and Down
places them above.

Auto Tekla Structures treats the

main dimensions in the same way

as other dimensions.

Up places the main dimensions

above the part (or to the left for
vertical parts)
Down puts the main dimensions
below the part.

Part dimensioning properties

The options on the Part dimensions tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Internal

Creates internal dimensions for

secondary parts connected to the
main part.

Internal dimensions
(p. 139)

Main part
overall

Creates an overall dimension for

the main part.

Overall dimensions
(p. 137)

Assembly part
overall

Creates an overall dimension for

the entire assembly.

Main part work

points

Creates a check dimension

between the outermost work
points.

Using check
dimensions (p. 164)

Main part
shape

Creates dimensions to show the

shape of a main part.

Shape dimensions (p.

139)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

217

Field

Description

More information

Main part
radius

Creates radius dimensions for

curved chamfers and round holes
in the main part.

Radius and bevel

dimensions (p. 140)

Bevel

Defines the appearance of bevel

dimensions in drawings.

Bevel angle

Defines which side of the bevel

to dimension.

Knock off
dimensions

Creates check dimensions from

the edge of the main part to the
work point.

Using knock off

dimensions (p. 166)

Preferred dim
side

Sets the preferred view (front or

side) for part dimensions.

Preferred dim side

(p. 206)

From the
nearest floor
level to part

Creates dimensions indicating

the distance from the closest
floor level to the bottom and/or
top of the parts.

From grid to
part centerline

Creates dimensions showing the

offset of a part from the grid to
the part centerline.

From grid to
part ends

Creates dimensions showing the

offset of a part from the grid to
the near or far end of the part.

Bolt dimensioning properties

The options in the Bolt dimensions tab are:

218

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Field

Description

More information

Main part bolt

internal

Creates internal dimensions for

bolt groups in the main part.

Bolt internal
dimensions (p. 143)

Skewed bolt
group

Aligns the bolt dimensions with

the main part or bolt group.

Skewed bolt groups

(p. 144)

Secondary
part bolt
internal

Creates internal dimensions for

bolt groups in the secondary
part.

Bolt internal
dimensions (p. 143)

Skewed bolt
group

Aligns the bolt dimensions with

the secondary part or bolt group.

Skewed bolt groups

(p. 144)

Extreme bolts

Creates dimension between the

outermost bolts.

Using check
dimensions (p. 164)

Extreme bolts
to work points

Creates dimensions from the

outermost bolts to the work
points.

Preferred dim
side

Sets the preferred view (front or

side) for bolt dimensions.

Preferred dim side

(p. 206)

Field

Description

More information

Combine bolt
dimensions

Format for combined bolt group

internal dimensions.

Combining bolt
groups (p. 172)

Minimum
number to
combine

Defines the minimum number of

dimensions to combine.

Combining
dimensions (p. 167)

Position dimensioning properties

The options on the Position dimensions tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Position bolts/
parts to

Controls from where Tekla

Structures creates the part/bolt
position dimensions. For castunit drawings, you can only
specify from where the part
position dimensions are created,
and the only choice available is
Position to.

Position bolts to and Position

parts to (p. 147)

Secondary
part

Creates dimensions to bolt holes

or edges of the secondary part.

Secondary part (p. 149)

Secondary
part
dimension
direction

Aligns dimensions with the main

or neighboring part. Only for
skewed clip angles or shear
plates.

Skew secondary parts (p. 150)

Position from

Sets the starting point for

running dimensions. Only for
skewed clip angles or shear
plates bolted to a neighboring
part.

Skew secondary parts (p. 150)

Reversed
direction for
running
dimensions

Changes the direction of running

dimensions. With this option,
you can set the zero point to the
end of a member rather than to
the start.

Changing the direction of

running dimensions (p. 151)

Main part bolt

position

Creates dimensions to the bolt

holes in the main part.

Main part bolt position (p. 151)

Main part
skew position

Creates horizontal and vertical

dimensions representing the
skew position of a brace.
Created between the work points
of the main part.

Main part skew position (p. 152)

Skew position

Defines how Tekla Structures

dimensions skewed secondary
part positions.

Skew position (p. 153)

Centered part

Controls the dimensions of

centrally-placed parts.

Centered parts and bolts (p. 153)

Centered bolt

Controls the dimensions of

centrally-placed bolts.

Using check dimensions (p. 164)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

219

Field

Description

More information

Elevation
dimension

Creates elevation dimensions.

Elevation dimensions (p. 155)

Combine
equal
dimensions

Combines equal dimensions.

Combine equal dimensions (p.

204)

Minimum
number to
combine

Defines the minimum number of

dimensions to combine.

Combining dimensions (p. 167)

Dimension grouping properties

The options on the Dimension grouping tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Activate dimension
grouping

Selects the objects for

grouping.

Parts

Groups according to
parts.

Grouping identical
objects to the same
dimension line (p. 173)

Bolts

Groups according to
bolts.

Components

Groups according to
components.

Cuts/Shapes

Groups according to
cuts or shapes.

Automatic tagging

Defines how to
display information
in dimension line.

Display tags

Displays tags.

Include part count in

the tag

Includes part count in

tag.

Do not display
marks for the
grouped items

Does not display

marks for grouped
items.

Available elements

Elements available to
define identical
conditions.

Add

Adds items to
Selected elements

list.
Remove

Removes items from

Selected elements

list.

220

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Move up

Moves the element

higher in the list.

Move down

Moves the element

lower in the list.

Sub-assemblies
The options on the Sub-assemblies tab in the Assembly - dimensioning properties dialog
box are:

See also

Field

Description

Dimension parts inside subassemblies

Defines whether to dimension parts

inside sub-assemblies.

Measure sub-assembly position

from

Defines the position from which the

sub-assembly is measured.

Dimensioning nested assemblies (p. 164)

Reinforcement dimensioning properties

The Reinforcement dimensions tab contains the following options and settings:

Option

Descriptions

Dimensions for
reinforcing bar groups

Creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups. Setting this

option to On activates the other selections on this tab.

Mark location

Sets the mark type and location.

Selecting the first option in the list box creates nontagged dimension marks.

Selecting one of the other options in the list box

creates tagged dimension marks. The location of the tag is
indicated by the small rectangle in the option.

See also

Edit mark contents

Opens the Dimension mark content dialog box where you can
select what you want to include in the normal dimension mark
and in the tagged dimension mark.

Close dimension to
binding geometry

Automatically adds closing dimensions to the edge of the part.

Creating automatic reinforcement dimensions (p. 159)

Reinforcement dimensions (p. 157)
Adding reinforcement dimension lines (p. 163)
Adding reinforcement dimensions and dimension marks manually (p. 161)

General arrangement drawing dimensioning properties

The General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box contains the following options and
settings:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

221

Grid tab

Option

Descriptions

Grid line dimensions

Controls the creation of the grid dimension line.

Overall dimensions

Controls the creation of the overall dimensions.

Horizontal dimension
positioning

Controls where Tekla Structures positions vertical grid line

dimensions in the horizontal direction.

Vertical dimension
properties

Controls where Tekla Structures positions horizontal grid line

dimensions in the vertical direction.

Option

Descriptions

Maximum leader line

length > Outside
dimensions

Defines that the outside dimension lines take the maximum

leader line length from the grid center line.

Maximum leader line

length > Inside
dimensions

Defines that the inside dimension lines take the maximum

leader line length from the part reference point..

Include parts not

entirely in view

Dimensions the parts partly outside the view.

Maximum number of
outside dimensions

Specifies the maximum number of dimension lines allowed

outside the grid.

Object group
dimensioning rules

Use object group dimensioning rules for defining the

dimensioned parts and their position and add tags to dimension
lines.

Parts tab

See also

Adjusting automatic grid dimensions (p. 177)

Adjusting automatic part dimensions (p. 183)

Dimension properties
Synopsis

This command displays the dimension properties dialog box of the drawing.

Description

Tekla Structures creates dimensions in the drawing view using the current properties in the
Dimension Properties dialog box. The options are:

Field

Description

More information

Dimension
type: Straight

Sets the dimension type for

straight dimensions.

Dimension types (p.

132)
Accessing dimension
settings (p. 199)

Dimension
type: In x
direction

222

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

As above, but overrides the

straight setting for horizontal
dimensions. If you use the blank
option, Tekla Structures uses the
Straight option settings.

The x direction
usually means
dimensions parallel to
the drawing x axis.

Field

Description

More information

Angle

Defines the appearance of angle

dimensions.

Selecting angle (p.

201)

Triangle base
length

The base length of a triangle.

Curved

Defines whether to use angle

units or length for curved
dimensions.

Selecting the type of

curved dimension (p.
202)
This setting can only
be adjusted in the
Drawing Editor

See also

Precision

Defines dimension precision:

rounding, imperial units.

Format

Defines the number of decimals

and their appearance.

Use grouping

Defines the appearance of large

dimension values.

Units

Defines the units used in

dimensioning.

Dimension line
spacing

Defines the space between

parallel dimension lines.

Short
dimensions

Defines the text location of short

dimensions: between or outside
the dimension lines.

Short dimensions (p.

204)

Place

Sets the margins and the side

dimension lines appear.

Placing dimensions
(p. 204)

Setting the
dimension format (p.
202)

Adjusting dimension appearance (p. 207)

Adjusting dimension mark settings (p. 211)
Setting Advanced dimension options (p. 213)

Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension in the horizontal direction.

Description
Usage

1.
2.
3.

Click Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension.

Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End selection using the middle mouse button.

The position you click with the middle button also defines on which side the dimension line
appears. When you use the fixed placing, the position you pick locates the dimension line.

If you enter the dimension line using the middle button, position the
dimension inside the view you are dimensioning, so that the dimensions
are visible in the drawing.

See also

Placing dimensions (p. 204)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

223

Dimensioning > Add Vertical Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension in the vertical direction.

Description
Usage

1.
2.
3.

Click Dimensioning > Add Vertical Dimension.

Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End the selection with the middle button.

See also

Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension (p. 223)

Dimensioning > Add Orthogonal Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension in either the horizontal or vertical direction. Tekla Structures uses the
direction of the larger overall distance.

Description

1.
2.
3.

Usage

Click Dimensioning > Add Orthogonal Dimension.

Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End the selection with the middle button.

Dimensioning > Add Parallel Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension parallel to a line you define by picking two points.

Description

1.
2.
3.
4.

Usage

Click Dimensioning > Add Parallel Dimension.

Pick two points to define the direction for the dimension line.
Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End selection using the middle mouse button.

Dimensioning > Add Perpendicular Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension perpendicular to a line you define by picking two points.

Description

1.
2.
3.
4.

Usage

Click Dimensioning > Add Perpendicular Dimension.

Pick two points to set the orientation for dimension line.
Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End the selection with the middle mouse button.

Dimensioning > Add Free Dimension

Synopsis

Creates a dimension parallel to the line between any two picked points.

Description
Usage

224

1.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Click Dimensioning > Add Free Dimension.

2.
3.

Pick the points to be dimensioned.

End selection with the middle mouse button.

Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Orthogonal Reference Lines
Synopsis

Creates curved dimensions.

Description

If the ends of a curved beam or polybeam have been cut or fitted, the
points at the ends of the beam do not necessarily lie on the true curve of
the beam. (As points marked 2 show in the figure below.) This is
because curved beams are created with straight segments. To avoid
creating incorrect curved dimensions, pick the three points defining the
arc using points marked 1 in the figure below.

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Orthogonal Reference Lines.
Pick three points to define the arc. (See illustration.)
Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End selection with the middle mouse button.

See also

Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Radial Reference Lines (p. 225)

Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Radial Reference

Lines
Synopsis

Creates curved dimensions with radial reference lines.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

225

Description

The dimension text on the line can be either a distance or an angle value. You set this in the
Dimension Properties dialog box.

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.

See also

Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Orthogonal Reference Lines (p. 225)

Click Dimensioning > Add Curved Dimension > With Radial Reference Lines.
Pick three points to define the arc.
Pick the points to be dimensioned.
End the selection with the middle mouse button.

Dimensioning > Add Radial Dimension

Synopsis

Creates radius dimensions.

Description

Radius dimensions measure the radii of curved shapes.

By default, the radius dimension prefix is R (e.g. R 200). To change the

radius dimension prefix (e.g. to Radius 200):
1.
2.

Open the file dim_operation.ail

(TeklaStructures\*version*\messages\dim_opera
tion.ail)
Change the prefix R to Radius:
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{
entry = ("enu", "R ");};
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{
entry = ("enu", "Radius ");};

1.
2.
3.

Usage

Click Dimensioning > Add Radial Dimension.

Pick three points to define the arc.
Pick a point to place the dimension.

Dimensioning > Add Angular Dimension

Synopsis

226

Creates angle dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

...
...

Description

You can set the format of the angle dimension in the Dimension Properties dialog box. The
dimension can be shown by a triangle or in degrees. You can also enter the triangle base length.

Usage

1.
2.
3.

Pick the vertex point of the angle (1).

Pick two points to define the angle (2,3).
Pick the side to place the dimension (4).

Dimensioning > Add Dimensions for all Parts

Synopsis

Recreate all dimensions automatically in drawings.

Description

This command recreates the same dimensions as when the drawing was originally created.
Tekla Structures dimensions all the views except for linked views, 3D views and key plan
views.

Usage

Select Dimensioning > Add Dimensions for all parts.

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Combine Dimension Lines

Synopsis

Use to manually combine a group of two or more parallel dimension lines into one line.

Description
Usage

1.
2.

Hold down the Ctrl key while picking the dimensions you want to combine.
Right-click and select Combine Dimension Lines.

See also

Controlling dimensions (p. 166)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

227

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines

Synopsis

Use this command to connect two perpendicular dimension lines.

Description

Connecting dimension lines makes drawings clearer and easier to read. For example, connect
the dimension lines of embedded objects in a cast unit, floor beams in a floor plan, or anchor
bolts in an anchor bolt plan.

Usage

To connect two dimension lines:

1.
2.
3.

See also

Select the two dimension lines to connect.

Right-click and select Link dimension lines from the pop-up menu, or click the Link
dimension lines icon.
The dimension lines are connected:

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines (p. 228)

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines

Synopsis

Disconnects dimension lines that have been connected with the Dimensioning > Edit
Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines (p. 228) command.

Description

This command applies to both ends of the dimension line.

Usage

To disconnect dimension lines:

1.
2.

See also

Select the dimension line.

Right-click and select Unlink dimension lines from the pop-up menu.

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines (p. 228)

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add/Remove Dimension Point

Synopsis

Use these commands to add a new dimension point or remove an existing one.

Usage

1.
2.

Select the dimension to modify. You can only modify one dimension at a time..
Select Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add Dimension Point or Remove
Dimension Point.

228

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

To add a dimension point, pick a position.

To remove a dimension point, pick the dimension point you want to remove.

These commands are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.

Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Set Dimension Start Point

Synopsis

Used to pick a new start point for running dimensions.

Description

When you use the US absolute dimension type, Tekla Structures draws a new RD symbol
(Running Dimension) at the new zero point and updates the selected dimensions according to
the new start point. By default, Tekla Structures creates the RD symbol at the left end of the
part.

You can use this command to swap the running dimensions start point to
the opposite end of the member. This is useful when running dimensions
start from the wrong end of a member.

Usage

1.
2.
3.

Pick an existing dimension in the drawing.

Right-click and select Set Dimension Start Point.
Pick the new start point. Tekla Structures automatically updates the dimensions.

See also

Dimension types (p. 132)

Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity

Synopsis

Checks all dimensions.

Description

By default Tekla Structures checks dimensions when you open a drawing. This command rechecks the dimensions and marks invalid dimensions with an invalidity symbol, a red circle.

Usage

1.
2.

Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity.
Select Single or All.

You can resize the dimension point invalidity symbols. To resize the invalidity symbols, use
variables XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS and
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS.
See also

Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol (p.
229)

Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity

Symbol
Synopsis

Deletes invalidity symbols from invalid dimensions.

Description

Tekla Structures marks dimensions that need checking with an invalidity symbol, a red circle.
This command lets you to delete the invalidity symbols without deleting the dimension line
from the cloned drawing.

Usage

1.

Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity
Symbol.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

229

2.
See also

Select Single and the invalidity symbol to delete, or select All to remove all invalidity
symbols..

Defining objects to be cloned (p. 85)

Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Change Symbol

Synopsis

Deletes the dimension point change symbols.

Description

Tekla Structures uses a symbol to mark changed dimensions. A change symbol is placed
around the old point and the new point. An arrow is drawn from the old point to the new point.
To highlight the changed dimension text and moved dimension points in associative drawings,
set the variable XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES to TRUE in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: General.
This command lets you delete the change symbols.
To delete a single change symbol:

Usage

1.

Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Change Symbol >
Single.

2.

Select the change symbol to delete.

To delete all change symbols, click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove

Dimension Change Symbol > All.

See also

Drawing objects associated with model objects (p. 91)

Dimensioning > GA Dimensioning Settings...

Synopsis

Controls dimensioning options for general arrangement drawings.

Description

The semi-automatic GA dimensioning is a special dimensioning type you only use for general
arrangement drawings. It contains several dimensioning options:

230

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Which points and parts Tekla Structures dimensions

How Tekla Structures combines dimensions
Whether to use the reference line of the part or the center line as a dimension point

Field

Description

Dimension

Defines which points Tekla

Structures uses for
dimensioning. Intersection
points only creates dimensions
for points where two parts
intersect. Intersection and
reference points creates
dimensions for points where two
parts intersect, and to the
reference points of the selected
parts.

Parts

Defines whether Tekla

Structures dimensions all the
selected parts or only main parts.

More information

Usage

Field

Description

More information

Combine

Defines how Tekla Structures

combines dimensions.

Combining options
(p. 231)

Uses

Defines whether Tekla

Structures uses the reference line
or the center line as a dimension
point.

Use options (p. 233)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Open a general arrangement drawing.

Click Dimensioning > GA Dimensioning Settings....
Set the properties.
Click Apply.
Select the objects you want to dimension.
Create dimensions using the commands in the Dimensioning menu: Dimensioning >
Add GA Drawing Dimensions > Along Part X Axis, Along Part Y Axis, or Along Part X
and Y Axis.

Combining options
The following illustrations show how Tekla Structures combines different dimensions. These
relate specifically to dimensioning settings in general arrangement drawings.
All

Tekla Structures combines all dimensions for the selected parts on one dimension line.

By grid lines

Tekla Structures combines points to be dimensioned depending on how close they are to the
grid lines. For example, in the drawing below, dimensions are combined so that the intersection
points of the upper beams are dimensioned close to the upper grid line and the lower beams
close to the lower grid line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

231

By grid squares

Tekla Structures combines points to be dimensioned depending on how close they are to the
box formed by the grid lines.

By main parts

Tekla Structures combines dimensions so that all intersections of one main part are shown with
a single dimension line.

232

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

By selected parts

Tekla Structures combines all intersections of the selected parts with separate dimension lines.

Use options
The following illustrations show how Tekla Structures creates dimensions using different
dimensioning settings in general arrangement drawings.
Reference lines

Tekla Structures generates dimensions using the Position settings in the objects properties
dialog box. In the drawing below, the beams dimensioned to the edge of the flange were placed
in the model with Position on plane set to Right. So, the points you pick in the model when
placing the object affect dimensioning.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

233

Center line

234

Tekla Structures generates dimensions at a point on the center line of the object. In the drawing
below, the beams dimensioned to the center line were placed in the model with Position on
plane set to Right. So, Tekla Structures dimensions the center line of the profiles regardless of
the position setting in the objects properties dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Dimensioning

Introduction

Drawing Properties

Tekla Structures generates drawings using the current properties in the appropriate drawing
properties dialog box. Drawing properties for different types of drawings are found in the
Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings menu.
You can also modify the properties of existing drawings using the drawing properties dialog
box. There are two ways to change drawing properties:

In this chapter

Select drawings from the drawings list and modify them

Modify open drawings in the Drawing Editor

This chapter explains how to use common drawing properties, as well as properties that only
apply to single-part, cast-unit, and general arrangement drawings.
You should be familiar with the following chapters:

Contents

Introduction to Drawings (p. 21)

Dimensioning (p. 131), which discusses the principles of dimensioning

Getting Started with Drawings (p. 41)

Drawing Layout (p. 113), which explains how to define and check the layout of different
drawing types

This chapter is divided into the following sections:

Common drawing properties (p. 236)

Drawing view properties (p. 241)
Drawing section view properties (p. 258)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 269)
Bolt and weld properties (p. 278)
Reinforcement properties (p. 282)
Surface treatment properties (p. 288)
Marks in drawings (p. 291)
Merging marks (p. 316)
Grids in drawings (p. 320)
The Drawing Classifier (p. 324)
Drawing properties reference (p. 330)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

235

Multi-drawings

You can skip the sections Drawing view properties (p. 241) through Grids in drawings (p.
320) if you are creating multi-drawings. For information on multi-drawings, see Creating
drawings (p. 48).

5.1 Common drawing properties

The Drawing Properties dialog box contains buttons for the drawing properties. The buttons
are grouped to view, dimension, mark, object and other properties.

Some of the drawing properties are common to all drawings.

Name

The drawing name is displayed in the drawing list in the Drawings dialog box and in drawing
templates.

Title

The drawing title is user-definable. Tekla Structures uses this text in drawing headers in
drawing templates and reports. You can also define up to 3 additional titles to use in drawing
templates.

236

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

See also

User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 237)

Protection (p. 238)
Placing (p. 239)
Dimension basics (p. 131)
Drawing List contents and markings (p. 42)
Drawing Layout (p. 113)

User-defined attributes in drawings

User-defined attributes are text fields you can use to add information to a drawing. You can use
existing user-defined attributes in drawings, or create your own.
To modify the user-defined attributes of a drawing, click User-defined attributes... button in
the drawing properties dialog box.

Adding projectspecific
information

Go to the Workflow tab to add project-specific information to the drawings.

Adding drawingspecific
information and
comment

Enter a user-defined Comment for drawings, projects, assemblies, parts, and so on. Tekla
Structures uses the comment that is included in the drawing template you select, and a
hierarchy, dependant on where the comment has been entered.
Use the User field 1 to User field 8 on the Parameters tab to enter drawing-specific
information.

Use the variable

XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES to
control whether the modifications in user-defined attributes affect all
selected drawings in the drawing list at the same time, even if the
drawings are of different types.
See also

For more information about adding new fields, see Adding properties.
For more information about user-defined attributes in drawing marks, see Adding userdefined attributes in marks (p. 311).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

237

Protection
You can protect areas in drawings to prevent text or dimensions being placed there. To access
the protection properties for assembly drawings, for example, click Drawings & Reports >
Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing... > Protection.... The options are the same in GA
(General Arrangement) drawings. See the example below:

Marks may overlap with part corners and edges, but not with part.
Dimension text may not overlap with other dimensions.
In the Assembly - Protection Properties dialog box shown above, Tekla Structures may place
text, dimensions, or marks on the corners and edges of parts.

If you clear the first two columns of checkboxes, Tekla Structures does
not protect part corners and edges. This increases drawing speed and
decreases the memory requirement. You can still protect these areas by
using the third column of checkboxes for part protection.
Save, Save as,
Load

The default settings are saved with the filename extension adr.

Drawn

The columns define the regions to be protected, as illustrated below:

238

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Part corners
Part edges
Part
Text or mark
Dimension arrowhead
Dimension line
Dimension value
Cut symbol
Cut name
Weld arrow
Weld text
New

The rows define which objects, or object components, Tekla Structures cannot place in the
protected areas.

Row

Description
Text, mark or weld

Dimension line ends

Dimension line
Dimension value

Placing
Use the options in the Placing dialog box to control the placement of marks, views, dimensions
and welds.
For example, to access the part mark placing settings for general arrangement drawings, click
Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing... > Part Mark...
> General > Place....
Marks

Click the Place button to display the placing dialog box, which contains the options shown
below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

239

Search margin

Defines the boundary within which Tekla Structures searches for a space to place a mark.

Minimal distance

Defines the minimum distance of the mark from the part.

Quarter

Checkboxes define the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space to place the mark.

To move marks away from each other, use Search margin, not Minimal
distance. Keep the minimal distance setting as small as possible to

reduce the possibility of marks overlapping.

Use the options in the weld placing dialog box to control the position of welds in drawings.

Welds

For example, to access the weld placing settings for assembly drawings, click Drawings &
Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing... > Weld... > Place.... Tekla Structures
displays the following dialog box:

Weld placement depends on the welding direction. Welds can only be placed in certain sectors,
so the Quarter checkboxes are grayed out. You have the following options:

Search margin

Defines the boundary within which Tekla Structures searches for a space to place a weld.

Minimal distance

Defines the minimum distance of the weld symbol from the weld.
Placing

You can manually edit mark, dimension, weld and view location through the Placing options
in the Drawing Editor. For weld marks, the Placing options are available also in the Modeling
Editor in the drawing properties.
1.

240

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Open the Part Mark Properties, Weld Properties, Dimensioning Properties, or View
Properties dialog box and click the Place... button.

2.
3.

Set margins and distances as instructed above.

Select Placing - free to let Tekla Structures decide the location and direction of the mark,
dimension, weld or view based on the Direction settings. If you select Placing - fixed, you
can place the mark, dimension, weld or view at any point.

Marks, dimensions, welds and views have a certain protection area that is taken into account
with the option free: they are placed in the first suitable position concidering their protection
area and, for example, margins and other placing and direction settings. When you use the
option fixed, the mark stays where it is even though you update the drawing, whereas with free,
Tekla Structures tries to find the optimal place for the mark.

5.2 Drawing view properties

You can have different types of views in Tekla Structures drawings:

In this section

Main views: front, top, back and bottom views

Section views
Single-part views
3D views

This section describes the drawing view properties. You define drawing view properties before
creating drawings. All views of a view type share the same properties.
You can edit drawing view properties on both the drawing properties and view modification
levels, which are the two highest levels at which you edit drawings (see Three levels of editing
drawings (p. 37)). You can fine tune some view-specific properties once you have created
drawings. For more information, see Editing Drawings (p. 341).
Most of the drawing view properties you define before creating drawings are common to all
view types and drawing types. There are some exceptions, for example, section views have
some additional properties. See Adding section views to drawings (p. 259).

Topics

Defining which drawing views to create (p. 242)

Defining exact drawing view scales (p. 242)
Displaying neighbor parts in drawing views (p. 243)
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (p. 377)
Properties of individual views (p. 244)
Single-part views in assembly drawings (p. 246)
3D views in cast-unit, assembly and single-part drawings (p. 383)
Defining part orientation in drawing views (p. 247)
Defining concrete part orientation (p. 250)
Defining plate orientation (p. 251)
Unfolding in single-part drawings (p. 253)
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254)
Displaying view names automatically in drawings (p. 255)
Displaying deformed parts in drawings (p. 256)
Displaying part openings and recesses in drawings (p. 256)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

241

Defining which drawing views to create

To define which views Tekla Structures should create before you create drawings, in the
drawing properties dialog box, click View....
Views tab

You have the following options for each of the four main views and section views:

off

Tekla Structures does not create the view, but dimensions the parts in the available views.
If you set all four main views off, Tekla Structures will still create a front view.

on

Tekla Structures always creates the view, even if it was not necessary in order to show the
dimensions.

auto

Tekla Structures creates the view if it is necessary in order to show the dimensions.
You can also add views to existing drawings. See Adding views to drawings (p. 379).

Defining exact drawing view scales

Use the Attributes tab to set drawing view scale options.
Selecting scale

You can dictate the exact scale of drawing views, or you can let Tekla Structures set an
appropriate scale. You can define different scales for main views and section views.

All main views in a drawing automatically use the same scale unless you
fine-tune individual views manually.

Exact scale

If you want drawing views to use an exact scale, you must define the scale in the drawing
properties, and switch off automatic scaling when defining the layout.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Autoscale

To switch off automatic scaling: in the drawing properties dialog box, click Layout... >

Scale > Autoscale (No).

To define the exact scale of a view or section view: in the drawing properties dialog box,
click View... (or Section view...) > Attributes.
Enter the scale in the Scale field.
Recreate the drawing.

If you prefer to use specific drawing sizes rather than specific scales of drawing views, use
automatic scaling:
1.
2.

In the drawing properties dialog box, select Layout... > Scale > Autoscale (Yes).
Recreate the drawing.

Tekla Structures scales the drawing views so that they fit in a drawing of a specific size.
Summary

242

Tekla Structures uses the scale information for views in the following order:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

1.
2.
3.

Scale in the view properties or section view properties dialog box, and for GA drawings,
the scale in the View properties dialog box.
Alternative scales for main and section views in the layout properties dialog box, if you
have set autoscale to Yes.
You set individual scales manually, for example, for different main views.

Displaying neighbor parts in drawing views

To control which neighboring parts can be seen in a drawing, in the drawing properties dialog
box, click Neighbor part... >Visibility.

Neighbor parts

Main/Secondary
parts

The neighbor parts list box contains the following options:

Option

Description

None

Do not show neighboring parts.

Connected parts

Show all parts connected to the drawing

object.

Connecting parts

Only shows the parts the drawing object is

connected to.

All components

Combines the Connected parts and the

Connecting parts options.

By extreme

Show all parts within the boundaries of the

main and secondary part, connected by a
workshop weld. For more information, see
Properties of individual views (p. 244).

The main/secondary parts list box contains the following options:

Option

Description

Main parts

Only shows neighboring parts that form

the main part of an assembly or a cast unit.

Secondary parts

Only shows neighboring parts that are

secondary parts of an assembly or a cast
unit.

Both

Shows both main and secondary parts.

Skew parts

Select Yes to show as neighbor parts in the drawing, No not to show them.

Extension

To change the boundaries of the view in main and section views:

In the drawing properties dialog box, click View... (or Section view...) > Attributes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

243

Enter a value by which to extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts field.

For example, you can make the entire neighboring part visible in the view, by increasing the
boundaries of the view using this value. For more information on neighbor parts, see Marks in
drawings (p. 291).

Properties of individual views

To open the View Properties dialog box, double-click the border around a drawing view or
click View > Drawing View Properties....

244

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

You can modify the properties of individual views and section views independently of the
drawing properties of the entire drawing. See also Three levels of editing drawings (p. 37).

Option

Description

Attributes 1
Scale

For information on setting the scale, see Exact scale

(p. 242).

Reflected view

Display load bearing structures, such as columns and

beams in lower floor.
Select Yes to display structures with a continuous
line, or No to display them with a dashed line.

Rotation around (in

3D views)

Set or modify the view angle of 3D views. Type in

the values for the angles in y and x directions.
Rotation in a drawing view is around local axis
(rotation values 0.0 and 0.0 equal Front view).
For more information on 3D views, see 3D views in
cast-unit, assembly and single-part drawings (p.
383).

Size

You can either define a specific size for a view

(Define as distances) or control the size by parts
(Fit by parts):

Define as distances

The x and y fields define the view size along the x

and y axes of the view. The depth fields define the
depth of the view relative to, and perpendicular to
the view plane.

Fit by parts

Tekla Structures fits the view contents into the

drawing view frame without leaving any
unnecessary space.
For more information, see Resizing drawing views
(p. 381).
View extension for
neighbor parts

Set the distance from the drawing view to display

neighboring parts. For information, see Extension
(p. 243).

Attributes 2
Place

Set the placing for the drawing view to Fixed or

Free.

Unfolded

For more information on unfolded option, see

Unfolded (p. 253).

Undeformed

For more information, see Displaying deformed

parts in drawings (p. 256).

Shortening

If parts are very long and do not include any details,

you can shorten them. For more information, see
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254).

Show openings/
recess symbol

For more information on showing openings and

recesses, see Displaying part openings and
recesses in drawings (p. 256).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

245

Option

Description

Datum point for

elevations

For more information, see Modifying reference

point (p. 156).

Dimension creation
method in this view

Clone the dimensions separately for the selected

view only. Using this option affects the creating of
the dimensions during cloning and redimensioning
of existing drawings. For more information, see
View-specific dimension cloning (p. 88)

Label
Text

Define the view label text. For more information, see

Editing view label (p. 246).

Symbol

Define a symbol to be used for the view label.

Label position

Define the vertical and horizontal position of the

view label.

View direction
marks

Select if you wish to show the direction marks or not

and set the mark height.

Editing view label

To change the view label text in drawing views:
1.
2.
3.

Open the view properties.

Click the Label tab.
In the Text section of the dialog box, click the ... buttons next to the text fields to open the
Mark Contents dialog box. On the Content tab you can define the content of the view
label. On the Position tab you can define the text position and alignment.
On the Label tab you can also define the symbol you want to use for the label, and the label
position.

4.

Click Modify.

Single-part views in assembly drawings

Including all
views

In assembly drawings, you can include single-part views of the individual part components that
form the assembly. To include single-part views:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Including
selected views

In the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog box, click Layout... > Other.
Set Include single-parts to Yes. This activates the Single-part attributes field.
From the Single-part attributes list box, select the correct drawing properties.
Click OK in each dialog box to close it.
Create the drawing. See Using drawing-type-specific commands to create drawings (p.
69).

Once you have created a drawing, you can also specify which parts to show in single-part
view(s):
1.
2.
3.

Open the assembly drawing.

In the drawing view, select the part to create the single-part view from.
Right-click and select Create single-part views.

Tekla Structures adds the single-part view(s) to the assembly drawing. The view properties are
the same as those in the single-part drawing that you used to create the single-part view.
See more in Properties of individual views (p. 244).

246

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Defining part orientation in drawing views

In single-part, assembly, and cast-unit drawings, you can set the coordinate system of each
drawing view. The coordinate system defines:

The angle of vision from which the part, assembly, or cast unit is shown
How the part, assembly, or cast unit is rotated
The orientation of dimensions in the drawing view

Coordinate system (p. 247)

Part rotation in drawing views (p. 248)
Defining front view for columns (p. 250)
Defining concrete part orientation (p. 250)
Defining plate orientation (p. 251)

Coordinate system
To set the coordinate system, open the drawing properties dialog box, and click View... >
Attributes > Coordinate system and select one of the options:

local

Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part. The parts x axis is
parallel to the drawings x axis, and the starting point (the end point created first) of the
part is on the left.

model

Tekla Structures uses the global coordinate system. The part has the same position in the
drawing as it has in the model. This is one option when you want to show columns
vertically.

You can use the model option to display sloping parts in position. Tekla
Structures cannot display horizontally skewed parts.

oriented

Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part, but the coordinate
system is oriented so that the parts x axis points to the right even if the part was created
from right to left.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

247

Skew braces

For skewed braces, there are two options which automatically rotate the front view around the
x axis:

horizontal brace

Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is from the
top of the model.

vertical brace

Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is in the
same plane as the brace in the model.
See the illustration below:

Concrete parts

For concrete parts, the option Fixed rotates the front view so that it shows the casting direction
(the face that is top in form) of concrete part, if it is defined when modeling. For more
information, see Defining concrete part orientation (p. 250).

Part rotation in drawing views

In addition to setting the coordinate system, you can also rotate the part, assembly, or cast unit
in the drawing view around its local axes.
X axis

248

Rotate around the x axis in steps of 90 degrees.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

0 degrees
90 degrees
180 degrees
270 degrees
Y axis

Rotate around the y axis in steps of 180 degrees.

Z axis

Rotate around the z axis in specific angles.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

249

Rotated 30 degrees around z axis

Projection type in the layout properties affects the order of the views in the drawing. See Scale
and location of drawing views (p. 123).
See also

Orientation marks (p. 274)

Defining front view for columns

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view separately for columns.
The default value for the front view direction for columns is As beam and bracing. The
alternative values are North, East, South and West.
To define the direction of the front view for columns in assembly drawings:
Usage

See also

1.

Go to Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.

2.

Use the Columns in assembly drawing options.

When you set the Coordinate system to local, Tekla Structures uses the coordinate system
of the column when showing the direction of the front view.

When you set the Coordinate system to oriented, the column is in a horizontal position,
but the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or West).

When you set the Coordinate system to model, the column is in a vertical position and the
direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or West).

Coordinate system (p. 247)

Defining concrete part orientation

You can define which part face is displayed in the front view of a drawing (the top in form
face). Use this feature to define the casting direction of a concrete part.
To define the front view for a part:

250

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

1.
2.
3.

In the model, double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box.
Click User-defined attributes... to open the user-defined attributes dialog box.
On the Parameters tab, select the view direction in the Fixed drawing main view list box:

To display the front view in the "top in form" in a drawing:

1.
2.
3.

Open the drawing properties dialog box.

Click View... to open the drawing view properties dialog box.
To correctly display the top in form in the drawing, select Fixed in the Coordinate system
on the Attributes tab:

Defining plate orientation

Plates created with Contour plate commands are automatically oriented in drawings. The
longest side of the plate always faces downwards in the drawing. You can affect this
orientation by using following variables:

XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

251

Example

Description
Contour plate in the model view.
First creation point
Second creation point

Single-part drawing of the plate.

Instead of using automatic plate orientation, you can set the plate main axis to follow the line
created by the first and second points you pick, regardless of the plate dimensions. This enables
you to define the plate orientation in drawings or reports.
To define the contour plate orientation with first and second picked points:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

252

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Create the contour plate. The first and second points you pick also define the plates main
axis.
Double-click the plate to open the Contour plate properties dialog box.
Click User-defined attributes..., and click the Orientation tab.

Select From 1st to 2nd creation point in the Main axis direction list box.
Click Modify, and close the dialog box.
Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Modified Objects to update
numbering.
To view the orientation of the plate, create a single-part drawing of the plate.

Example

Description
Contour plate in the model view.
First creation point
Second creation point

Single-part drawing of the plate.

User-defined attribute Main axis
direction is From 1st to 2nd
creation point.

Unfolding in single-part drawings

You can unfold polybeams in single-part drawings. Tekla Structures also unfolds polybeams
when creating NC files.

Unfolded

To unfold polybeams in single-part drawings:

1.
2.
3.
4.

On the menu bar, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part
Drawing... > View... > Attributes.
Set the Unfolded switch to Yes. Tekla Structures shows and dimensions the bend lines in
the drawing.
Click OK or Apply.
Create the single-part drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

253

Limitations

The unfolding feature only affects plates created using the Polybeam command. You cannot
unfold plates created using the Curved beam and Folded plate commands. You can only
unfold a polybeam in one plane.

See also

For information on unfolding parameters, see Unfolding dimensions (p. 141).

Shortening parts in drawings

If parts are very long and do not include any details, you can shorten them in drawings.

For drawings

To control the shortening of parts on the drawing level:

1.
2.

254

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Open the drawing properties.

Click View... (or Section view...) >Shortening.

The fields Minimum cut part length and Space between cut parts define how Tekla
Structures cuts the middle regions of the parts in drawing views. The Cut skew parts list box
defines whether skew parts in views are cut.
For views

To control the shortening for each drawing view separately:

1.
2.
3.

Open a drawing.
Double-click the blue border around a view. The View properties dialog box appears.
Click the Shortening tab.

Cut parts defines if empty areas are shortened in drawing views. You can set this differently
for individual drawing views.
Expanding cut
parts

To stretch shortened parts to fill up the empty areas of a drawing, click Layout > Other
(Expand shortened parts to fit). Tekla Structures stretches the parts after scaling and selecting
a paper size.

Displaying view names automatically in drawings

You can define the view names for front, top, back, and bottom views in the drawing properties
dialog box. Tekla Structures displays the view name labels you have defined. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Go to Drawing File > Drawing Properties....

In the drawing properties dialog box, click the View... button to open the drawing view
properties dialog box.
On the Views tab, check that the option On has been selected for the views whose name
label you want to be seen.
On the Label tab, define the names for the labels in the Front view, Top view, Back view,
and Bottom view fields.
Modify the other properties if needed:

Position: Define the location of the name label.

Color: Define the color of the font in the name label.
Height: Define the height of the font in the name label.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

255

6.

Click Modify and OK.

Displaying deformed parts in drawings

Deformed parts are parts that have been warped or cambered. You have the option to illustrate
the developed shape of deformed parts in drawings. You may want to hide part deformations,
for example, if you want a concrete part to have two states: as erected (in the model view) and
as cast (in the drawing view).

Example

Description
Drawing of developed
part

Drawing of warped
part

To create drawings that illustrate the developed shape of parts and hide the part deformations in
the drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click the View... button in the drawing properties dialog box.

Go to the Attributes tab and select Yes in the Undeformed list box.
Click Apply or OK to save the drawing view properties.
Create the drawing. The drawing illustrates the developed shape and dimensions of the
part.

Part deformations
Tekla Structures uses the Undeformed list box to control which deformations are shown in cast
unit drawings.

Property

Undeformed = Yes

Undeformed = No

Deforming angle

Not shown

Shown

Cambering

Not shown

Shown

Shortening

Shown

Not shown

Displaying part openings and recesses in drawings

To display openings and recesses (blind holes) in parts in a drawing:
1.
2.

256

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Open the drawing properties dialog box and click the View... button or double-click the
border of a view in a drawing.
On the Attributes tab, select Yes in the Show openings/recess symbol list box.

By default, Tekla Structures displays openings and recesses in the following way:

Type of opening

Shown as

Hole through a part

Hole symbol

Recess in the front

face of a part

Recess symbol and

bounding lines shown as
unbroken lines

Recess in the back

face of a part

Recess symbol and

bounding lines shown as
dashed lines

Examples

Remember to switch
hidden lines on for parts.
(See Part representation
(p. 269).)
Additional ways
of showing the
openings and
recesses

The following advanced options in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing
Properties give you more variety in showing the openings and recesses:

Use XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to select how the openings/recesses are

shown and the symbols to be used.
By default, the openings and recesses are shown as above. When this variable is set to

FALSE, the openings and recesses are shown as follows:

Use XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to select whether to use the

opening/recess symbol in openings located at part borders.
This variable is by default set to FALSE. Set it to TRUE to display the symbols. The symbol
used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

257

Use XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to select whether to use the

opening/recess symbol in openings located in part corners.
This variable is by default set to FALSE. Set it to TRUE to display the symbols.The symbol
used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

5.3 Drawing section view properties

To add section views to the drawing, use the options in the section view properties dialog box.
Topics

Adding section views to drawings (p. 259)

Section view properties (p. 259)

258

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Section view direction (p. 260)

Section view label and mark (p. 262)
Hatching in drawings (p. 358)
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254)

Adding section views to drawings

To include section views in single-part, assembly, or cast-unit drawings:
1.

To set section views on, in the Drawing Properties dialog box, click View... > Views...
and then:

Section views (on or auto)

End views (on or auto)

See also Defining which drawing views to create (p. 242).

2.
3.
4.
5.
See also

Set the scale. See Defining exact drawing view scales (p. 242).
Set the section view properties. See Section view properties (p. 259).
Set the section mark and view label properties. See Section view label and mark (p. 262).
Create the drawing(s) or modify existing drawings.

Section view properties (p. 259)

Section view direction (p. 260)
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254)
View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View (p. 110)

Section view properties

Section views have some additional properties to main views (see Drawing view properties
(p. 241)).
To define section view properties, click Section view... in the drawing properties dialog box.

Section depth

Use the depth field to define the depth values of the section view. The Section depth defines
the positive and negative depth of the section view when sections are not combined.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

259

Distance

To combine section views, you need to define a distance to use. If two sections are within this
distance, Tekla Structures combines the section views if the combined view will show all the
dimensions clearly.

Distance = 1-4" for combining

Section depth = 4"
Combined sections
Extension for
neighbor parts

Use to extend the boundaries of the view to include neighboring parts. For more information,
see Displaying neighbor parts in drawing views (p. 243).

See also

Section view direction (p. 260)

Section view label and mark (p. 262)
Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254)

Section view direction

You can define the direction of section views independently for left, middle, and right section
views. The arrow in the section view symbol points shows the direction of the section view, as
shown below:

Left section, right direction

Middle section, right direction
Right section, left direction

260

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

The left and right section views are also referred to as side views in the
layout properties (Layout... > Other > Side views beside main).

View direction marks

You can display view direction marks in section views and end views. The view direction is
shown with a small symbol (optionally with a text label) around the end or section view.

To display the view direction marks:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

In the drawing, right-click and select Properties... from the pop-up menu.
Click View...
On the Views tab, select the On option for section views and/or end views as desired.
Click Modify and OK.
In the drawing properties dialog box, click Section view...
On the View Label tab, select the appropriate options in the Section views and End
views.
Define the height of the symbol and text label in Height.
Click Modify and OK.

You can define the symbol in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Drawing Properties
by using the variables:

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

261

The default is xsteel@66.

See also

Shortening parts in drawings (p. 254)

Adding section views to drawings (p. 259)
Section view properties (p. 259)
Section view label and mark (p. 262)

Section view label and mark

You can define the section mark and section view label independently.

Section mark
Section view label
Topics

Section mark (p. 262)

Section view label (p. 265)

Section mark
The options in the section mark properties dialog box define how section marks appear in
drawings.
Example

Go to Annotating > Properties > Section Mark... or double-click a section mark to open the
Section Mark Properties dialog box.
Section mark tab

262

To define the appearance of the section mark, click the Section mark tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Use the fields in the Text section of the dialog box to define the contents of the mark. Click the
... buttons next to the fields A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box. On the Content tab
you can define the content of the mark text as well as font and frame type. For more
information, see Section and detail mark and label elements (p. 297).
Use the Position tab, for example, for defining the text position and text offset. You can also
define whether section mark symbols are shown on both sides or only on the left or the right
side, and the rotation of the section mark text.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

263

The example text positioning on the Section mark tab is only one way to
position the mark text. You can change the text positioning on each
fields Position tab. Modifications on the Position tab are visible only
in the drawings, and do not show on the Section mark tab.
Use the fields in the Symbol section to define the section mark symbols. You can select from a
list of predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The symbol properties can
be given separately for both the left and the right section mark symbol. You can also define the
color, size and position of section mark symbols.
Cutting line tab

264

To define the section mark line length and offset (distance between the mark and the section),
click the Cutting line tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Line length
Offset
If you want to customize the section mark symbol, you can define the appearance of the symbol
using Symbol Editor. Draw the section mark symbol you wish to use, and save it with the
symbol number to the sections.sym file. Use the symbol number and the variables
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL and
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL to define the section mark
symbol.

Section view label

In the Section Mark Properties dialog box, use the View label tab to define the appearance
and the position of a section view label.
Example

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

265

In the Text section of the dialog box click the ... buttons next to the fields A1 - A5 to open the
Mark Contents dialog box. On the Content tab you can define the content of the view label as
well as font and frame type. Use the Position tab for defining the text position, and aligning the
contents of a view label. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.

The example text positioning on the View label tab is only one way to
position the label text. You can change the text positioning on each
fields Position tab. Modifications on the Position tab are visible only
in the drawings, and do not show on the View label tab.
In the Symbol section select the view label symbol you want to use. You can select a simple
label or a symbol as a view label. You can also define the color, size, line length and the
position of the view label.
In the Label position section you can select the vertical and horizontal position of the view
label.
See also

Adding section views to drawings (p. 259)

Section view properties (p. 259)

266

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Aligning section views with main views

You can align the automatically created section views with the main views. This means less
manual editing of the drawings.
To align the section views with the main views:
Usage

Result

1.

Double-click the background of the drawing.

2.

In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Layout... button.

3.

In the Layout Properties dialog box, go to the Other tab.

4.

Set Align section views with main view to Yes.

All automatically created sections are aligned with the main view.

Example

5.4 Detail properties

The options in the Detail Properties dialog box define how detail marks and detail view labels
appear in drawings.
Double-click a detail mark to open the Detail Properties dialog box, or go to Annotating >
Properties > Detail Mark....
View label tab

Use the View label tab to define the appearance and the position of a detail view label.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

267

In the Text section of the dialog box click the ... buttons next to the fields A1 - A5 to open the
Mark Contents dialog box. On the Content tab you can define the content of the view label as
well as font and frame type. Use the Position tab for defining the text position, and aligning the
contents of a view label. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.

The example text positioning on the View label tab is only one way to
position the label text. You can change the text positioning on each
fields Position tab. Modifications on the Position tab are visible only
in the drawings, and do not show on the View label tab.
In the Symbol section select the view label symbol you want to use. You can select a simple
label or a symbol as a view label. You can also define the color, size, line length and the
position of the view label.
In the Label position section you can select the vertical and horizontal position of the view
label.
Detail boundary
tab

268

Use the Detail boundary tab to define the shape of the boundary and the appearance of the
bounding line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

You can define a fixed size for the circle-shaped detail boundaries. Use
the variable XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS for setting the size
of the detail boundary. Enter a numeric value for the radius in
millimeters.
Detail mark tab

To define the appearance of the detail mark, click the Detail mark tab.
Use the fields in the Text section of the dialog box to define the contents of the mark. Click the
... buttons next to the fields A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box. On the Content tab

you can define the content of the mark text as well as font and frame type. For more
information, see Section and detail mark and label elements (p. 297).

Use the fields in Symbol section to define the detail symbols. You can select from a list of
predefined symbols or use you own custom symbol. You can also define the color and the size
the detail symbol. Below is an example of the detail mark.

5.5 Part and neighbor part properties

This section introduces the options for showing parts and neighboring parts in drawing views.
Topics

Part representation (p. 269)

Adjusting the part center line type (p. 273)
Orientation marks (p. 274)
Setting up orientation marking (p. 277)

Part representation
You can control the appearance of ordinary and neighboring parts independently:

To control the appearance of parts, click Part... in the drawing properties dialog box.
To control the appearance of neighboring parts, click Neighbor part... in the drawing
properties dialog box.

The options on the Content tab define the appearance of parts in drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

269

Part
representation

The Part representation list box gives you the following options:

Outline

Parts appear as solid objects in drawings

Exact

Parts appear as solid objects, Tekla Structures also draws the chamfers in profile cross sections

Workshop form

Tekla Structures draws round tube profiles as wrap-around templates

Bounding box

Parts appear as boxes which surround the actual profiles

Base box

Tekla Structures shows parts as boxes and uses the h and b values from the profile catalog as
box dimensions

Symbol

Parts appear as lines.

Symbol with partial profile

Shows a partial profile of the part. You cannot change the length of the partial profile. The
length is fixed to 1000 mm.

270

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Part
representation
examples

An example of the Outline option:

An example of the Symbol option:

An example of the Symbol with partial profile option:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

271

Symbol offset

Defines the distance of the endpoints of reference lines and centerlines from the endpoints of
the object.

Hidden lines

Defines the appearance of hidden lines in drawing parts.

Hidden lines

Shows hidden lines in secondary and neighboring parts

Own hidden lines

Shows hidden lines in main parts

Hidden lines on
Hidden lines off
Other part hidden lines
Own hidden lines
Center lines

Use to switch the centerlines of parts on or off. You have the following options:

Center line

Select checkbox to show center lines

Main part

Select checkbox to show center lines in main parts (Beam, Plate or Polygon)

Secondary part

Select checkbox to show center lines in secondary parts (Beam, Plate or Polygon)
Reference lines

The reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created. You can switch part
reference lines on or off. You have the following options:

Reference lines

Select checkbox to show reference lines

Main part

Select checkbox to show reference lines in main parts (Beam, Plate or Polygon)

272

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Secondary part

Select checkbox to show reference lines in secondary parts (Beam, Plate or Polygon)
Additional marks

Use to display additional marks in drawings.

Orientation marks: For more information, see Orientation marks (p. 274).
Connecting side marks: For more information, see Connecting side marks (p. 276).
Pop-marks: For more information, see Pop-marks.
Edge chamfers: For more information, see Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 364).

Appearance

For more information on how to control the appearance of objects, see Common drawing
object properties (p. 343).

Fill

For more information, see Modifying fill/hatch types (p. 358).

Adjusting the part center line type

You can adjust the line type of the part center lines in drawings with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
For the advanced option XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE, enter an integer value from 1 to 7,
where 1 = solid, and 2 - 7 = dotted lines. The default value is 4 (dash-and-dot line).
Click OK or Apply.
To see the center line type change, close the drawing and open it again.

If you enter a value that is lower than 1 or higher than 7, Tekla

Structures uses the default value 4.

To see what the line typeslook like, see the Hidden lines > Type options
on the Appearance tab of the Part Properties dialog box

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

273

Orientation marks
Orientation marks indicate the erection direction of assemblies. You can indicate orientation
using:

Topics

Mark location
Compass direction (only for columns)
Orientation symbol

Mark location (p. 274)

Compass direction (p. 275)
Orientation symbol (p. 275)
Connecting side marks (p. 276)
Orientation marks in single-part views (p. 277)

Mark location
In general arrangement drawings part marks appear at the same end as in assembly and castunit drawings. Parts with the same assembly or cast-unit position are always marked at the
same end.
To indicate orientation using mark location:
1.

274

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

In the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties, click View... > Attributes and set the

Coordinate system to oriented or model.

2.
3.
4.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings...
and clear the Beam orientation checkbox.
Create assembly and single-part drawings, or cast-unit drawings.
Create general arrangement drawings.

When you update an assembly drawing or a cast-unit drawing, remember

to update the marks in the corresponding general arrangement drawing.
Tekla Structures does not do this automatically.

Compass direction
Part marks include the face direction. Tekla Structures only indicates the face direction if it is
the same for all assemblies or cast units with the same assembly or cast-unit position number.

Face direction indicates the compass direction (North, East, South,

West) of the face where the mark appears.

To indicate orientation using compass direction:

1.

2.

3.
4.

First check the orientation marking settings (project north etc.) in the Model Editor. To do
this, click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks. See Setting up orientation
marking (p. 277).
In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings...
and select the Column orientation checkbox. This forces Tekla Structures to show the
face direction in the part mark for two similar columns with different orientation.
In the assembly or cast-unit drawing properties, click Part mark... and include the Face
direction element in the part mark.
Create assembly or cast-unit drawings.

Orientation symbol
Orientation symbols indicate the erection direction of assemblies. The default orientation
symbol is a triangle inside a circle.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

275

To add orientation symbols to a main part:

1.
2.

In the drawing properties, click Part... > Content and select the Orientation marks
checkbox.
For different parts, Tekla Structures draws orientation symbols:

To the top flange of beams, at the end which points closest to North* (see part 1 in the
illustration above)

To the lower end of columns, on the flange which points closest to North* (see part 4
in the illustration above)

To the flange of bracing, at the end which points to closest North* (see part 3 A in the
illustration above)

* or to another designated point of the compass.

3.

Use the following settings to adjust marks:

4.

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
To define which parts Tekla Structures considers to be columns, braces or beams, use
skew limits in the Options dialog box. See Setting up orientation marking (p. 277).

For general arrangement drawings, use the following settings to adjust marks:

XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE

Connecting side marks

You can add a user-defined symbol to mark the side of a part to which a connecting part is
attached. In the assembly drawing properties, click Part... > Content and select the
Connecting side marks checkbox.

276

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Orientation marks in single-part views

You can create orientation marks for included single-part views in assembly drawings. The
visibility of the orientation mark is set as follows:

Use the variable XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK, if the Single-part attributes

option is set to Current attributes in the Other tab on the Assembly - layout properties
dialog box.

If the Single-part attributes option is set to something other than Current attributes, the
visibility of the orientation mark is set according to the selected attribute file.

Setting up orientation marking

To set up orientation marking in the Model Editor, click Tools > Options > Options... >
Orientation marks.

Field

Description

Project north

Defines which direction is North in the model.

Enter the value in degrees counter-clockwise from
global x axis.

Part viewing
direction

Defines from which direction parts are viewed in

drawings.
See also Defining part orientation in drawing
views (p. 247)

Beam skew limit

Column skew limit

Tekla Structures uses limit angles to determine

whether a part is a beam or a column when creating
orientation marks. Tekla Structures treats parts
outside these limits as braces.

Parts skewed more than 80 are columns.

Parts skewed less than 10 are beams.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

277

Field

Description

Preferred location
for mark

Defines the location of part marks in drawings, to

the left or right end of the part.

Mark always to
center of column

This setting only affects columns.

Yes places part marks in the center of columns in
plan views. To indicate part orientation, use
compass direction in the part mark instead. See
Compass direction (p. 275).
No places part marks on the same flange in GA
drawings and assembly drawings.

See also

Orientation marks (p. 274)

5.6 Bolt and weld properties

This section explains bolt and weld properties in drawings.
Topics

Bolts (p. 278)

User-defined bolt symbols (p. 280)
Welds (p. 281)
Merging weld symbols (p. 282)

Bolts
Content

Solid/Symbol

To access the bolt properties dialog box, click Bolt... in the drawing properties dialog box. The
options on the Content tab define the appearance of bolts in drawings.

There are several ways to display bolts in drawings. You can select the options from the Solid/

symbol list box. See the examples below.

278

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Example

Description
Solid

Exact Solid

Symbol

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

The options also include the DIN symbol option which corresponds to German standards
(DIN).
Symbol content

Use to indicate whether to include the Hole and Axis symbols in the drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

279

Visibility

Use the fields in this section of the dialog box to show or hide bolt group holes in main parts or
secondary parts. In assembly drawings you can also define whether to show or hide bolt group
holes in sub-assemblies.
The options are:

Visible

Shows holes

Not visible

Does not display holes

To show or hide hidden lines in bolts, set the following variables in

Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Drawing Properties:

Appearance

XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES

For more information on the appearance of objects, see Common drawing object properties
(p. 343).

User-defined bolt symbols

You can create your own bolt symbols and use them in drawings.

This is an additional feature that you can use if you need different bolt
symbols to the ones Tekla Structures includes.

To create bolt symbols in the Symbol Editor:

1.
2.
3.

Save the symbol file ud_bolts.sym in the symbol folder (usually the folder
\environments\common\symbols\).
Open Notepad, or any text editor.
Create the a text file, consisting of lines, in three columns:

The first column contains the bolt assembly standard

The second contains the bolt diameter
The third column contains the name of the symbol file and the symbol number,
separated with the @-character

Sample lines from this text file:

7990

24

ud_bolts@1

7990

25

ud_bolts@2

Tekla Structures uses the user-defined symbol for bolts in the drawing that have the
standard and diameter you define in this text file
4.
5.

Save the file with the name bolt_symbol_table.txt.

Set the variable in the List of variables dialog box:
set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE= bolt_symbol_table.txt

280

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

You can also write a full path to the definition file. Without the path Tekla Structures
searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and system directories.
6.

To use your own bolt symbol, select it in the drawing properties dialog box, by clicking

Bolt... > Content > Solid/Symbol (User-defined symbol).

Welds
Content tab

To access the weld properties dialog box, click Weld... in the drawing properties dialog box.
The options on the Content tab define how Tekla Structures displays welds in drawings.

Weld number

Tekla Structures assigns a number to each weld as it is created.

No

The weld number is not displayed in the drawing.

Yes

The weld number is displayed in the drawing.

Visibility

The visibility options define which welds are visible in drawings. In assembly drawings, you
can define the visibility of welds in sub-assemblies.

Welds

You can set the visibility options for welds using one of the following options:

Not visible

Display none of the welds in the drawing.

Site weld visible

Only display field welds in the drawing.

Workshop weld visible

Only display shop welds in the drawing.

Both visible

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

281

Both field welds and shop welds are displayed in the drawing.
Welds in subassemblies

You can set the visibility options for welds in sub-assemblies using same options as for welds.

Weld size limit

Enter a weld size to filter welds of that size out of the drawing. This is useful when you only
want to show non-typical welds in a drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or minimum value, use the variable
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.

Use the variable XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE to specify the

standard weld type to filter out from drawings. For example, you can
define the standard weld to be 8 mm single-V butt weld:
set XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE=3
Appearance

For information on how to control the appearance of objects, see Common drawing object
properties (p. 343).

See also

Weld marks in drawings (p. 312)

Placing (p. 239)
Merging weld symbols (p. 282)
Weld types

Merging weld symbols

You can force Tekla Structures to use the same symbol for identical welds in a drawing, as
shown below:

Example

Description
Original drawing

With weld symbols merged

1.
2.
3.

Steps

4.
Splitting symbols

Open a drawing.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select the weld symbols.
Right-click and select Merge from the pop-up menu. Tekla Structures combines the
symbols.
To change the leader line position, drag its handles.

To split merged weld symbols, right-click the symbol and select Split from the pop-up menu.

5.7 Reinforcement properties

This section explains how Tekla Structures displays reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.

282

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

To open the reinforcement properties dialog box, click the Reinforcement... button in the
drawing properties dialog box.
Content tabs

Use the options on the Bar content tab to define how single reinforcing bars and bar groups
appear in drawings. Use the options on the Mesh content tab to define how reinforcement
meshes appear:

Topics

Setting the visibility of reinforcement in drawings (p. 283)

Reinforcement appearance (p. 286)

Setting the visibility of reinforcement in drawings

To define whether Tekla Structures shows reinforcement in drawings, and which bars to show,
click the Reinforcement... button in the drawing properties dialog box.
To have reinforcement visible in drawings, select Visible in the Visibility of all reinforcing
bars and Visibility of all meshes list boxes.
Selecting
displayed bars

Use the options in the following list boxes in the reinforcement properties dialog box to define
which bars in the group or mesh appear in drawings. Notice that you can define the visibility of
longitudinal wires and crossing bars in meshes separately:

Visibility of reinforcing bars in group

Visibility of longitudinal wires
Visibility of crossing bars

The options are:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

283

Option

Description

all

Shows all bars in a group or mesh.

first bar

Only shows the first bar in the group or mesh.

last bar

Only shows the last bar in the group or mesh.

first and last bar

Shows the first and last bar in the group or mesh.

bar in the middle of

group

Shows one bar in the middle of the group or mesh.

two bars in the

middle of group

Shows two bars in the middle of the group or

mesh.

Customized

Only applies to bar groups and meshes.

Indicates that you have specified the location of
the only visible reinforcing bar. See Adjusting
reinforcing bars (p. 284).

Adjusting reinforcing bars

To have Tekla Structures only show a single reinforcing bar from a group or mesh in a specific
position:
1.
2.
3.

Select the reinforcing bar group or mesh.

Select Edit > Adjust Reinforcing Bars.
Click to indicate the location of the bar.

When you use the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command to place

reinforcing bars in the drawing, Tekla Structures shows the Customized
option in the reinforcement properties dialog box when you double-click
the bar in the drawing. You cannot select the Customized option when
you create drawings.
See also

Reinforcement appearance (p. 286)

Hiding reinforcing bar lines

You can hide reinforcement bar lines behind other reinforcing bars and behind parts in cast unit
drawings.
Usage

284

1.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Open the drawing properties dialog box and click Reinforcement. You can also doubleclick the reinforcement in Drawing Editor to open its properties dialog box.

2.

Select the hiding option:

Hide lines behind parts hides the lines behind the part. This is useful, for example, with
lifting anchors where the reinforcing bar is partly outside the part.

Hide lines behind other rebars hides the lines behind other reinforcement bar lines.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

285

Reinforcement appearance
To define how reinforcement appears in drawings, click the Reinforcement... button in the
drawing properties dialog box and use the options in the Representation list boxes. The
options are:

Option

286

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Example

Description

single line

A single line with radiused

bends.

double line

Outline of bar with radiused

bends.

double lines
with filled
ends

Outline of bar with radiused

bends and filled bar ends.

filled line

Solid bar with radiused

bends.

Option

Example

Description

stick

A single line without

radiused bends.

outline

Only applies to
reinforcement meshes.
Shows the shape of the mesh
using an outline rectangle or
polygon, and a diagonal line.

Bar ends

Use the following options in Symbols section of the Reinforcement Properties dialog box to
define how Tekla Structures displays the ends of reinforcing bars for single bars and bar
groups:

Straight ends

Hooked ends:

To increase the size of the bend and end symbols (in drawing units) use the variables
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE and
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Concrete Detailing.
Use the variable XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing to change the end symbols to a different direction.
Mesh symbol

Use the outline options to define the type and size of symbol to use for reinforcement meshes.
The mesh symbol appears in the middle of the diagonal line.
Tekla Structures includes the following predefined mesh symbols:

Symbol 1

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

287

To add mesh symbols, edit the mesh.sym file using the Symbol Editor.

Appearance

For information on how to control the appearance of objects, see Common drawing object
properties (p. 343).

See also

For information on how to show the shape and dimensions of reinforcing bars, see
Reinforcement pull-outs (p. 304).

5.8 Surface treatment properties

Topics

Content and appearance of surface treatment (p. 288)

Hatch patterns for surface treatment (p. 290)

Content and appearance of surface treatment

You can add various surface treatments to steel and concrete parts. To define how Tekla
Structures displays surface treatment in drawings, use the Surface treatment... button in the
drawing properties dialog box.

288

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

The options on the Content tab are:

Appearance

Option

Description

Visibility

Show or hide surface treatment.

Representation

The appearance of the surface treatment.

Show pattern

Select the checkbox to display the surface pattern.

For more information, see Hatch patterns for
surface treatment (p. 290).

Hidden lines

Select the checkbox to display hidden lines in

secondary and neighboring parts.

Own hidden lines

Select the checkbox to display hidden lines in main

parts.

Use the Appearance tab to define the line type and color of visible and hidden lines.
To generate marks for surface treatment, use the Surface treatment mark... button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

289

Hatch patterns for surface treatment

You can use hatches to show surface treatment types in drawings. To show hatching in the
drawing, select the Show pattern checkbox in the drawing surface treatment properties dialog
box:

The hatch pattern runs in the direction of the surface treatment.

Surfacing.htc

The properties of the hatch patterns to use for each surface treatment are defined in the
surfacing.htc file, located in the
..environments\*your_environment*\system folder.
The syntax of surfacing.htc file is:
Surfacing Type, Surfacing Code, Hatch name, Scale, [Colour], [Automatic
Scaling and Rotation]

Surface treatment type:

1 = concrete finish
2 = special mix
3 = tile surface
4 = steel finish

Surface treatment code. This is the abbreviation used in drawings and reports, for example, MF
for Magnesium Float. The product_finishes.dat file, which is also located in the
..environments\*your_environment*\system folder, contains a full list of
surface treatment codes.
Hatch name.
Extra scale indicates the scale of the hatch pattern.
Color (optional). If you do not define a color for a hatch in the surfacing.htc file, Tekla
Structures uses the color defined on the Appearance tab of the drawing surface treatment
properties dialog box. The Visible lines color and type is used for the front of the surface
treatment, and the Hidden lines for the back.
Automatic Scaling and Rotation (optional).
Available hatches

290

To view a list of available hatches:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

1.
2.
See also

Open the object properties dialog box for any object that has a fill type. For example,
double-click the Circle icon to open the Circle Properties dialog box.
Click Select... to open the list of hatch patterns. Click a pattern to view its name in the
Type list box.

For information on surface treatment in drawing marks, see Surface treatment mark
properties... (p. 338) and Adding user-defined attributes in marks (p. 311).

5.9 Marks in drawings

You can automatically generate marks for many objects in Tekla Structures drawings.
Example

This is an example of some of the elements available to show part marks in drawings.

Assembly position
Size
Mark frame
Profile
Element frame
Length
The following automatic marks are available in Tekla Structures:

Part mark
Bolt mark
Neighbor part mark
Connection mark
Reinforcement mark
Surface treatment mark
Dimension marks

You can also create additional marks in existing drawings. See Additional marks (p. 350).
Topics

Mark properties (p. 292)

Mark content (p. 293)
Mark appearance (p. 298)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

291

Mark location (p. 301)

Adding reinforcement dimension lines (p. 163)
Reinforcement dimension marks (p. 158)
Reinforcement pull-outs (p. 304)
Bolt marks and size elements (p. 310)
Adding user-defined attributes in marks (p. 311)

Mark properties
The options in the mark properties dialog box define how Tekla Structures shows marks in
drawings. Mark properties are generally the same for each of the available mark types (part
marks, bolt marks, neighbor part marks, connection marks, reinforcement marks, surface
treatment marks).

Move elements between the lists

Adds a frame around the selected elements
Appearance of the element frame
Removes a space between elements

292

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Line feed for multi-row marks

Moves the selected element up or down on the list
See also

Mark content (p. 293)

Mark appearance (p. 298)
Mark location (p. 301)

Mark content
Use the options on the mark properties Content tab to define how Tekla Structures displays
marks in drawings. You have the following options:

Topics

Marks can consist of more than one row

You can determine the order in which the different elements appear
Frames can be nested
You can change the font properties separately for each element
Symbols can be added to a mark
Text can be added to a mark
User-defined attributes and template fields can be shown in a mark
Shapes and dimensions of reinforcing bars can be shown as pull-outs in reinforcement
marks

Common elements in marks (p. 293)

Part mark elements (p. 294)
Bolt mark elements (p. 295)
Connection mark elements (p. 295)
Reinforcement mark elements (p. 296)
Surface treatment mark elements (p. 297)

Common elements in marks

The following is a description of elements common to all marks.

Element

Description

User-defined
attributes

Adds a user-defined attribute to the mark. You can

also use template fields for user-defined attributes.
For a list of available template fields, see Template
attributes.
In marks you cannot use template attributes such as
MODEL_TOTAL that refer to the whole model. Marks
only check the information from the object in the
drawing and not from the whole model.

Text

Opens a dialog box where you can add user-defined

text to the mark.

Symbol

Opens a dialog box where you can add a symbol from

the Tekla Structures symbol library to the mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

293

See also

Element

Description

<--

Adds a line feed between the desired elements to

create multi-row marks. The default space between
the lines depends on the text height and can be
changed with the variable
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.

<--

Adds a backspace between the desired elements to

remove the default space between them. The default
space between the elements depends on the text height
and can be changed with the variable
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.

Template

Adds in the mark a custom graphical template created

with Template Editor.

Adding user-defined attributes in marks (p. 311)

Adding templates in marks (p. 298)

Part mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks.
You can define part mark options independently for main and secondary parts and for subassembly main and secondary parts.

Element

Description

Assembly
position

Prefix and position number of the assembly

Part position

Prefix and position number of the part

Profile

Profile name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part

Material

Material of part, assembly, or cast unit main part

Name

Name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part

Class

Class of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.

Finish

Finish of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.

Size

Size of the part or the assembly or cast unit main part

Length

Length of part or assembly or cast unit main part

Camber

Camber of the part or the assembly or cast unit main

part (if this user-defined part attribute is set).

Fittings (NS/FS)

Displays the near side/far side marks in the part mark.

(only available in front views)

Face direction

Displays main compass direction (North, East, South,

West) of the face, where the mark is added. The
direction can only be shown if

the face is vertical

the direction is the same for all assemblies with
the same assembly position number

In other case the element produces no text to mark.

See also Orientation marks (p. 274).

294

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Element

Description

Gage of
outstanding leg

Adds hole gauge to mark.

Center-to-center
distance

Adds center-to-center distance to mark.

Bolt mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to bolt marks. You can define bolt mark options
independently for site and shop bolts.

Element

Description

Bolt length

Adds the length of the bolt to the mark.

Bolt diameter

Adds the bolt diameter to the mark.

Hole diameter

Adds the hole diameter to the mark.

Material

Adds the bolt grade to the mark.

Standard

Adds the bolt standard to the mark.

Short name

Adds the bolts short name to the mark (e.g.,

commercial name of a specific bolt).

Full name

Adds the complete name of the bolt to the mark. This

name is visible in the dialog box list.

Assembly type

Adds the bolts assembly type to the mark.

Number of bolts

Adds the number of bolts to the mark.

Slot length (x, y)

Adds the slots length in the x or y direction to the

mark.

Size

Adds the hole size to the mark. See also Bolt marks
and size elements (p. 310).

Countersunk

Adds countersink to countersunk bolt mark.

Gage of
outstanding leg

Adds hole gage to mark.

Center-to-center
distance

Adds center-to-center distance to mark.

Connection mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to connection marks.

Element

Description

Code

Adds the connection code to the mark. This is a userdefined code you give for the connection in the
connection dialog box. The code can be either a text
string or a number.

Name

Adds the connection name to the mark (e.g.,

Tube_splice).

DSTV code

Adds the DSTV code to the mark.

Connection
number

Adds the number of connection to the mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

295

Element

Description

Running number

Adds the connection running number to the mark. All

connections are automatically numbered with a
running number (e.g. 85).

Group

Adds the connection group to the mark.

Connection error

Adds the connection error to the mark. The numbers

correspond the connection symbol colors:

1 = green
2 = yellow
3 = red symbol

Reinforcement mark elements

This section describes the elements you can include in all reinforcement marks. You can define
mark options separately for single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and reinforcement meshes:

Element

Description

Name

Name of the bar or mesh

Grade

Material grade of the bar or mesh

Diameter

Nominal diameter of the bar

Class

Class of the bar or mesh

Length

Total length of the bar

Number

Quantity of bars

Position

Reinforcement position number

Shape

Shape of the bar or mesh

Weight

Weight of the bar or mesh

cc

Includes the center-to-center spacing of the bars in the

mark. The options are:

Pull-out picture

Reinforcement
meshes

296

cc adds the spacing value if spacing does not vary

cc max adds the largest spacing value of the bar

cc exact lists all spacing values of the bar group

cc min adds the smallest spacing value of the bar

group if spacing varies

group if spacing varies

Adds a pull-out of a bar to the mark. See

Reinforcement pull-outs (p. 304).

These mark elements are specific to reinforcement meshes:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Element

Description

Size

Nominal diameters of the mesh bars, dimensions of

the mesh, and the spacings of the bars in the
longitudinal and crossing directions

Mesh length

Length of the reinforcement mesh

Element

Description

Mesh width

Width of the reinforcement mesh

cc

Use the same center-to-center options as for single

bars. You can define this element individually for the
longitudinal and crossing bars in the mesh.

For information on merged reinforcement marks, see Merging marks (p. 316).

Surface treatment mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to surface treatment marks:

Element

Description

Name

Defined in the Name field in the Surface treatment

properties dialog box.

Material

Surface treatment material

Class

Class of the surface treatment

Code

Code of the surface treatment.

Surface treatment
name

Defined in the Surface treatment name list box in

the Surface treatment properties dialog box.

Section and detail mark and label elements

This section describes the elements specific to section and detail marks:

Element

Description

Section name/
Detail name

The name of the section or the detail (A, B, C, and so

on).

Source drawing
name

The name of the drawing where the view is.

Source drawing
name when
moved

The name of the drawing where the view is. This is

shown only if the view is not in the same drawing as
the section/detail mark.

This section describes the elements specific to section and detail view labels:

Element

Description

Section name/
Detail name

The name of the section or the detail (A, B, C, and so

on).

Scale

The scale of the view.

Drawing name

The name of the current drawing.

Source drawing
name

The name of the drawing where the view has

originally been created.

Source drawing
name when
moved

The name of the drawing where the view has

originally been created. This is shown only when the
view has been moved from its original drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

297

Adding templates in marks

You can create custom graphical templates (.tpl) with Template Editor and add them as
elements in marks and associative notes. In these template marks you can include, for example,
detailed information about the submaterial included in an embed or assembly. You can also add
graphical objects using Template Editor tools in your mark templates. However, mark
templates do not support image files like the other graphical drawing templates. You can add
templates in marks and associative notes in single-part, assembly, cast unit, and general
arrangement drawings.
Usage

1.

Open the mark properties dialog box.

2.

Select Template from the Available elements list and click Add. Note, that this will
remove other elements from the mark.

3.

Select a template from the list in the Mark content - template dialog box. If you have
not created a template yet, or want to edit the template, you can do it from here.

Remember that if you edit the template here, the change affects all
drawings that have marks containing the changed template.

4.

Click OK a nd save the mark properties.

The template is displayed in the mark.

Tekla Structures searches the templates by default from the Marks subfolder. You can rename
the folder in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > File Locations using the variable
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY.
See also

XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY

Mark appearance
Define mark appearance settings using the Content and the General tabs.
Content

298

The Content tab (Single mark and Merged mark tabs for reinforcement marks) defines font
settings and the frames around individual elements.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Option

Action

Frame around
elements

Use to create frames for selected elements. You can

nest frames in marks.

Add frame

To add a frame to an element, select the element in the

Elements in mark box and click Add frame.

Type/ Color

Sets or modifies the frame type and color

independently for each frame. Different frame colors
print out in different line weights.

Font

Defines the font, color and height of text in marks.

The changes you make to the frame type and the font are not visible in
the mark contents list but you can check them in the font and frame
fields and the drawing.

General

The General tab defines mark visibility (for part, bolt, reinforcement, and surface treatment
marks), the mark frames, leader lines, and location. For further information on leader lines and
location, see Mark location (p. 301).

Visibility
Indicates the views where marks appear. You have different options depending on whether you
modify marks on a drawing or view level.
On drawing level

On the drawing level the Visibility of mark field defines whether the marks are created in all
views or only one.

On view level

The following options are available for visibility of marks on a view level:

distributed

Marks are distributed in the view. Tekla Structures only creates marks that are not visible
in the other views.

always

The view always receives marks, irrespective the settings in other views.

preferred

As for distributed, but the preferred view has a higher priority.

none

No marks
Out of view plane

The Parts out of view plane visibility options define whether Tekla Structures displays marks
outside of the view in the drawing.

Visibility of bolt
marks

Use the options for In main parts, In secondary parts, In sub-assembly main parts and In
sub-assembly secondary parts in the bolt mark properties dialog box to define how Tekla
Structures displays bolt marks in drawing views.

Visible

Bolt marks are visible.

Not visible

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

299

Bolt marks are not visible.

Bolt size limit

Filters standard-sized bolt marks out of drawings. Tekla Structures does not display bolt marks
of the size you enter here in the drawing view.

The following variables affect Bolt size limit:

XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE specifies whether the filtered
marks are bolts or holes.
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE specifies the standard of the filtered
marks.
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE specifies whether the
filtered marks are site, shop, or both bolts.

Frame around mark

You can define the appearance of the frame around mark. Choose the type and color for the
frame.
Tekla Structures shows the mark frames and leader lines as continuous or dashed lines in
drawings.
If an object is behind another object in the drawing so that it is hidden, you can show the mark
frame and the leader line of the hidden part with a dashed or a solid line, or hide the mark and
the line.
To set the mark frame and leader line appearance for the part marks of hidden parts, go to the

General tab > Use hidden lines for hidden parts, and select Yes for dashed line or No for

solid line.

Line type for part mark of hidden

part
Yes (dashed line)

No (solid line)

No mark or line

300

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Example

The following variable affects the marks of hidden objects in drawings:

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
prevents Tekla Structures from displaying the marks of hidden parts in
general arrangement drawings.

Mark location
The following properties affect mark location in drawings:

Selected leader line

Orientation marks (p. 274)
Protection (p. 238)
Placing (p. 239).

Part mark leader line

You have the following options for leader lines in part and surface treatment marks:

Option

Action

Description

Use leader line

Always use a leader line.

Try along part

Tries to find a space along the part

for the mark. If impossible, Tekla
Structures uses a leader line.

Always along part

The mark is always along the part.

Lack of space might cause the mark
to overlap other elements.

Always inside the part

The mark is always inside the part.

Always inside and

aligned to the part

The mark is always inside the part

and parallel to the part axis.

Inside the part if

possible

Tries to find a space the mark inside

the part. If impossible, Tekla
Structures places the mark along the
part with a leader line.

Inside and aligned to

the part if possible

Tries to find a space inside the part

for the mark and align it parallel to
the part axis. If impossible, Tekla
Structures places the mark along the
part with a leader line.

Along and in the

middle of a part face.

Places the part mark along and in

the middle of a part face

To change the place of the leader line base point, drag the base point to a new location. You can
drag the base point with the following limitations:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

301

Leader line
minimum length

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH

You can define the part mark leader line position for two types of leader lines: for a leader line
with a rectangular frame and for a leader line with no frame. To position the leader line, use the
following variables:

Leader line
extension length

If the base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside that part.

In advanced options, you can give a minimum leader line length, and define that if the leader
line is shorter than the minimum length, it is not drawn.

Leader line
position

If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line.

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME

You can create a short horizontal extension line for a part mark leader line. To define the length
of the leader line extension, use the following variable:

XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH

Reinforcement mark leader line

Use the following options to define leader lines in reinforcement marks:

Option

Description
Always creates a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the reinforcing bar for the mark. If
impossible, creates a leader line.
The mark is always along the reinforcing bar. The mark may
overlap other elements if there is not enough space.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar on line. If there is not
enough space for the mark, a leader line is created.

Tekla Structures tries to place the mark close to the midpoint on straight bars, or to the
midpoint of the longest bar segment.
In reinforcing bar groups, Tekla Structures first tries to place the mark on the middle bar if it is
visible. If that is not possible, Tekla Structures tries the next visible bar. To create dimension
lines for marks, see Adding reinforcement dimension lines (p. 163).
You can select how to display the leader line for identical reinforcement marks, or marks
created for a reinforcing bar group. To define them, use the Rebar group mark options on the
General tab.
Use the following options to define leader line for a reinforcing bar group:

302

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Option

Example

One leader line to group

One leader line per row

Parallel leader lines

Leader lines to one point

Tekla Structures shows the mark frames and leader lines as continuous
or dashed lines in drawings. Dashed mark frame and leader line indicate
that the object is behind another object in the drawing.

To change the place of the leader line base point, drag the base point to a new location. You can
drag the base point with the following limitations:

If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line.
If the base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside that part.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

303

For automatic placement of leader line base points, see Placing reinforcing bar mark leader
line base point automatically (p. 304).

Placing reinforcing bar mark leader line base point automatically

Tekla Structures places the reinforcing bar leader line base point so that it only points to one
reinforcing bar. You can use the following variables in Tools > Options > Advanced Options
> Concrete Detailing to automatically place the base points:

Example

Variable

Description

XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADE
R_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATIO
N

When the variable is set to TRUE, Tekla

Structures selects an optimal place for the
base point.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_B
ASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE

Use to define how far the other reinforcing

bars must be from the base point so that
Tekla Structures can place the base point.
Enter the value in millimeters.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_B
ASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGT
H

Use to define the step length while searching

for an optimal place for the base point along
the reinforcing bar. Enter the value in
millimeters.

An example showing optimized base points.

Reinforcement pull-outs
To illustrate the shape and dimensions of a reinforcing bar in a drawing, add a pull-out of the
bar to the reinforcement mark:

304

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

1.
2.
3.

Open the drawing properties dialog box and click Reinforcement Marks....
In the reinforcement mark properties dialog box, double-click the Pull-out picture element
to add it to the reinforcement mark.
In the Pull-out picture dialog box, define the pull-out properties.

Property

Description

Scaling

The scale of the pull-out is relative to the scale of

the drawing view.
For example, if the drawing view scale is 1/10 and
the pull-out scaling is 2, the actual scale of the pullout in the drawing view is 1/5.

End marks

The shape of bar ends in the pull-out. The options

are:

Dimensions

Select this checkbox to show bar dimensions in the

pull-out.

Exaggeration

Show reinforcement bar hooks more clearly in the

pull-out.

Bending angle

Select this checkbox to show bar bending angles in

the pull-out.

To change for example the color, line type, or representation of a pullout, open the rebar_config.inp file in
..\environments\*your_environment*\system and edit
the following lines: PulloutColor, PulloutVisibleLinetype and
PulloutRepresentation.
For more information, see Reinforcement settings for drawings

Reinforcement settings for drawings

Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the
..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder to define the following
reinforcement-related issues in drawings:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

305

Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule

Rounding of bar dimensions
Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding
Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs

You can edit the rebar_config.inp file using any standard text editor (for example
Notepad).
The entries in the rebar_config.inp file are:

Entry

Description

MergeOneForma
t

No longer used. Define these properties in the drawing properties.

MergeTwoOrMor
eFormats
MergeAndForma
t
LeaderLinetyp
e
DimensionMark
SpacingSepara
tor

="/"

ExactDimensio
nMarkSpacingS
eparator

=" + "

ExactDimensio
nMarkPcsSepar
ator

="*"

GroupBarMark

No longer in use.

MarkingDimAtt
ributes

No longer in use.

ScheduleCount
ry

Defines which bending schedule is used. Affects bending shapes in

templates and reports. The available schedules are FIN, SWE, UK, US.

Affects the separator in reinforcement marks. See also Adding

reinforcement dimension lines.
Separator between different exact spacing values in reinforcement
marks.
Separator between the number of bars and their exact spacing value in
reinforcement mark.

When you number the model, the bending shape for the bar is given
according to this information. For example, in the Default environment,
the bending shapes are letters A, B, C, and so on.
See also Reinforcing bar bending types.
ScheduleDimen
sionRoundingD
irection
ScheduleTotal
LengthRoundin
gDirection
ScheduleDimen
sionRoundingA
ccuracy

306

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Options:

"UP": rounds bar dimensions up

"DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
"NEAREST": rounds bar dimensions either up or down

Sets the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions. Default is 1 mm.

Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down
according to the option you select for
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.

Entry

Description

ScheduleTotal
LengthRoundin
gAccuracy

Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar length. Default is 10 mm.

MeshSymbolFil
e

Points to the mesh symbol file that contains the available mesh symbols.
Affects the available reinforcement mesh symbols in drawings.

Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down

according to the option you select for
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection.

By default, points to the mesh.sym file in the

...\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\commo
n\symbols folder.
StrandSymbolF
ile

Points to the strand symbol file that contains the available strand
symbols. Affects drawings.
By default, points to the strand.sym file in the
...\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\commo
n\symbols folder.

UnbondingSymb
olFile

Points to the unbonding symbol file that contains the available

unbonding symbols.

RebarMeshSize

Template for rebar mesh size.

PullOutDimens
ionFormat

Defines the format for displaying the dimensions.

The format follows the dimension properties format.
Options:

0 = ###
1 = ###[.#]
2 = ###.#
3 = ###[.##]
4 = ###.##
5 = ###[.###]
6 = ###.###
7 = ### #/#
8 = ###/##.###

PullOutDimens
ionPrecision

Sets the level of precision.

PullOutDimens
ionUnit

Defines the units to use.

1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, and so on.

0 = auto
1 = mm
2 = cm
3=m
4 = inch
5 = foot and inch

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

307

Entry

Description

PullOutColor

Sets the color for the pull-outs in reinforcement marks.

Options:

1 = black
2 = red
3 = bright green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = yellow
7 = magenta
8 = brown
9 = green
10 = dark blue
11 = forest green
12 = orange
13 = gray

See also Reinforcement pull-outs.

PullOutVisibl
eLineType

Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in pull-outs.

Options:
1=
2 =
3=
4=
5=
6=
7=

PullOutRepres
entation

Sets the representation type.

Options:

308

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

0 = single
1 = double
2 = filled
3 = stick

Entry

Description

PullOutAngleC
olor

Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.

Options:

1 = black
2 = red
3 = green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = yellow
7 = magenta
8 = brown
9 = green
10 = dark blue
11 = forest green
12 = orange
13 = gray

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

309

Entry

Description

PullOutAngleL
ineType

Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs.

Options:
1=
2=
3 =
4 =
5=
6=
7 =

PullOutShowDu
plicateDims

Defines whether duplicate dimensions are showed multiple times for

one bar.
Options:
0 = duplicate dimensions are not shown

(default)

1 = equal and parallel dimensions are shown, but similar hook

dimensions are not shown

2 = equal and parallel dimensions are not shown, but both hook

dimensions are shown

3 = all dimensions are shown

4 = hook dimensions are not shown
5 = hook dimensions, or equal and parallel dimensions are not shown

Bolt marks and size elements

You can define most of the bolt mark contents in the Bolt Mark Properties dialog box. You
can also create marks that depend on the object type (bolt, hole, slotted hole). For more
information on elements specific to bolt marks, see Bolt mark elements (p. 295).
Use the following variables to define the contents of the size element:

310

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

Switches

Examples

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

You can use the following switches in the string:

Mark contents

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE

BOLT_NUMBER
BOLT_DIAMETER
BOLT_LENGTH
HOLE_DIAMETER
LONGHOLE_X
LONGHOLE_Y
LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
BOLT_STANDARD
BOLT_MATERIAL
BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
NAME_SHORT
NAME_FULL

You define the mark contents using a format string which has a specific syntax:

Variables are surrounded by double % characters (%%) (not used between a variable and
an operator)

Write text without quotation marks

To use special characters enter a backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number
You can edit marks: change the order of the variables, add your own text, and make
calculations

set XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%%HOLE_DIAMETER%%(%%HOLE_DIAMETE
R+LONGHOLE_X%%x%%HOLE_DIAMETER+LONGHOLE_Y%%)
set XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%%HOLE_DIAMETER%%

Adding user-defined attributes in marks

To add a user-defined attribute in a drawing mark:
1.
2.

Select User-defined attribute in the Available elements list, then click Add.
Type the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined attribute dialog
box. Click OK to close the dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

311

3.

Save the part mark and drawing properties.

You can use both user-defined attributes and template attributes in the
Mark content - user defined attribute dialog box. Enter the userdefined attribute exactly as it appears in objects.inp file.

For more information on elements in marks, see Mark content (p. 293).

Control numbers in marks

To display control numbers in drawing marks:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the mark properties dialog box.

In the Available elements column, double-click User-defined attribute to open the
Mark content - user defined-attributes dialog box. Type in ACN. Click OK.
ACN appears in the Elements in mark column.
Click OK to close the dialog box.

Part number format in marks

To specify the number of characters in part numbers in assembly or part marks:
1.

Open the mark properties dialog box.

In the Available elements column, double-click User-defined attribute to open the
Mark content - user defined-attributes dialog box.

2.

Type in ASSEMBLY_SERIAL_NUMBER or PART_SERIAL_NUMBER, followed by a period (.)

and the number of characters. For example, PART_SERIAL_NUMBER.3 creates part
numbers with at least three characters (001, 002, 003, etc.):

3.

Click OK.

Weld marks in drawings

Tekla Structures shows the properties of a weld in the weld mark in drawings.

312

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

In your drawing, you can see the the weld marks of the welds
created in the Model Editor. To modify the properties of these
welds, you need to modify the weld in the Model Editor. When you
perform numbering, the welds are updated in drawings.

You can also add and modify weld marks manually in the Drawing
Editor.

The following images describe the basic concepts in weld mark placement in drawings.
Above line
Below line
Reference line
Arrow
Arrow side for weld
Other side for weld

The weld mark contains a reference line and an arrow. The arrow connects the reference line to
the arrow side of a connection.
When parts are welded together, you can place welds on:

The arrow sides only

The other sides only
Both the arrow and other sides

The welds on the arrow and other sides of a part can have different weld properties.
By default, the properties you define in Model Editor or in Drawing Editor for a weld on the
arrow side appear above the reference line in drawings. The properties of an other-side weld
appear below the reference line in the weld mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

313

To show the arrow-side weld properties below the reference line in a

weld mark and the other-side properties above, use the variable
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK.

The following images describe the weld symbols used in weld marks.

Weld size
Weld type
Contour symbol
Finishing symbol
Groove angle
Length of weld segment
Pitch of weld segments
Site weld symbol
Weld around symbol
Weld number, process, specification, or other reference text

314

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Length of weld segment

Pitch (center-to-center spacing) of weld segments
Site weld symbol
Intermittent (stitch) weld

Effective throat
Root opening
See also

Add Weld Mark (p. 394)

Welds (p. 281)

Level marks in drawings

If your elevation drawing already contains elevation dimensions, you will have entered them
manually in the grid properties dialog box. To ensure that your model is accurate, you can also
add level marks in your drawing to ensure that these dimensions are correct.
In the following image you have the dimension createad in the grid properties dialog box and
level mark createad with the Add Level Mark command in the Drawing Editor.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

315

Elevation dimension from the grid properties dialog box

Dimension created with Create level mark tool
See also

Add Level Mark (p. 394)

5.10 Merging marks

This section explains how to combine marks.
You can force Tekla Structures to automatically merge similar reinforcement marks for bars
that belong to the same concrete part or cast unit.

Tekla Structures always merges reinforcement marks that will appear in

the same position in the drawing.

Topics

Merging part marks (p. 316)

Automatically merging reinforcement marks (p. 317)
Manually merging and splitting reinforcement marks (p. 320)

Merging part marks

Merge marks to reduce the number of part marks. Merged marks contain the usual part mark
information, plus the number of parts and near side and far side information.
To merge marks, go to the Part mark... > General tab in the drawing properties dialog box and
set Merge marks to On.

316

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Example

Settings

Description

Off

Shows one mark for each part.

On

Merges marks for identical

secondary parts on both faces of
main parts.

To modify merged marks, use the following variables:

Limitations

Option

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT

Tekla Structures does not merge neighbor part marks. A merged mark has a single leader line.

Automatically merging reinforcement marks

Tekla Structures automatically merges marks for visible reinforcing bars in drawings if:

The bars belong to the same concrete part or cast unit

The direction of the bars is the same
The bar marks are identical
The bars are close to each other
A straight line can be drawn through all the bars

To have Tekla Structures automatically merge reinforcement marks in

drawings, the reinforcement must be attached to a part or cast unit in the
model. See Attaching reinforcement to parts.

To define the distance within which to automatically merge marks for visible reinforcing bars,
use the variables XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL and
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL.

Merging within a cast unit

To define how to merge reinforcement marks for cast units in drawings, open the drawing
properties dialog box and click Reinforcement mark... > Merging. Select an option from the
Identical marks in same cast unit list box:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

317

Option

Description
One leader
line per row

Merges the marks and creates one

leader line for a row of reinforcing bars.

Parallel leader
lines

Merges the marks and creates parallel

leader lines.

Leader lines
to one point

Merges the marks and draws all leader

lines to one point.

No merge

Does not merge marks. Tekla Structures

creates an individual leader line for
each mark.

If you select No merge, you still need to define the mark content for the
marks that Tekla Structures automatically merges on the Merging tab.

Preferred merge direction

If there are several possible merge directions, you can select a direction:

Option

Description
Merge vertically

Merges the marks in the vertical

direction of the drawing.

Merge
horizontally

Merges the marks in the horizontal

direction of the drawing.

Merged mark content

Merged marks may include several blocks, and additional information. Blocks combine
similar single marks.
Example

318

For example, you can merge three A f12 L2000 marks to a block and six V f8 L650 marks to
another block, and then merge them in the following way:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Single mark content

Symbol separating the blocks
Block prefix
Distance between groups
Block 1
Block 2
Merged marks can contain the following elements:

Element

Description

Block prefix

Adds text or a value to the beginning of each repeated

block, for example, the number of single marks
merged. Opens a dialog box where you can enter the
prefix.

Single mark content

Adds the content of the single mark indicated on the

Single mark tab to the mark. See Mark content (p.
293) and Reinforcement mark elements (p. 296).

Distance
between groups

Adds the center-to-center distances between

reinforcing bars or bar groups included in a merged
mark.

Symbol
separating
blocks in mark

Adds a symbol between the blocks in the mark. Opens

a dialog box where you can enter the symbol. The
elements that appear before this element on the mark
content list form a block.

Other elements

See Common elements in marks (p. 293).

To ensure that merged reinforcement marks appear in the drawing,

always include Symbol separating blocks in mark as the last element
in the reinforcement mark. To omit the separating symbol, leave this
field blank, but still include the element in the mark.
You can use the following variables as block prefixes. Remember to add the % character before
and after the variable name.

Variable

Description

%NUMBER%

Includes the number of marks merged

to the mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

319

See also

Variable

Description

%NUMBER_IN_PLANE%

Includes the number of marks merged

in the plane of the drawing to the
mark.

%NUMBER_OUT_OF_PLANE%

Includes the number of marks merged

in the depth direction of the drawing
to the mark.

Manually merging and splitting reinforcement marks (p. 320)

Manually merging and splitting reinforcement marks

Merging

To manually merge marks in a drawing:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Splitting

Click Annotating > Properties > Merged Reinforcement Mark....

Set the mark properties. See Automatically merging reinforcement marks (p. 317) for
the options.
Select the marks to merge in the drawing.
Right-click and select Merge marks from the pop-up menu.

To split merged marks:

1.
2.

Select the marks to split in the drawing.

Right-click and select Split marks from the pop-up menu.

5.11 Grids in drawings

You can use grid lines and grid line labels in cast-unit, assembly, general arrangement
drawings and single-part drawings.
Topics

Grid properties (p. 320)

Editing grids and grid lines (p. 322)

Grid properties
You can modify grid properties on the drawing and view levels, and modify individual grids or
grid lines in a drawing view.
The Select grids and Select grid lines switches on the Drawings: Select toolbar enable you to
select grids and gridlines in drawings and views:

320

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Select grids
Select grid lines
To modify grid properties, open one of the grid properties dialog boxes:

Drawing grid properties dialog box:

Click Grid... in the drawing properties dialog box.

View Grid Properties dialog box:

Double-click the border of the drawing view, and click Grid... in the View Properties
dialog box.

Grid Properties dialog box:

Click the Select grid icon in the Drawings: Select toolbar and double-click a grid in the
drawing view.
To modify grid line properties:

Click the Select grid line icon in the Drawings: Select toolbar and double-click a grid
line. The Grid line properties dialog box opens.
The options in the grid properties dialog boxes define how Tekla Structures displays grid
lines in drawings.

Grid

You have the following options:

Not visible

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

321

No visible grid lines

Visible

Grid lines visible in the selected view

Visible in all views

Grid lines visible in all of the views

Only grid line marks visible

Only the grid line mark and a short section of the grid line (defined in the offset field in
Text placing options) is visible. This option is only available in the General - Grid
Properties, View Grid Properties, Grid Properties and Grid Line Properties dialog
boxes.
Text placing

Select the checkboxes to indicate the direction of grid line labels.

Enter the distance between the end of the grid line and the text.

Appearance

You can select colors for grid lines and their labels (grid line texts) independently. You can
also select text height, font and text frame style.
You can also use fixed-size grid label frames, see
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH and adjust the grid label frame line
thickness, see XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR.

Editing grids and grid lines

To edit a grid or grid line, double-click it. This is useful when you want to:

Hide grids or grid lines: set the grid line color and text to the background color of the
drawing

Change a line type

Change label properties (font, size, frame)
Define the position of a label

The Select grids and Select grid lines switches on the Drawings:
Select toolbar enable you to select grids and gridlines in drawings and
views:

Example

You might create a drawing that contains one grid for the architect, another for the engineer.
When you print drawings for the architect, simply hide the engineers grid.

Moving or
extending grid
lines

To change the location of a grid label or extend a grid line, select the grid line handle and drag
it to a new location.

See also

Specifying a fixed size for a grid label frame (p. 323)

Adjusting the thickness of the grid label frame (p. 323)

322

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Specifying a fixed size for a grid label frame

You can specify a fixed size for the grid label frames in drawings. This is useful, for example,
when you want all the grid label frames to be of the same size no matter whether there are one
or two digits in the frame.
Usage

1.

Select Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.

2.

Set a value for XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH.

The default value is zero (0), which indicates that the width of the grid label frame depends on
the width of the grid label. If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures adjusts the grid label
frames to text within each frame.
Example of grid label frames when the frame size is not fixed:

Example of grid label frames when the frame size is fixed:

Adjusting the thickness of the grid label frame

Usage

You can adjust the line thickness of the grid label frame. You may want to emphasize the grid
label frames so that they are shown with a thicker line than the rest of the grid.
1.
2.

Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Drawing Properties

In XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR, enter the
factor for the width of the grid label frame.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

323

Each color has a certain line thickness. The thickness of the grid label
frame on the printed black-and-white drawings depends on the color that
has been defined for the grid label in the grid properties and on the value
of the XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR.

5.12 The Drawing Classifier

Use the Drawing Classifier to control the drawing properties for different types of model
objects. You can apply it to:

Appearance
Dimensioning
Marks

This enables you to create different drawing styles. For example, you might create a drawing
style for assembly drawings that shows different position dimensions for end plates, cleats, and
haunches.

324

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

End plate is dimensioned by bolts.

Cleat is dimensioned by part.
Haunch is not dimensioned at all.
Classifier uses drawing filters to select model objects, such as parts, bolts, welds, and so on.
Topics

How the Drawing Classifier works (p. 325)

Using the Drawing Classifier (p. 326)
Troubleshooting (p. 329)

How the Drawing Classifier works

The Classifier uses existing drawing dialog boxes, and there is no special user interface. The
Classifier works with single-part, assembly, and general arrangement drawings.
The Classifier works by using a specific naming convention for saved properties. You save
drawing and filter properties with any name for, but you must use the same name, prefixed by
"filter_", when you save the drawing object properties, as shown below:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

325

Drawing object properties must always begin with "filter_".

The Classifier uses the following properties:

Drawing or drawing view properties

The view filter in the Drawing Editor, or general arrangement drawing filter.
Drawing object properties (for example part, bolt, weld, reinforcement, mark, or
dimension properties) from drawing or view sub-dialog boxes.

Using the Drawing Classifier

This is a simple example showing how to use the Drawing Classifier.

326

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Example

Description
The drawing before we used
the Classifier. All parts
appear in the same color.

The drawing after we used

the Classifier. Beams and
columns now appear in
different colors.

To use the Drawing Classifier:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Define and save the drawing properties for the drawing type you want to use. See
Creating drawing property files (p. 328)
Create a view filter to define specific groups of model objects. You can create view filters
at the drawing view level or the general arrangement drawing level. See Creating view
filters (p. 328)
Create filter-specific property files for groups of model objects, to define how they appear
in the drawings. See Creating drawing object property files (p. 329)
Create drawings manually or use drawing wizards. See Creating drawings (p. 329).

You need to understand how to edit drawings at different levels to use

the classifier effectively. See Three levels of editing drawings (p. 37)
for more information.

When you change part properties in a model after you have defined the
Drawing Classifier settings, part presentation and mark content are
updated in general arrangement drawings. Use the variable
XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS to define
whether part presentation and mark content are updated. Drawings are
not updated if the change does not affect numbering.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

327

Creating drawing property files

Create drawing property files to define the properties of each type of drawing you want to
create. To create a drawing property file (named "test") for a general arrangement drawing:
1.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General
Arrangement Drawing.... Tekla Structures opens the drawing properties dialog box.

2.

Set the drawing properties. Verify the properties on sub-dialog boxes. Click Apply to
close each sub-dialog box. Tekla Structures will use these as the default drawing properties
for objects that do not match any classifier filters.
Name and save the drawing properties. Enter the name "test" in the text box next to the
Save as button. Click Save as.

3.

4.

Click Apply.

You can also create and save properties on the drawing view level using
the Drawing Editor. If you want to use drawing wizards to automatically
create drawings, always give drawing properties the same name as the
view property files.

Creating view filters

Create view filters to define the specific groups of model objects, whose appearance you want
to change. In this example we create one view filter for beams, and another for columns:
1.
2.
3.
4.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Filter... button to
open the General - Filter Properties dialog box.
Click the Parts tab, and in the Filter String text box next to Part Name, enter "BEAM".
In the text box next to the Save as button, enter "beam". Click Save as to save the view
filter.
Repeat the steps 2 and 3 for columns: on the Parts tab, enter "COLUMN" and save
properties as "column".
Now you should have two filters, beam and column.

5.

Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Do not click Apply, as this will apply the current
filter to the entire drawing and the Classifier will not work.

Always use view filters when you use the Drawing Classifier. The
Drawing Classifier does not recognize selection filters.

328

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Creating drawing object property files

Create different part properties for the groups of model objects for which you have defined
view filters. This example draws columns in turquoise, and beams in magenta.
1.
2.
3.

In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Part... button.
Modify the drawing object properties. Click the Appearance tab and change the Color to
turquoise.
Enter the name "filter_test_column" in the text box next to the Save as button, then click
Save as to save the drawing object property file for columns

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create a drawing object property file for beams, setting the Color to
magenta. Save the drawing object property filter for beams as "filter_test_beam".
4.

Click Cancel to close the object properties dialog box.

Creating drawings
To create a general arrangement drawing using the Classifier and the "test" properties we used
in our example:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

In the Model Editor, click Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement
Drawing....
Click Drawing properties.... Tekla Structures opens the drawing properties dialog box.
Click the down arrow in the Load text box, then select the "test" drawing properties you
created.
Click Load.
Click OK to apply the Classifier properties and to close the drawing properties dialog box.
Select view(s) to include in the drawing and click Create.

Open the drawing and check that beams and columns appear in the colors you defined
previously.

You can also use the Classifier together with drawing wizards to create
drawings. To do this:

Be sure to include the saved drawing properties in the wizard file.

Use the same values in the selection filter in the wizard as you used
in the drawing filter. This ensures that both filters select the same
objects. You may need to create new selection filters and edit the
drawing wizard file.

Troubleshooting

All dimensioning options in the drawing (part, bolt and position dimensions) are
associated with parts. So, to define the properties of bolt dimensions using the Classifier,
you need to create a view filter for the bolted parts (for example end plates), not for the
bolts themselves.

If the view properties and drawing properties files have the same name, the Classifier uses
the view properties file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

329

The Classifier filters only objects once. If you create several view filters that use different
criteria for the same part, the Classifier only uses the first view filter it finds (in
alphabetical order).

The Classifier ignores the following drawing properties in sub-dialog boxes:

Part mark... > General tab > Visible. To not create part marks, leave the Elements in
mark column empty on the Content tab

Part mark... > General tab > Merge marks

Bolt mark... > General tab > Bolt size limit

Bolt mark... > General tab > Visible. To not create bolt marks, leave the Elements in
mark column empty on the Content tab
Neighbor part... > Visibility tab: all options
Weld... > General tab > Size limit and Site/workshop options

If you have problems using the Classifier (for example, parts disappear from the drawing), you
may have applied the view filter or drawing object properties to the entire drawing. (You may
have clicked Apply or OK to close one or more sub-dialog boxes when you were creating the
view filter). To fix this:
1.
2.
3.

Load the drawing properties you defined to use with the Classifier.
In all sub dialog boxes, check that the Classifier settings are not loaded. Click OK to close
the sub dialog box.
Save the drawing properties.

5.13 Drawing properties reference

This section consists of the command reference pages for the commands you can use to manage
drawing properties.
To define drawing properties, select a drawing command from the Drawings & Reports >
Drawing Settings menu in the Tekla Structures Model Editor. The commands are similar for
single-part, assembly, cast-unit, and general arrangement drawings. This section lists the
commands related to drawing properties and gives a short description of each one.

Topics

Drawing view properties... (p. 330)

Section view properties... (p. 332)
Part mark properties... (p. 334)
Bolt mark properties... (p. 335)
Connection mark properties... (p. 336)
Reinforcement mark properties... (p. 337)
Surface treatment mark properties... (p. 338)

Drawing view properties...

Synopsis

Displays the drawing view properties dialog box.

Description

Tekla Structures creates drawing views using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box.
The fields on the View tab are:

330

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Field

Description

More information

Front view

Define the drawing views

Defining which
drawing views to create
(p. 242)

Define the 3D view properties.

3D views in cast-unit,
assembly and singlepart drawings (p. 383)

Top view
Back view
Bottom view
Section views
End views
3D view
3D view attributes

The fields on the Attributes tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Scale

The drawing view scale.

Defining exact
drawing view scales
(p. 242)

View
extension for
neighbor parts

Sets the distance from the

drawing view to display
neighboring parts

Displaying neighbor
parts in drawing
views (p. 243)

Coordinate
system

The coordinate system of the

drawing view

Rotate
coordinate
system

Select an option or enter a value

to rotate the view around the x,
y, or z axis of the parts.

Defining part
orientation in
drawing views (p.
247)

The fields on the Shortening tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Minimum cut
part length

Defines how to shorten section

views of parts that have no
details that need to be visible.

Shortening parts in
drawings (p. 254)

Space
between cut
parts
Cut skew parts

The fields on the Label tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Front view

Defines a name for the

view.

Displaying view
names automatically
in drawings (p. 255)

Top view
Back view
Bottom view

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

331

Field

Description

Position

Location of the name

label.

Color

Color of the font in the

name label.

Height

Size of the font in the

name label.

Usage

1.
2.

See also

Drawing view properties (p. 241)

More information

Select an option from the list boxes, or enter a value in the available fields.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current View Properties dialog box. For
existing drawings, click Modify to change the existing view properties.

Moving drawing views (p. 380)

Section view properties...

Synopsis
Description

Displays the drawings section view properties dialog box.

Tekla Structures creates shortened drawing views using the current properties in the Section

View Properties dialog box.

The fields on the Attributes tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Scale

The section view drawing scale.

Section depth

Defines the positive and

negative distances of the section
view when views are not
combined.

Section view
properties (p. 259)

Distance for
combining
parts

Defines the distance range for

combining cut views.

View
extension for
neighbor parts

Defines the boundaries of the

drawing view.

Left section

Define the view direction of the

section.

Section view
direction (p. 260)

Minimum cut
part length

Defines the minimum cut length

of the shortened part.

Shortening parts in
drawings (p. 254)

Space
between cut
parts

Defines the distance between cut

parts in the drawing view.

Cut skew parts

Defines whether to shorten

skewed parts.

Middle section
Right section

The fields on the View label tab are:

332

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Field

Description

More information

Defines the text on the

section view label. Click
the ... buttons next to the
text fields to open the
Mark Contents dialog
box.

Section and detail

mark and label
elements (p. 297)

Symbol

Section view label

symbol.

Section mark (p.

262)

Color

Color of the section view

label symbol.

Size

Size of the section view

label symbol.

Line length

Length of the section

view label line.

Text
Text

Symbol

Label position
Vertical

Vertical location of the

section view label.

Horizontal

Horizontal location of the

section view label.

Section view label (p.

265)

View direction marks

Section views

Visibility of the section

view direction mark.

End views

Visibility of the end view

direction mark.

Height

Height of the view

direction mark.

View direction
marks (p. 261)

The fields on the Cutting line tab are:

Field

Description

More information

Line

Length and offset of

the cutting line.

Cutting line tab (p.

264)

Color

Color of the cutting

line.

The fields on the Section mark tab are.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

333

Field

Description

More information

Defines the text on the

section mark. Click the
... buttons next to the
text fields to open the
Mark Contents dialog
box.

Section and detail

mark and label
elements (p. 297)

Color

Color of the section

mark symbol.

Section mark (p. 262)

Symbol

Section mark symbol.

Size

Size of the section

mark symbol.

x/y

Offset of the section

mark symbol.

Text
Text

Symbol

Usage

1.
2.

Select options from the list boxes, or enter a value in a text box.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current View Properties dialog box. For
existing drawings, click Modify to change the existing view properties.

See also

Section view properties (p. 259)

Section view label and mark (p. 262)

Part mark properties...

Synopsis
Description

Displays the drawings part mark properties dialog box.

Tekla Structures creates part marks in the drawing view using the current properties in the Part

Mark Properties dialog box.

334

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Field

Description

More information

Visibility

Defines the visibility of part marks in

drawing views.

Visibility (p. 299)

Merge marks

Defines whether Tekla Structures

merges part marks.

Merging part marks (p.

316)

Mark frame type

Defines the frame type.

Frame around mark (p.

300)

Mark leader line

Defines the leader type.

Part mark leader line

(p. 301)

Mark frame color

Defines the frame color.

Mark appearance (p.

298)

Available elements

Elements available to define the mark

content.

Part mark elements (p.

294)

Add button

Adds mark elements to the main or

secondary part mark.

Mark properties (p.

292)

Remove button

Removes mark elements from the main

or secondary part mark.

Field

Description

More information

Main part elements

Elements contained in the main part

mark.

Mark content (p. 293)

Secondary part
elements

Elements contained in the secondary

part mark.

Sub-assembly main
part elements

Elements contained in the main part

mark of a sub-assembly.

Sub-assembly
secondary part
elements

Elements contained in the secondary

part mark of a sub-assembly.

Frame around
element type

Defines the frame type.

Add frame button

Adds a frame to a selected part mark

element.

Frame around
element color

Defines the frame color.

Mark font color

Defines the font color.

Mark font height

Defines the font height.

Mark font

Defines which font to use for marks.

Move up button

Moves the part mark element up the

list.

Move down button

Moves the part mark element down the

list.

Usage

1.
2.

See also

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Mark appearance (p.

298)

Mark properties (p.

292)

Select options from the list boxes.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current Part Mark Properties dialog box.
For existing drawings, click Modify to change the existing mark properties.

Bolt mark properties...

Synopsis
Description

Displays the drawings bolt mark properties dialog box.

Tekla Structures creates bolt marks in the drawing view using the current properties in the Bolt

Mark Properties dialog box.

Field

Description

More information

Visibility in view

The visibility of bolt marks in

drawing views.

Visibility (p. 299)

In main parts

The visibility of bolts in main parts.

In secondary parts

The visibility of bolts in secondary

parts.

Visibility of bolt marks (p.

299)

In sub-assembly
main parts

The visibility of bolts in subassembly main parts.

In sub-assembly
secondary parts

The visibility of bolts in subassembly secondary parts.

Bolt size limit

The visibility of the default size

bolt.

Bolt size limit (p. 300)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

335

Field

Description

More information

Mark frame type

The frame type.

Frame around mark (p.

300)

Mark leader line

The leader line type.

Mark frame color

The frame color.

Mark appearance (p. 298)

Available ele-ments

Elements available to define the

mark content.

Bolt mark elements (p.

295)

Add button

Adds mark elements to the mark.

Mark properties (p. 292)

Remove button

Removes mark elements from the

mark.

Site bolts

Elements contained in the site bolt

mark.

Shop bolts

Elements contained in the shop bolt

mark.

Frame around
element type

The frame type.

Add frame but-ton

Adds a frame to a selected mark

element.

Frame around
element color

The frame color.

Mark font color

The font color.

Mark font height

The font height.

Mark font

Which font to use for marks.

Move up button

Moves the mark element up the list.

Move down but-ton

Moves the mark element down the

list.

Usage

1.
2.

See also

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Bolt mark elements (p.

295)

Mark appearance (p. 298)

Mark properties (p. 292)

Select options from the list boxes.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current Bolt Mark Properties dialog box.
For existing drawings, click Modify to change the existing mark properties.

Connection mark properties...

Synopsis

Displays the drawings connection mark properties dialog box.

Description

Tekla Structures creates connection marks in the drawing view using the current properties in
the Connection Mark Properties dialog box.

336

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Field

Description

More information

Mark frame type

The frame type.

Mark frame color

The frame color.

Frame around mark

(p. 300)

Available elements

Elements available to define the mark Connection mark

content.
elements (p. 295)

Add button

Adds mark elements to the mark.

Remove button

Removes mark elements from the

mark.

Mark properties (p.

292)

Field

Description

More information

Elements in mark

The elements to show in the

connection mark.

Connection mark
elements (p. 295)

Frame around element

type

The frame type.

Mark appearance (p.

298)

Add frame button

Adds a frame to a selected mark

element.

Frame around element

color

The frame color.

Mark font color

The font color.

Mark font height

The font height.

Mark font

Which font to use for marks.

Move up button

Moves the mark element up the list.

Move down button

Moves the mark element down the

list.

Usage

1.
2.

See also

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Mark properties (p.

292)

Select options from the list boxes.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current Connection Mark Properties
dialog box. For existing drawings, click Modify to change the existing mark properties.

Reinforcement mark properties...

Synopsis

Displays the drawings reinforcement mark properties dialog box.

Description

Tekla Structures creates marks for reinforcement in the drawing view using the current
properties in the Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box.

Field name

Description

More information

Mark visibility in view

Defines if reinforcement marks

appear in drawing views.

Visibility (p. 299)

Mark frame type

Frame type.

Mark frame color

Frame color.

Frame around mark (p.

300)

Leader line

Type of leader line.

Reinforcement mark
leader line (p. 302)

Merged mark tab

Defines how duplicate marks are

merged in the drawing view.

Merging marks (p. 316)

Available elements

Elements you can use to define mark

content.

Reinforcement mark
elements (p. 296)

Add button

Adds mark elements to the mark.

Mark properties (p. 292)

Remove button

Removes mark elements from mark.

Elements in mark

Elements to show in the mark. Set

single and group mark properties
separately.

Reinforcement mark
elements (p. 296)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

337

Field name

Description

More information

Frame around
element type

Frame type.

Mark appearance (p.

298)

Add frame button

Adds a frame to a selected mark

element.

Frame around
element color

Frame color.

Mark font color

Font color.

Mark font height

Font height.

Mark font

Font to use in marks.

Move up button

Moves the mark element up the list.

Move down button

Moves the mark element down the

list.

Usage

1.
2.

See also

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Mark properties (p. 292)

Select options for each field.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current Reinforcement Mark Properties
dialog box. To change the mark properties in selected drawing(s), click Modify.

Surface treatment mark properties...

Synopsis

Opens the surface treatment mark properties dialog box.

Description

Tekla Structures creates marks for surface treatment in the drawing view using the current
properties in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

Field name

Description

More information

Visibility in
view

Show or hide surface treatment

marks in drawing views.

Visibility (p. 299)

Merge marks

Option to merge surface

treatment marks.

For more information

on merging marks,
see Merging part
marks (p. 316)
Frame around mark
(p. 300)

Mark frame
type
Mark frame
color

Part mark leader

line (p. 301)

Leader line
type

338

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

Placing

Location of marks.

Marks (p. 239)

Available
elements

Elements you can include in

marks.

Elements in
mark

Elements included in marks.

Surface treatment
mark elements (p.
297)

Frame around
elements

Frame type and color.

Content (p. 298)

Mark font

Defines font type, color, and

height in marks.

Usage

1.
2.

Select the options to use.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties in the current Surface Treatment Mark
Properties dialog box. To change the mark properties in selected drawing(s), click
Modify.

See also

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Surface treatment properties (p. 288)

Properties modification
Modifying some of the drawing properties can lead to the recreation of the drawing.
When you modify the following drawing properties, the drawing might be recreated.
In view properties:

Front view
Top view
Back view
Bottom view
Section views
End views
3D view
View extension for neighbor parts
Coordinate system
Around X
Around Y
Around Z
Undeformed
Show opening/recess symbol

In section view properties:

Section depth
Distance for combining cuts
Left section
Middle section
Right section

In dimension properties:

Straight
In X direction
Knock off dimension type

In dimensioning properties:

All dimensioning properties

In part properties:

Part representation drop down list

In neighbor part properties:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

339

Neighbor parts
Main/Secondary parts
Skew parts
Part representation drop down list

In surface treatment properties:

Visibility
Representation
Show pattern

In protection properties:

340

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Drawing Properties

All protection properties

Editing Drawings

In this chapter

This chapter explains how to edit drawings and their graphical objects in Tekla Structures. It
also covers how to create and edit additional drawing objects (i.e. lines, text, symbols, and
marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.

Assumed
background

You should also be familiar with the following chapters:

Contents

Introduction to Drawings (p. 21)

Getting Started with Drawings (p. 41)
Dimensioning (p. 131)
Drawing Properties (p. 235)

This chapter is divided into the following sections:

Additional drawing objects (p. 341)

Additional marks (p. 350)
Symbols in drawings (p. 351)
Adding text and links to drawings (p. 353)
DWG and DXF files in drawings (p. 362)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Working with drawing views (p. 378)
Editing drawings reference (p. 383)

6.1 Additional drawing objects

In Tekla Structures, we use the term drawing object to refer to:

Lines
Arcs
Circles
Polylines
Polygons

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

341

Rectangles
Clouds
Symbols
Text
Associative notes
Cover-up objects
DWG/DXF files
Marks
Dimensions
Reference models

In addition to the automatic dimensions and marks Tekla Structures creates, you can include
additional objects in Tekla Structures drawings. These are typically used for temporary,
revision-related, or other similar types of information.
Basic drawing
objects

This section describes the basic types of additional objects you can create in Tekla Structures
drawings.
To create objects in drawings, use the icons on the Drawing Objects toolbar, or select a
command from the Dimensioning, Annotating or Shapes menu. The following table lists the
commands you use to create drawing objects, and gives a short description of each one.

Command

342

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Icon

Description

Draw Line

Creates a line between two picked

points.

Draw Rectangle

Creates a rectangle according to two

picked points.

Draw Arc > By

Endpoints and Center

Creates a circular arc according to the

picked end points and center point.

Draw Arc > By Three

Points

Creates a circular arc according to three

picked points.

Draw Circle > By Center

and Radius

Creates a circle according to the picked

center point.

Draw Circle > By Three

Points

Creates a circle according to three

picked points.

Draw Polyline

Creates a polyline that traverses the

picked points. You cannot use this
command to create closed polygons,
use the Polygon command instead.

Draw Polygon

Creates a polygon according to the

picked points.

Draw Cloud

Creates a cloud according to the picked

points.

Draw Cover-up Area

Draws a reactangular cover-up area

that covers the underlying part outlines.

Draw Cover-up Line

Draws a cover-up line that covers the

underlying part outlines.

See also

Draw Line (p. 384)

Draw Rectangle (p. 384)
Draw Arc > By Endpoints and Center (p. 386)
Draw Arc > By Three Points (p. 387)
Draw Circle > By Center and Radius (p. 385)
Draw Circle > By Three Points (p. 386)
Draw Cloud (p. 389)
Draw Polygon (p. 389)
Draw Polyline (p. 388)
Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Special color (p. 349)
Symbols in drawings (p. 351)
Adding text and links to drawings (p. 353)
Using cover-up tools (p. 374)
DWG and DXF files in drawings (p. 362)
Additional marks (p. 350)
Manual dimensioning (p. 133)
Displaying reference models in drawings (p. 369)

Common drawing object properties

Each additional drawing object has properties that define its appearance. The options you have
vary depending on the object type. This section describes the object properties that are common
to many types of additional objects. Some objects may not have all the options listed below.

Line properties
The following are the properties of lines Tekla Structures uses to draw objects (such as lines,
rectangles, arcs, circles, polylines, and polygons):

Property

Options

Additional information

Line type

The weld symbols have the following

line types:

Line color

See Color (p. 347).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

343

Property

Options

Additional information

Bulge

Values from 0 to 1

The bulge factor defines the curvature

of the curved segments of objects
using the calculation:
Arc height = Line length * Bulge
factor
Changing the bulge factor of a
polyline or polygon modifies all the
segments of that object. To modify an
individual segment, use handles. See
Dragging, reshaping, and resizing
drawing objects (p. 375).
See Arrow properties (p. 345).

Arrow
Customized line
types

You can define own line types, and use them wherever line type settings are available. The
customized line types are handled the same way as other line types. The customized line types
are defined in line type file format (.lin). To customize line types, open
TeklaStuctures.lin file in ..\environments\common\inp. By default, the most
widely used line types are available in the file.
TeklaStructures.lin.id file contains the names of the line types visible in the user
interface and the unique IDs assigned for each line type. The value of the ID must be greater
than 10, for example:
CENTER, 1000
BORDER, 1002
DASHDOT, 1003

You can use TeklaStructures.lin also for mapping the exported line types.

User-defined line types can not be mapped to other (user-defined) line

types in DWG export.
Default line types can be mapped to user-defined line types. For more
information on line type mapping, see Defining your own line type
mappings.
To define your own line types in TeklaStuctures.lin file:
1.

Start every line with the letter A to indicate the beginning of the line type pattern.
You can use three different objects: dashes, dots and spaces to form a line. The length of
lines and spaces is defined by numbers.

2.
3.
4.

Define the length of a dash (-) using positive numbers.

Define the length of a a space ( ) using negative numbers.
Define dots (.) using number zero (0).
The patterns must begin with a dash and typically they end with a space, although the
space in the end is not required.

5.
Example

344

After you have defined the line type pattern, press Enter.

Line type definition for DASHDOT: A, 12.7, -6.35, 0, -6.35 means that the pattern
starts with a dash with the length of 12.7 units, then comes a space with the length of 6.35
units, then a dot, and then again a space with the length of 6.35 units. Then the first dash is
drawn again.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

If you add new customized line types, you need to add corresponding
bitmaps to ..\Tekla Structures\*version*\nt\bitmaps
folder, and name them dr_line_type_xxx.bmp, for example
dr_line_type_CENTER.bmp.

Arrow properties
The following are the properties Tekla Structures uses to draw arrows:

Property

Options

Additional information

Arrow position

Arrow type

Arrow height

Arrow height and width define the

size of the arrowhead.

Arrow width

Leader line
You can use leader lines in text, symbols, associative notes and marks to make it clearer to
which item the text, symbol, note, or mark is related to. You have the following options for
leader lines:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

345

Drawing object

Leader line
types

Text

Symbols

Level marks

Revision marks

Part marks

Associative note

Modifying the
leaderline

You can modify the shape of the leader line by first dragging from the middle point of the line,
and then dragging further from the created anchor points and new middle points.

For more information on leader lines in part marks, see Mark location (p. 301).

346

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Color
You can specify the color of objects, frames, and fill (see also Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)). The
colors define the line weight when you print monocolor drawings.
You have the following color options:

Special

light gray

152

black

153

red

160

bright green

161

blue

162

turquoise

163

yellow

164

magenta

165

brown

154

green

155

dark blue

156

forest green

157

orange

158

gray

159

For more information,

see Special color (p.
349)

Font
Tekla Structures uses standard Windows fonts. You can use the Select... button to select the
font and style from the list. The value in the Height field defines the text height in drawings.

Fill/Hatch type
You can fill closed drawing objects (such as rectangles, circles, and polygons) with a pattern,
and color the fill. See also Color (p. 347). You have the following fill options:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

347

To scale and rotate patterns, see Modifying fill/hatch types (p. 358).
To have Tekla Structures show different materials in section views using hatches, see
Hatching in drawings (p. 358).

Frame type
You can create a frame around marks, symbols, text, and dimensions. You have the following
frame types to choose from:

Radius
You can specify the radius of arcs and circles.

Place
To define how you want Tekla Structures to place additional drawing objects, click Place....
Tekla Structures opens the placing dialog box for that object.

348

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

You have the following options to place drawing objects:

free

Tekla Structures searches for an empty location to place the object.

fixed

Pick a position in the drawing to place the object.

Enter a value in the Search margin field to define the limits of the area you want Tekla
Structures to search for empty space.
Enter a value in the Minimal distance field to indicate the minimum distance the object should
be from the relevant part.
Use the Quarter checkboxes to further define the area Tekla Structures should search for empty
space. Tekla Structures divides the search area into quarters and searches only those quarters
you select.

Special color
You can define a special color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be
printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The special color is
defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values on a scale of 0 to 255.
Defining

To define a special color:

1.
2.

Click Tools > Options > Advanced options... to open the Advanced Options dialog
box. Go to Hatching category.
Define the color using the following variables:
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R to 214
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G to 214
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B to 214
The default value is black (0,0,0).
The smaller the values are, the darker the shade.

3.
Usage

Click Apply and OK.

To use the special color:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the drawing.

Open the drawing object properties dialog box (rectangle, polygon, or circle).
Select the Special fill color.
The hatch is printed in color or gray scale, according to the printer settings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

349

In print the gray shade is darker.

You can also use the special color in hatches of section views. For more information, see
Hatching in drawings (p. 358).

6.2 Additional marks

You can include additional marks in Tekla Structures drawings. These are typically used for
temporary, revision-related, or other similar types of information.
You can create the following additional marks in Tekla Structures drawings:

Part marks
Bolt marks
Connection marks
Level marks
Revision marks
Weld marks.

To create additional marks in drawings, use the icons on the Drawing Objects toolbar, or select
a command from the Annotating menu. The following table lists the commands you use to
create additional marks and gives a short description of each one.

350

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Command

See also

Icon

Description

Add Part Marks (p.

393)

Creates marks for all parts, bolts, and

connections, or selected parts, bolts,
and connections.

Add Level Mark (p.

394)

Creates a level mark (an elevation

dimension).

Add Revision Mark (p.

396)

Creates a revision mark.

Add Weld Mark (p. 394)

Creates a weld mark.

Marks in drawings (p. 291)

Weld marks in drawings (p. 312)
Level marks in drawings (p. 315)

6.3 Symbols in drawings

You can add symbols created with the Symbol Editor to drawings. Tekla Structures adds the
symbol using the properties in the Symbol properties dialog box. The filename extension of a
saved symbol properties file is sbl.
There are three different styles of symbol you can add to drawings:

Symbol
Symbol with leader line
Symbol along a line

For instructions on creating symbols, see the Symbol Editor Users Guide. .
For information on section and weld marks, see Section view label and mark (p. 262) and
Weld marks in drawings (p. 312)
Topics

Adding symbols in drawings (p. 351)

Symbol types (p. 352)
Symbol properties (p. 352)

Adding symbols in drawings

To add a symbol in a drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Open the drawing.

Hold down Shift and select Annotating > Add Symbol > Symbol to display the Symbol
Properties dialog box.
Select the symbol and modify the symbol properties as required. See Symbol properties
(p. 352) and Symbol types (p. 352).
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Symbol Properties dialog box.
Pick one to three points in the drawing to place the symbol. The symbol style you choose
affects the number of points to pick.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

351

6.

Continue picking to add the same symbol elsewhere in the drawing or interrupt by pressing

Esc.

Symbol types
You can use the following ways of adding a symbol in a drawing:

Symbol style

Icon

Description
Creates the symbol with the center at
the point you pick in the drawing,
without a leader line.

Symbol

Tekla Structures uses all the properties

in the Symbol Properties dialog box
except for the placing properties.
Symbol with leader line

Creates the symbol outside the part,

with a leader line pointing to the point
you pick. Pick the starting point of the
leader line, and a point to insert the
symbol.
Tekla Structures uses all the properties
in the Symbol Properties dialog box.
Creates the symbol along the line you
define by picking two points. Then pick
an insertion point for the symbol.

Symbol along line

The symbol will not have a leader line,

even if you define one in the Symbol
Properties dialog box.
See also

Symbols in drawings (p. 351)

Section view label and mark (p. 262)
Weld marks in drawings (p. 312)

Symbol properties
Click Annotating > Properties > Symbol to display the Symbol Properties dialog box.
In addition to the common object properties (see Common drawing object properties (p.
343)), you can modify the following symbol properties:

352

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Property

Description

File

Enter the filename of the set of symbols you want

to use. To find the name of a symbol file, browse
the folder /environments/common/
symbols/.

Number

Click Select to browse the available symbols, or

enter the number of the symbol to use. Single-click
a symbol in the Symbols dialog box to use it.

Height

Enter the height of the symbol.

Modifying
properties

Property

Description

Color

Select a color for the symbol.

Angle

Enter the angle of the symbol.

Place...

How Tekla Structures places additional drawing

objects. See Place (p. 348).

To modify the symbol properties, double-click an symbol to modify its properties.

6.4 Adding text and links to drawings

This section describes the types of text you can add to drawings. You can add several styles of
text to Tekla Structures drawings:

One or more lines

Paragraphs
Text files
Associative notes
Hyperlinks
Links between drawings.

To add text to drawings, use the icons on the Drawing Objects toolbar, or select a command
from the Annotating menu. The following table lists the commands you use to add text and
gives a short description of each one.

Command

Icon

Description

Add Text > Text (p. 390)

Creates single or multiple lines of text.

Add Text > Text along

Line (p. 392)

Creates text along a line you specify.

Add Text > Text with

Leader Line (p. 391)

Creates a line of text with a leader line

to a point you specify in the drawing.

Add Text > Along Line,

Arrow at End Point (p.
392)

Creates a single line of text with a

visible line which has an arrow at the
second point picked (or end point).

Add Text > Along Line,

Arrow at Start Point (p.
393)

Creates a single line of text with a

visible line which has an arrow at the
first point picked (or starting point).

Add Text > From Text

File...

Adds a text file to the drawing. See

Adding text files (p. 355)

Add Associative Note >

With Leader Line

Creates associative note with leader

line. See Associative notes in
drawings (p. 357).

Add Associative Note >

Without Leader Line

Creates associative note without leader

line. See also Associative notes in
drawings (p. 357).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

353

Command

Icon

Description

Add Associative Note >

Along Line

Creates associative note along line. See

also Associative notes in drawings (p.
357).

Add Link > Hyperlink...

Inserts a hyperlink into the drawing.

See Adding hyperlinks (p. 356).

Add Link > To Other

Drawing

Creates a link to another drawing. See

Adding links between drawings (p.
356).

See Common drawing object properties (p. 343) for more information on additional object
properties.
Adding links between drawings (p. 356)
Topics

Text files in drawings (p. 354)

Links in drawings (p. 355)
Scaling text files and links (p. 356)
Associative notes in drawings (p. 357)

Text files in drawings

You can insert a text file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the text file using
the properties in the Text File Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved
properties file is fas.

In addition to the common object properties (see Common drawing object properties (p.
343)), you can modify the scale Tekla Structures uses when adding text files. See Scaling text
files and links (p. 356).

The Add Text > From Text File command creates a link to the text file.
If you change the text in the file, it will change in all drawings using that
text file.

354

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Adding text files

To add a text file to a drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the drawing.

Click Annotating > Add Text > From Text File... to display the Text File Properties
dialog box.
Click Browse... and locate the text file you want to use.
Click OK to close the Browse... dialog box.
Modify the other text file properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and close the Text File Properties dialog box.
Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the text file frame. The
scaling type you choose affects the number of points to pick. See Scaling text files and
links (p. 356).

Editing text files

To edit a text file, double-click the text inside the frame. Tekla Structures will open the original
text file.
To modify the text file properties, double-click the frame around the text.

Links in drawings
You can place active links to files, Internet addresses, or Tekla Structures drawings within a
frame in a drawing.
Tekla Structures creates hyperlinks using the properties in the Hyperlink Properties dialog
box. The filename extension of a saved hyperlink properties file is fhl.
Tekla Structures creates links to drawings using the properties in the Drawing Link Properties
dialog box. The filename extension of a saved drawing link properties file is ldr.
In addition to the common object properties (see Common drawing object properties (p.
343)), you can modify the following link properties:

Property

Action

Description

File

Active link to a
file.

Click Browse... to find the file, or

enter a filepath and name, for
example,
E:\models\new\report.txt.

URL

Active link to an
Internet address.

Specifies the Internet address for the

link.

Drawing

Active link to
another Tekla
Structures
drawing.

Select the drawing from the list box.

The drawings in the list box are the
drawings in the models drawing list.

Link text

The text Tekla

Structures
displays in the
drawing.

Use this to have Tekla Structures

show text other than the link or
drawing name in the drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

355

Click the link text in the drawing to jump to the file or Internet address.
Double-click the link text to open the linked drawing.

Adding hyperlinks
To insert a hyperlink into a drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the drawing.

Select Annotating > Add Link > Hyperlink... to display the Hyperlink Properties dialog
box.
Modify the text style, frame, and scaling as required.
In the File or URL text box, enter an Internet address or filename and path. If you need to
locate the file, click Browse.... Tekla Structures inserts an active hyperlink to the location
you specify.
In the Text field, enter the text you want Tekla Structures to display for the hyperlink.
Click OK to save the properties and close the Hyperlink Properties dialog box.
Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the hyperlink frame. The
scaling type you choose affects the number of points to pick. See Scaling text files and
links (p. 356).

Adding links between drawings

To link two drawings of a model:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Open the drawing to link from.

Click Annotating > Add Link > To Other Drawing... to display the Drawing Link
Properties dialog box.
Modify the text style, frame, and scaling as required.
In the Drawing list box, select the drawing to link to.
In the Text field, enter the text you want Tekla Structures to display for the link.
Click OK to save the properties and close the Drawing Link Properties dialog box.
Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the link frame. The number
of points you have to pick depends on the scaling type you use. See Scaling text files and
links (p. 356).

Modifying link properties

To modify the properties of an existing link, double-click the frame around the link.

Scaling text files and links

To scale text files and links in drawings, double-click the frame around an existing object, or
use the appropriate command to open the properties dialog box. You have the following
options in the Scaling: Type list box:

No scaling

When you define the frame around the object, you only need pick the upper left corner of
it. Tekla Structures inserts the object in its original size.

Scale to fit

When you define the object frame, you pick two points to define it. Tekla Structures
adjusts the object size to fit the frame.

356

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Associative notes in drawings

You can use associative notes as extra marks in a drawing. Use notes like, for example, part
marks. The associative note is updated according to the changes made to the object it is added
to.

Command

Icon

Associative note with leader

line
Associative note without
leader line.
Associative note along line.

Associative notes can be added to objects such as:

Part
Bolt
Reinforcing bar
Surface treatment
Edge chamfers

You can add multiple notes to one object, and place the notes anywhere. Add and modify the
content of the notes as you do for part marks.
Elements

Associative notes can contain the following elements:

Element

Description

Text

Opens a dialog box where you can enter text.

User-defined attribute
Template

Adds in the mark a custom graphical template

created with Template Editor.

Symbol
<--'

Adds a line feed between the desired elements to

create multi-row note.

<--

Removes the default space between elements. The

default space between the elements depends on the
text height and can be changed with the variable
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.

Part elements

Part properties, such as Profile, Class, Length,

Camber, Fittings (NS/FS).

Bolt elements

Bolt properties, such as Standard, Assembly type,

Slot length, Slot height.

Reinforcing bar
elements

Reinforcing bar properties, such as Grade, Position,

Shape, cc min.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

357

Adding
associative notes

Element

Description

Surface treatment
elements

Surface treatment properties: Name, Material,

Class, Code, and Surface treatment name.

Chamfer elements

Chamfer properties: Name, Length, DX, and DY.

To add an associative note to an object:

1.

2.

Click Annotating > Add Associative Note and select the note type:

With Leader Line

Without Leader Line

Select the object.

For the With Leader Line option, pick the first point of the leader line. Pick the
position of note.

For the Along Line

option, pick a point to indicate the start of the line
along which you want to run the note, and then pick the end point of the line.

For edge chamfers and other hard-to-see items, it is easier to use the popup menu command Add Associative Note, as you do not have to select
the object again after selecting the command from the pop-up.

See also

Adding templates in marks (p. 298)

6.5 Hatching in drawings

You can use automatic hatching in drawings to show different materials.
Topics

Modifying fill/hatch types (p. 358)

Schema files (p. 360)
Editing hatching properties (p. 362)

Modifying fill/hatch types

Hatching on part
faces and
sections

Use hatching on part faces, sections or additional drawing objects, such as circles and
polygons, to show different materials. You can define the hatching properties for drawing, view
and part level. Use the Fill tab on the Part Properties dialog box to modify hatch and fill types.
You can define the type of the hatch pattern, define its color, and set a background color for the
hatch. You can set the background color only if you have first selected a hatch pattern. You
cannot set the background color for hardware hatches.

Automatic or
custom scaling
and rotation

You can select between automatic scaling and rotation for hatches or custom scaling and
rotation for hatches. If you select automatic scaling and rotation, Tekla Structures
automatically scales the hatch pattern to suit the profile size, and you do not need to edit each
drawing manually.
If you select custom scaling and rotation, use the Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y options for defining the scales in x and y direction.

358

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

To rotate a fill type, enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal
and 90.0 for vertical.

With the hatch schema files (.htc files), you can select the hatch patterns as well as automatic
scaling and rotation for certain materials.
For more information, see Schema files (p. 360).
Insulation

Automatic scaling and rotation for hatches can be applied, for example, to such material as
insulation. With automatic scaling and rotation you can also modify the thickness of insulation.
You can use the following fill types to represent insulation:

Hatch name

Pattern

HARD_INS1

SOFT_INS

SOFT_INS2

Previewing
patterns

To preview the scaled and rotated patterns, click the Select... button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

359

Changing
location

Use the x and y offset properties to change the location of a hatch. These properties are
available only in Rectangle properties and Polygon properties dialog boxes.

Schema files
You can define the hatch patterns for material types and names in a hatch schema file (in a
.htc file). Different drawing types (GA, assembly, single-part, cast-unit) have their own
schema files.
To indicate the name of the schema file which Tekla Structures uses for each drawing type, use
the following variables in the List of variables dialog box:

set XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA=general.htc
set XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA=assembly.htc
set XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA=single.htc
set XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA=cast_unit.htc

The default schema files are located in the

..environments\*your_environment*\system folder.
The syntax of the schema file is:
Material type, Material name, Hatch name, Scale, Color, Automatic
scaling and rotation

Example .htc file:

360

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Hatch name

To view a list of available hatch patterns:

1.
2.

Open the object properties dialog box for any object that has a fill type. For example,
double-click the Circle icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar to open the Circle
properties dialog box.
Click Select... to open the list of hatch patterns. Click a pattern to view its name in the
Type list box. You can use this name as a hatch pattern in the schema file. For more
information, see Fill/Hatch type (p. 347).

Scale

Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses to scale hatches.

Color

Hatch color also defines line width for the printer. If you do not define a color for a hatch in the
schema file, Tekla Structures uses the default color BLACK (0). To use the special color that is
printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings, set the color number in
the .htc file to 120. For more information, see Special color (p. 349).

Automatic
scaling and
rotation

Automatic scaling and rotation defines whether you want to take automatic scaling and
rotation into use.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

361

No hatching

If you do not want to use any hatch pattern for a material, leave the hatch name field blank in
the schema file.

When you edit a schema file, you must restart Tekla Structures to apply
the changes.

Editing hatching properties

You can edit the type, color, scale, angle and size of automatically created hatches in the
Drawing Part Properties dialog box by using the options on the Fill tab. You can modify the
properties of multiple hatches at once.
To edit the properties:
1.
2.

Double-click the drawing part in the section view to display the Drawing Part Properties
dialog box.
On the Fill tab, define the type for the hatch by selecting the appropriate option in the Type
list box. You can preview and select the options also by clicking Select.
The default hatch type is used when you select Automatic. The default hatch type is the
one defined in the hatch schema file.
For more information on the other options on the Fill tab, see Modifying fill/hatch types
(p. 358).

3.

Modify the other properties if needed and click Apply or OK.

6.6 DWG and DXF files in drawings

You can insert a DWG or DXF file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the
DWG or DXF file using the properties in the DWG/DXF Properties dialog box. The filename
extension of a saved DWG/DXF properties file is fdg.

The DWG/DXF command creates a link to the desired DWG or DXF file.
When you modify the file, Tekla Structures also modifies all linked
drawings.

Topics

Adding DWG or DXF files to drawings (p. 362)

DWG/DXF file properties (p. 363)

Adding DWG or DXF files to drawings

To insert a DWG or DXF file into a drawing:
1.
2.
3.
4.

362

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Open the drawing.

Click View > Add DWG / DXF File... to display the DWG/DXF Properties dialog box.
Click Browse... and locate the DWG or DXF file you want to use.
Click OK to close the Browse dialog box.

5.
6.

Set the properties. See DWG/DXF file properties (p. 363).

Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates the DWG or DXF drawing inside a frame in the drawing. Pick one
or two points in the drawing to place the frame. The scaling type you choose affects the
number of points to pick. See DWG/DXF file properties (p. 363)

DWG/DXF file properties

To set the DWG/DXF file properties, click View > Add DWG / DXF File... to open the DWG/

DXF Properties dialog box.

In addition to the common object properties (see Common drawing object properties (p.
343)), you can modify the following properties when adding a DWG or DXF file to a drawing:

Property

Description

Scaling type

Options:
X: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert

the file. You can only set the drawing scale in the x
direction.

XY: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert

the file. You can set the drawing scale in both x and
y directions.

Scale to fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right

corners of the frame to size and create the frame.

Tekla Structures scales the file to fit the frame.

Best fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right

corners of the frame to size and create the frame.

Tekla Structures scales the file to fit, maintaining
its original aspect ratio.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

363

Modifying
properties

Property

Description

Scale in X

Check this to scale the file in the x direction. Enter

a coefficient to indicate the scale, e.g. 1.0 for
100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type must be
set to X or XY.

Scale in Y

Check this to scale the file in the y direction. Enter

a coefficient to indicate the scale, e.g. 1.0 for
100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The scaling type must be
set to XY.

To modify the DWG/DXF properties, double-click an existing DWG/DXF frame.

6.7 Edge chamfers in drawings

You can show edge chamfers in drawings, and control the way they are shown by modifying
the part properties and the edge chamfer properties. You can also add chamfer marks as
associative notes.
Displaying edge chamfers (p. 364)
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually (p. 367)
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (p. 368)
Creating chamfer marks as associative notes (p. 368)

Displaying edge chamfers

You can modify the way the edge chamfers are displayed through part properties and edge
chamfer properties. If so specified in the part properties, edge chamfering removes material
from the part and the drawings show the chamfered edges. The part properties can be modified
on drawing, view, and object level, and the edge chamfer properties on object level only.
Before you start modifying the way that the edge chamfers are displayed, first create edge
chamfers in you model and create a drawing. Open the drawing in the Drawing Editor.

364

1.

Depending on the level where you want to make the changes (drawing, view, or object),
go to the Drawing Properties or View Properties dialog box and click Part or doubleclick the part in the drawing to display the Part Properties dialog box.

2.

Select Edge chamfers on in Additional marks.

3.

Select Outline or Exact in Part representation list depending on the desired result, see
section Examples below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Exact

Outline

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the drawing, double-click the edge chamfer.

6.

Select desired line color and line type. Background color is often used
color.

7.

Click Modify.

as line

If you know that you are going to use the same part representation
settings for several drawings, modify the drawing part properties in the
Model Editor and save your settings in a properties file for later use.

Example

See below for typical examples of the ways to show edge chamfers.
In this example, Part representation is Exact and Edge chamfers are on. Background color
is used in edge chamfer lines, because you usually do not want to show edge chamfers in
printouts, but may want to see and select them in the drawing, for example, to add associative
notes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

365

In this second example, Part representation is Outline and Edge chamfers are on.
Background color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you may want to see and select
chamfers in the drawing, for example, to add associative notes.This representation is often used
when the scale is small and you do not need to see the small chamfers clearly. The edge
chamfer presented in the bottom right corner of the image shows how the edge chamfer looks
like when it is selected.

366

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually

You can manually modify the line type and color of the edge chamfers in drawings. This
overrides the default color and type defined in the Options dialog box.
1.

In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer to display the Edge Chamfer Properties
dialog box.

2.

Select the desired color and line type.

Background color
is often used for edge chamfer lines for the reason that you
may not want to print edge chamfers, or see them in small scale drawings, but you want
to be able select them, for example, to add chamfer marks.

Example

The following examples show how the edge chamfers are displayed with different part
representation settings:
Part representation Exact.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

367

Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer not selected.

Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer selected.

See also

Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (p. 368)

Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers

You can define a default color and line type for edge chamfers.
1.

In the Model Editor, go to Tools > Options > Options and select Drawing objects.

2.

Define the default line color.

3.

Define the default line type.

4.

Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

You can override the default settings manually in the Drawing Editor by
changing the edge chamfer line color and type in the Edge Chamfer
Properties dialog box.

See also

Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually (p. 367)

Creating chamfer marks as associative notes

You can create chamfer marks in edge chamfers by adding associative notes.
To add the chamfer mark:

368

1.

Modify the part properties and edge chamfer properties so that you can easily select
edge chamfers.

2.

Add the elements that you want to have in the chamfer mark in the Associative Note
properties dialog box.

3.

Select the edge chamfer.

4.

Right-click and select Add Associative Note from the pop-up menu.

5.

Pick the origin for the note. This is the start point of the leader line.

6.

Pick a position for the note.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

See also

Associative notes in drawings (p. 357)

Displaying edge chamfers (p. 364)

6.8 Displaying reference models in drawings

You can include reference models in general arrangement drawings. For example, you could
use 3D plant models or architectural drawings as reference models.
Drawing level

To show or hide reference models in drawings, and change their appearance:

1.
2.

Open the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box by double-clicking the
drawing.
Click the Reference objects... button. Tekla Structures opens the General - Reference
Object Properties dialog box. The Contents tab lists all the reference models included in
the model:
You can also control the visibility and appearance of the reference models in the
Reference Model List dialog box (Drawing File > Reference Model List) .

3.
4.
5.
Showing and
hiding hidden
lines

In the Visibility column, select Visible from the list box to show the selected reference
model in the drawing.
Go to the Appearance tab to select the line color and type for all visible reference models.
Click Apply or OK to save reference model properties.

You can choose whether to display or hide the hidden lines of reference models in drawings
using the variable XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES in Tools >
Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties. When you set the variable to TRUE,
reference model lines are never hidden by other objects. To hide hidden lines, enter FALSE.
To define further when the hidden lines are displayed, use the following variables:

XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODEL
S
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

369

You can choose the line type used to display the lines using the variable
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options > Drawing Properties.

Displaying the hidden lines might slow down the system when you use
large or many reference models in a drawing, especially if the variables
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES or
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MO
DELS have been set to TRUE.
View level

Use the View Properties and View Reference Object Properties dialog boxes to show and
hide reference models in individual drawing views, independently of the properties of the
drawing.
For more information on using reference models in Tekla Structures models, see Reference
models in the online help.

6.9 Working with drawing objects

This section explains how to use the user coordinate system and how to position, modify, copy,
and move drawing objects.
Topics

User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 370)

Defining the UCS (p. 371)
Numeric snap (p. 373)
Positioning drawing objects (p. 373)
Dragging, reshaping, and resizing drawing objects (p. 375)
Modifying fill/hatch types (p. 358)
Copying and moving drawing objects (p. 376)

User coordinate system (UCS)

The UCS is a local user coordinate system you can use in a drawing view. It makes it easier
to place graphical objects, because you place objects relative to a user-definable point of origin,
or base point in the drawing view.

To position an object using the global coordinate system, you need to

calculate the coordinates of the object from the point of origin of the
drawing.

Example

Place the UCS at the point where you want Tekla Structures to create one object. See Defining
the UCS (p. 371). The coordinates for this object are 0,0 on the UCS. Now you have a visible
reference point for the UCS. Place other objects relative to the first object.

UCS Symbol
Tekla Structures shows the UCS symbol in the current drawing view, when you create, copy,
move, or modify graphical objects.

370

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Defining the UCS

You can define a different point of origin for the UCS for each drawing view, and change the
UCS point of origin as often as you like. See also User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 370).
Example

This example shows several views, each with their own UCS.

You have two options when defining or re-defining a UCS:

UCS commands

Set the point of origin (0,0) for the UCS.

Set the point of origin (0,0) for the UCS and the direction of the x axis.

You can use the following UCS commands and shortcuts:

Command

Shortcut

Description

Set UCS origin

See Setting the UCS (p. 372).

Set UCS by two

points

Shift+U

See Setting the UCS (with x axis

direction) (p. 372).

Toggle orientation

Ctrl+T

Using the Toggle orientation

command you can switch between
two USCs having the same point of
origin:

the UCS following the axes of

the drawing view (1)

the oriented UCS you have

defined (2)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

371

Command

Shortcut

Description

Reset current

Ctrl+1

Resets the UCS to its original

position in the current view.

Reset all

Ctrl+0

Resets the UCS to its original

positions in all views.

Setting the UCS

You can set the UCS using the mouse, or by specifying a new origin point.
To set the point of origin of the UCS using the menu:
1.
2.
3.
Pop-up menu

Open a drawing.
Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Set Origin. Tekla Structures displays the
UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the center point.
Position the UCS symbol, and then click to set the point of origin of the UCS in the current
drawing.

To set the point of origin of the UCS using a pop-up menu:

1.
2.
3.

Open a drawing.
Right-click and select User Coordinate System (UCS) to access the UCS commands.
Tekla Structures displays the UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the center point.
Position the UCS symbol, and then click to set the point of origin of the UCS in the current
drawing.

Setting the UCS (with x axis direction)

To set the UCS using two points:
1.
2.
3.

Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Set by Two Points.
Pick the point of origin for the UCS.
Pick a point to indicate the x direction of the UCS.

Creating dimensions in the current coordinate system

If you pick the UCS points to define the current coordinate system in the drawing view, the
dimensioning commands Add Horizontal Dimension, Add Vertical Dimension and Add
Orthogonal Dimension follow the defined coordinate system. To create dimensions in
horizontal direction:
Usage

372

1.

Right-click in the drawing, select UCS > Set UCS by two points.

2.

Select Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension and pick two points. The resulting
dimension is the distance between the two picked points in the current UCS.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

When you use the Add Orthogonal Dimension command, it automatically finds out whether
the dimension line is in X or Y direction depending on which one is the closest.

Numeric snap
Use the Enter a numeric location toolbar to snap to exact locations by specifying their
coordinates.

Tekla Structures automatically displays the toolbar when you start typing coordinates from
keyboard.
For more information, see Snapping to positions.

Positioning drawing objects

Tekla Structures includes several tools to help you manually position drawing objects. You
may also find it useful to read the following:
Snap switches
User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 370)
Numeric snap (p. 373)

Using coordinates
Specify coordinates in the Enter a Numeric Location toolbar to place objects exactly.
To place an object using relative coordinates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Open a drawing.
Select the object to position.
Activate a command to position the object (e.g. click Edit > Move).
Pick a point from the object to specify the start point for moving.
Click Tools > Enter Numeric Location > Relative (or click shortcut R). Tekla Structures
displays the Enter a Numeric Location toolbar with relative coordinate symbol @.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

373

6.
7.

Then type in relative coordinates to x and y direction, for example @10, 20.
Click OK.

Arranging drawing objects

You can use the Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) command to position drawing objects.
Tekla Structures positions the objects using the drawing type protection properties and the
placing properties of each object type. Tekla Structures places the objects using the following
criteria:

Objects, which are located in a free location are not moved at all
If the objects overlap, they are moved as close to current location as possible.

To position selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap other objects:
1.

2.
3.

Open the properties dialog box for each object type, and then click Place... to set the
placing properties. See also Placing (p. 239) (for marks and welds) and Place (p. 205) (for
dimensions).
In the drawing, select the drawing objects you want to position.
Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Near Current Locations.

To position objects without checking the current location, click View > Arrange Drawing

Objects (Freeplace) > Ignore Current Locations.

Using cover-up tools

Use cover-up line and cover-up area tools for quickly hiding model object outlines in drawings:
1.

374

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Click Shapes > Draw Cover-up Area

or Draw Cover-up Line

2.

Draw a non-transparent rectangular area or line over the model object outline that you
want to hide. You can drag the cover-up objects to another location, and resize the
objects by dragging the handles.

Dragging, reshaping, and resizing drawing objects

Many graphical drawing objects (such as line, arc, circle, polyline, polygon, rectangle, cloud,
text file, hyperlink, DWG/DXF) have handles. You use these handles to drag, reshape, and
resize objects.
Click a drawing object to activate its handles. Drag individual handles to move, shape, and
resize the object. Tekla Structures indicates the drag direction with a line and pointer.
Example 1

To resize a rectangle, or the frame around text file, hyperlink, or DWG/DXF, drag the handles
as indicated below:

Increase width

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

375

Increase height
Increase width and height
Example 2

To change a line, drag the handles as indicated below:

Lengthen (left)
Change line to arc
Lengthen (right)
Example 3

To resize or move a circle, drag the handles as indicated below:

To move the circle, drag in any direction

Drag to increase diameter of circle
See also

Trim (p. 398)

Split (p. 399)
Divide (p. 400)

Copying and moving drawing objects

The following table lists the commands for copying and moving drawing objects.

376

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Pull-down
menu

Shortcut

Edit > Copy > Lin

ear

Ctrl + C

Edit > Move > Lin

ear

Ctrl + M

Pop-up menu
Right-click and select Copy >

Linear.

Right-click and select Move >

Linear.

To copy or move drawing objects:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the object(s) to copy or move.

Use one of the commands in the table above.
Pick a point to copy or move from.
Pick a point to copy or move to.

Use the UCS and Numeric snap toolbar to position objects exactly. See
also Positioning drawing objects (p. 373).

You also have Rotate and Mirror options for copying and moving graphic drawing objects,
dimensions, welds, and texts.

Drag and drop

Edit > Copy > Rotate... (p. 396)

Edit > Copy > Mirror... (p. 397)
Edit > Move > Rotate... (p. 397)
Edit > Move > Mirror... (p. 398)

You can also use drag-and-drop feature to copy and move objects.

To move objects, select the objects and drag them to the new position.
To copy objects, select the objects, hold down the Ctrl button, and drag the objects to the
new position.

You can copy and move drawing objects between drawing views that have different scales.

Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views

You can show and hide objects in drawings and drawing views. When you hide a part, its
related objects will be hidden also.

If a model object is hidden in drawing views it will not be printed.

When you hide drawing objects, check that the Tools > Options > Drawing Color Mode
selection and Ghost Outline selection indicates your desired result.

If Ghost Outline is selected, hidden objects appear in ghost outlines.

If Black and White is not selected, a white background with colored lines shows ghost
outlines of hidden objects.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

377

Hiding in drawing
views

To hide an object in a drawing view:

Hiding in the
entire drawing

If you want to hide or show an object in the drawing, follow the same instructions and select
Hide from Drawing or Show in Drawing from the pop-up menu. Selecting Hide from drawing
makes the drawing object hidden in all drawing views.

Showing hidden
objects

To show a hidden object in a drawing or drawing view:

1.
2.

1.
2.

Select the object you want to hide from a drawing view.

Right-click and select Hide/Show > Hide from Drawing View from the pop-up menu.

Select the hidden object.

Right-click and select Hide/Show > Show in Drawing View or Show in Drawing from
the pop-up menu.

The object visibility is rechecked every time you hide or show objects in
a drawing. This means that the object representation is always up to date.
For example, if you have a wall panel which is supported by a steel
frame, and you hide the wall panel, the previously hidden objects behind
the wall become automatically visible.
Hidden objects in
templates

You can define whether to list the hidden objects in templates. To do this:
1.
2.

Go to Drawing File > Drawing Properties... > Layout.

Select the appropriate option in the List hidden objects in templates list box.

6.10 Working with drawing views

This section explains how to change the size and location of the views in drawings, and how to
copy and link between drawings.
Topics

Placing drawing views (p. 379)

Aligning drawing views (p. 380)

378

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Moving drawing views (p. 380)

Rotating drawing views (p. 380)
Resizing drawing views (p. 381)
Copying and linking drawing views (p. 382)

Adding views to drawings

Before you create drawings, you can define which views Tekla Structures should create
automatically. See Defining which drawing views to create (p. 242) and Adding section
views to drawings (p. 259).
Once you have created drawings, you can still add views to them manually. You can create
drawing views of:

Views in the model. See View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View (p. 108).
Areas of the model. See View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model (p.
108).

Views in the same drawing. See View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in
Drawing View (p. 108).

Single parts in an assembly. See Single-part views in assembly drawings (p. 246).
Objects in 3D. See 3D views in cast-unit, assembly and single-part drawings (p. 383).
Section views. See View > Create Drawing View > Section View (p. 109).
Detail views. See View > Create Drawing View > Detail View (p. 110)
Curved section views. See View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View (p.
110)

You can also create new views of a part from another direction in single-part or assembly
drawings. See View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Part in Drawing View > Front,
Top, Back, Bottom, 3D (p. 109).
You can add views to drawings by copying and linking drawing views from other drawings.
See Copying and linking drawing views (p. 382). Additionally, you can add DWG and DXF
files inside a frame in a drawing, see DWG and DXF files in drawings.

To switch from a drawing to a model view, use the list at the end of the
Drawing Editor Window menu.

Placing drawing views

You can fit the drawing views so that they include all the connected objects, and arrange all the
drawing views using the current properties in the drawings layout properties dialog box.
To arrange views in a drawing, do one of the following:

Right-click in the drawing and select Arrange Drawing Views from the pop-up menu.
Click View > Arrange Drawing Views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

379

Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place field is set
to Free. Fixed views are not moved. See also Properties of individual

views (p. 244).

Arrange Drawing Views may change the drawing size if you have used

automatic scaling of drawing views. See Automatically scaled drawing

views (p. 123).

Aligning drawing views

You can have Tekla Structures align one or more drawing views with the main view, vertically
or horizontally.
Example

To align views vertically:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select a drawing view, then right-click to display the pop-up menu.

On the pop-up menu, select Align vertically.
Pick a point in the selected view.
Pick a point in another view.
Tekla Structures moves the views so that the picked points line up vertically.

Moving drawing views

To move a drawing view:
1.
2.

Select the blue border.

Drag the border.

View border
Dragging the handle resizes the view.

Rotating drawing views

You can rotate the views in drawings.
1.
2.
3.

380

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Select the view to rotate.

Click View > Rotate Drawing View....
Enter the angle in degrees.

4.

Click Rotate.

Resizing drawing views

Click View > Fit Drawing Views to resize drawing views so that there is no unnecessary space
in the views. You can resize the selected views, or all views.
You can also drag a drawing view corner or side with a mouse to a new location.
To resize the view:
1.
2.
3.

Select the blue border. Handles become visible.

Select a handle.
Drag the handle to a new location.

View border
Handle

Resizing drawing view boundaries

Drawing view boundaries (Extrema) define the drawing view size.
To resize drawing view boundaries:

Change the x min, x max, y min, and y max properties in the View properties dialog box
(click View... in the drawing properties dialog box).
OR

Select the view and drag the view plane, indicated by dashed lines, along the x and y axes
of the view:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

381

Select the view plane.

Drag the view plane to the left to resize the view.

You cannot use the drag technique to modify drawing view depth. You must modify the
depth+ and depth- properties in the View properties dialog box.

See more about drawing views in Drawing view properties (p. 241).
See also

Properties of individual views (p. 244)

Copying and linking drawing views

You can copy and link drawing views from other drawings. Use the commands in the table
below, and the drawing list to select drawings. For more information on the drawing list, see
Working with drawings (p. 90).
You can copy and link:

Drawings with or without their layouts.

Between any types of drawings.

Command

Description

View > Add Views from Other

Drawing > Copy

Copies the views from the selected

drawings as such to the open drawing.
Tekla Structures does not copy the
drawing layout. You cannot update the
changes in the original views to the
copied views.

View > Add Views from Other

Drawing > Link

Shows the views of the selected

drawings in the open drawing. Tekla
Structures does not copy the drawing
layout. Tekla Structures shows the
changes of the original views also in the
linked views.

View > Add Views from Other

Drawing > Copy with Layout

Copies the views and layout from the

selected drawings as such to the open
drawing. You cannot update the changes
in the original views to the copied views.

View > Add Views from Other

Drawing > Link with Layout

Shows the views and layout of the

selected drawings in the open drawing.
Tekla Structures shows the changes in
the original views also in the linked
views.

Copied drawing views do not update when the original views change.
Linked drawing views update.

382

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

3D views in cast-unit, assembly and single-part drawings

You can create 3D views in cast-unit, assembly and single part drawings. It is possible to create
3D views interactively also after the drawing has been created.
Including a 3D
view before
creating a
drawing

To include a 3D view before creating a drawing:

1.

2.
3.
4.

In the Model Editor, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part
Drawing..., Assembly Drawing... or Cast Unit drawing... depending on which type of

drawing you want to create.

In the drawing properties dialog box, click the View button.
In the 3D view list box, select On.
To define the 3D view properties, select one of the options in 3D view attributes. There
are ready-made properties for assembly, cast-unit and single part drawings, which you can
use when creating the corresponding drawing. The automatically created 3D views have
the same filtering type as the other drawing views.
The Current attributes option creates the 3D view based on the values you last entered in
the Rotation around (in 3D views) fields in the View properties dialog box.

Creating a 3D
view in drawing

To create a 3D view in an existing drawing, click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected
Part in Drawing View > 3D View.

Setting or
modifying the
view angles

You can set or modify the view angles with the options in the View properties dialog box of
the drawing. The angle settings apply only for the 3D view. To set or modify the view angles:
1.
2.
3.

Select the drawing, whose view angles you wish to set or modify.
Right-click and select Properties... from the pop-up menu.
Type in the values for the angles in y and x directions in the Rotation around (in 3D
views) fields. Rotation in a drawing view is around local axis (rotation values 0.0 and 0.0
equal Front view).

Placing drawing views after updating or cloning a drawing

When you update or clone a drawing, the views are automatically placed so that the relative
positions of the views are maintained when possible and the view layout that you have defined
is not lost. To accomplish this:
Usage

1.

Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.

2.

Set the variable XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to TRUE.

3.

Use advanced drawing property XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING to

control how the view placing works.

6.11 Editing drawings reference

This section consists of the reference pages for the commands you use to edit drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

383

Draw Line
Synopsis

This command creates a line between two picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the line using the properties in the Line properties dialog box. The
filename extension of a saved line properties file is gln.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Line bulge

Line properties (p. 343)

Arrow position

Arrow properties (p. 345)

Arrow type
Arrow size
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Double-click the Draw line icon.

Enter or modify the line properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
Pick the starting point.
Pick the end point.

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Rectangle
Synopsis

This command creates a rectangle using two picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the rectangle using the properties in the Rectangle properties dialog
box. The filename extension of a saved rectangle properties file is grt.

384

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Line bulge

Line properties (p. 343)

Fill type

Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)

Fill color

Color (p. 347)

Field

More information

Fill angle

Modifying fill/hatch types (p.

358)

Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction x
Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction y

You can only use the Draw Rectangle command to create rectangles with horizontal and
vertical sides. If you want to rotate the rectangle, use the Edit > Move > Rotate command.
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Double-click the Draw rectangle icon.

Enter or modify the properties as required.
Click Apply or OK to make the modified properties the current rectangle properties.
Pick the first corner.
Pick the diagonally opposite corner.

See also

Draw Polygon (p. 389)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Circle > By Center and Radius

Synopsis

This command creates a circle using the center point and radius you specify in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the circle using the properties in the Circle Properties dialog box. The
filename extension of a saved circle properties file is gci.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Radius

Radius (p. 348)

Fill type

Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)

Fill color

Color (p. 347)

Fill angle

Modifying fill/hatch types (p.

358)

Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction x
Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction y
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.

Double-click the Draw circle icon.

Enter or modify the circle properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties to the current circle properties.
Pick the center point.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

385

5.
See also

Pick a point on the circle to specify the radius.

Draw Circle > By Three Points (p. 386)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Circle > By Three Points

Synopsis

This command creates a circle that traverses three picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the circle using the properties in the Circle Properties dialog box. The
filename extension of a saved circle properties file is gci.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Radius

Radius (p. 348)

Fill type

Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)

Fill color

Color (p. 347)

Fill angle

Modifying fill/hatch types (p.

358)

Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction x
Scale and
rotation of fill
in direction y
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Double-click the Draw circle icon to open Circle Properties dialog box.
Enter or modify the circle properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
Click Shapes > Draw Circle > By Three Points.
Pick the first point on circle.
Pick the second point on circle.
Pick the third point on circle.

See also

Draw Circle > By Center and Radius (p. 385)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Arc > By Endpoints and Center

Synopsis

This command creates a circular arc using two end points and a center point you specify in a
drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

386

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Description

Tekla Structures creates the arc using the properties in the Arc Properties dialog box. The
filename extension of a saved arc properties file is gar.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Radius

Radius (p. 348)

Arrow position

Arrow properties (p. 345)

Arrow type
Arrow size
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Double-click the Draw arc by 3 points icon to open the Arc Properties dialog box.
Enter or modify the arc properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
Click Shapes > Draw Arc > By Endpoints and Center.
Pick the starting point.
Pick the end point.
Pick the center point. It specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.

See also

Draw Arc > By Three Points (p. 387)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Arc > By Three Points

Synopsis

This command creates a circular arc that traverses three picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

You can specify an arc with three points, either clockwise or counter-clockwise. Tekla
Structures creates the arc using the properties in the Arc Properties dialog box. The filename
extension of a saved arc properties file is gar.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Radius

Radius (p. 348)

Arrow position

Arrow properties (p. 345)

Arrow type
Arrow size
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Double-click the Draw arc by 3 points icon.

Enter or modify the arc properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties to the current arc properties.
Pick the starting point.
Pick a point on the arc.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

387

6.
See also

Pick the end point.

Draw Arc > By Endpoints and Center (p. 386)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Polyline
Synopsis

This command creates a line with straight (or curved) segments in a drawing.

The Draw Polyline command does not create closed polylines.

Use the Draw Polygon (p. 389) command to create closed polylines.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the polyline using the properties in the Polyline Properties dialog
box. The filename extension of a saved polyline properties file is gpl.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Bulge for all lines

Line properties (p. 343)

Arrow position

Arrow properties (p. 345)

Arrow type
Arrow size
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Double-click the Draw polyline icon.

Enter or modify the polyline properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties to the current polyline properties.
Pick the points you want the line go through (13).
Pick the end point with the middle mouse button (4).
Interrupt the command.
Define the curved segments using the bulge factor in the Polyline Properties dialog box,
or by dragging handles.

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)

388

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Using commands (p. 28)

Draw Polygon
Synopsis

This command creates a polygon that has its corners at the picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the polygon using the properties in the Polygon Properties dialog
box. The filename extension of a saved polygon properties file is gpg.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

Bulge for all lines

Line properties (p. 343)

Fill type

Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)

Fill color

Color (p. 347)

Fill angle

Modifying fill/hatch types (p.

358)

Scale and
rotation of fill in
direction x
Scale and
rotation of fill in
direction y
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Double-click the Draw polygon icon.

Enter or modify the polygon properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties to the current polygon properties.
Pick the first corner point.
Pick the other corner points.
Pick the starting corner point again, or click the middle mouse button to close the polygon.

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28))

Draw Cloud
Synopsis

This command creates a cloud that traverses the picked points in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the cloud using the properties in the Polygon Properties dialog box,
and the points you specify. The filename extension of a saved polyline properties file is gpg.

Field

More information

Line type

Line properties (p. 343)

Line color

Color (p. 347)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

389

Field

More information

Bulge for all lines

Line properties (p. 343)

Fill type

Fill/Hatch type (p. 347)

Fill color

Color (p. 347)

Fill angle

Modifying fill/hatch types (p.

358)

Scale and
rotation of fill in
direction x
Scale and
rotation of fill in
direction y

1.
2.

Usage

Double-click the Draw cloud icon.

Enter or modify the polygon properties.

Enter a bulge factor for the lines.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Click Apply or OK to save the properties.

Pick the first corner point (1).
Pick the other corner points (24).
Pick the starting corner point again (1), or click the middle mouse button to close the
polygon.

Bulge for all lines = 0.5

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Text > Text

Synopsis

This command creates a single or multiple lines of text in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

390

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Description

Tekla Structures creates the text using the properties in the Text Properties dialog box. The
filename extension of a saved text properties file is txt.

Field

More information

Text

Enter the required text in the Text field.

Use the Enter key to move to the next
line:

Text with multiple lines can be

modified like any other text.

Text is left aligned by default.

Line spacing is defined
automatically by the font size.

Color

Color (p. 347)

Height

Font (p. 347)

Font
Angle

The angle of the line the text follows.

Alignment

Alignment options for multiple lines of

text.

Frame type

Frame type (p. 348)

Leader line

Leader line (p. 345)

Frame color

Color (p. 347)

Arrow type

Arrow properties (p. 345)

Arrow size
Place...

Place (p. 348)

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Double-click the Add text icon.

In the Text Properties dialog box, type your text in the Text field.
Modify the other text properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Text Properties dialog box.
Pick a point in the drawing to insert the line of text.
Continue picking to add the same line of text elsewhere in the drawing.

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Text > Text with Leader Line

Synopsis

This command creates a single or multiple lines of text with a leader line to a point you specify
in the drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the text at the end of the leader line. The leader line appears in the
drawing.

Usage

1.
2.
3.

Double-click the Add text with leader line icon.

In Text Properties dialog box, enter your text in the Text field.
Modify the other text properties as required.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

391

4.
5.
6.
7.
See also

Click OK to save the properties and exit the Text Properties dialog box.
In the drawing, pick the starting point for the leader line.
Pick the end point for the leader line. Tekla Structures creates the text at the end point of
the leader line.
Repeat steps 56 to add the same text elsewhere in the drawing.

Add Text > Text (p. 390)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Text > Text along Line

Synopsis

This command creates a single or multiple lines of text along a line you specify in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates a single line of text along a line that you define by picking two points
in the drawing. The line itself does not appear in the drawing. Tekla Structures creates the text
to the right of the insertion point, above the line you defined.

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

See also

Add Text > Text (p. 390)

Double-click the Add text along line icon.

In the Text Properties dialog box, enter your text in the Text field.
Modify the other text properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Text Properties dialog box.
In the drawing, pick the start of the line along which you want the text to appear.
Pick the end point of the line along which you want the text to appear.
Pick a point above the line to indicate the insertion point for the text.
Repeat steps 57 to add the same text elsewhere in the drawing.

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Text > Along Line, Arrow at End Point

Synopsis

This command creates a single or multiple lines of text with a visible line which has an arrow at
the second point picked (or end point).

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures orientates the text according to the starting and end points you pick.

Usage

1.

Double-click the Add Text Along Line, Arrow at End Point icon to open the Text
Properties dialog box.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Type your text in the Text field.

Select the arrow type in the Arrow: Type list box.
Modify the other text properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Text Properties dialog box.
In the drawing, pick the starting point of the line.
Pick the end point of the line. This is where Tekla Structures creates the arrow.

392

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

8.
9.
See also

Pick the insertion point of the text. Tekla Structures creates the line, and positions the text
to the right of the insertion point.
Repeat steps 68 to add the same line of text elsewhere in the drawing.

Add Text > Text (p. 390)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Text > Along Line, Arrow at Start Point

Synopsis

This command creates a single or multiple lines of text with a visible line which has an arrow at
the first point picked (or starting point).

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures orientates the text according to the starting and end points you pick.

Usage

1.

Double-click the Add Text Along Line, Arrow At Start Point icon to open the Text
Properties dialog box.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Type your text in the Text field.

Select the arrow type in the Arrow: Type list box.
Modify the other text properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Text Properties dialog box.
In the drawing, pick the starting point of the line. This is where Tekla Structures creates
the arrow.
Pick the end point of the line.
Pick the insertion point of the text. Tekla Structures creates the line and positions the text
to the right of the insertion point.
Repeat steps 68 to add the same line of text elsewhere in the drawing.

7.
8.
9.
See also

Add Text > Text (p. 390)

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Part Marks

Synopsis

This command creates marks for all parts, bolts, and connections, or selected parts and bolts.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

For each view, Tekla Structures creates marks using the properties in the View Part Mark
Properties, View Bolt Mark Properties, and View Connection Mark Properties dialog boxes.

The filename extension of a saved:

Usage

Part mark properties file is vpm.

Bolt mark properties file is vsm.
Connection mark properties file is vjm.

To create marks for all parts, bolts, and connections:

1.

Select Annotating > Add Part Marks > For All Parts.

To create marks for the selected parts and bolts:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

393

1.
2.
See also

Select the parts and bolts.

Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For Selected Parts, or right-click and select Add
Part Mark from the pop-up menu.

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Mark properties (p. 292)

Add Weld Mark

Synopsis

This command creates a weld mark in a picked position in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the weld mark using the properties in the Weld Mark Properties
dialog box. The filename extension of a saved weld mark properties file is wls.

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.

See also

Weld marks in drawings (p. 312)

Double-click the Add Weld Mark icon.

Enter or modify the weld symbol properties.
Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
Pick the position of the weld symbol.

Weld properties
Placing (p. 239)
Common drawing object properties (p. 343)
Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Add Level Mark

Synopsis

This command creates a level mark (an elevation dimension) in the position you indicate.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

Tekla Structures creates the level mark using to the properties in the Level Mark Properties
dialog box. The filename extension of a saved level mark properties file is lev.
The options on the General tab are:

394

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Field

Description

Prefix

Displays text before the mark.

Visibility of numeric value

Defines the visibility of the numeric

value.

Postfix

Displays text after the mark.

Precision

Defines the precision of the level

mark dimension.

Format

Defines the format of the level mark

dimension.

Field

Description

Use grouping

Defines whether to use different

grouping options to represent the
level mark dimensions.

Units

Defines the units used in level mark

dimensions. The options are
automatic, mm, cm, m, foot - inch
and inch.

For more information on the options in the Appearance tab, see Common drawing object
properties (p. 343).
If you try to create a level mark in a drawing view where the level of the part is not clear (e.g.
xy plane view), Tekla Structures uses the highest top level.
Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Double-click the Add Level Mark icon.

Type your text in the Text field. Tekla Structures adds the elevation dimension after it in
the mark.
Select the prefix for the positive level.
Modify the other level mark properties as required.
Click OK to save the properties and exit the Level Mark Properties dialog box..
In the drawing, pick the starting point for the leader line. This is the point Tekla Structures
dimensions.
Pick a point to indicate the side on which Tekla Structures creates the mark.
Repeat steps 67 to add level marks elsewhere in the drawing.

To change the position of the reference point that Tekla Structures uses
to dimension elevations, go to the Attributes tab in the drawing view
properties dialog box and use the Datum point for elevations field.
For more information, see Elevation dimensions (p. 155).

You can move level marks in horizontal direction by selecting the level
mark and dragging it horizontally to a new location while pressing down
the Shift key.

See also

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Elevation dimensions (p. 155)
Dimension types (p. 132) (Elevation)
Using commands (p. 28)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

395

Add Revision Mark

Synopsis

This command creates a revision mark in a picked position in a drawing.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Description

You have the following options to create revision marks:

Option

Description

Arrow on Left...

Creates a revision mark with an arrow

pointing to the left.

Arrow on Right...

Creates a revision mark with an arrow

pointing to the right.

Along Line, Arrow on Left...

Creates a revision mark along a line and

with an arrow pointing to the left.

Along Line, Arrow on

Right...

Creates a revision mark along a line and

with an arrow pointing to the right.

Tekla Structures creates the revision mark using the properties in the Revision Mark
Properties dialog box. The filename extension of a saved revision mark properties file is rev.
Usage

1.

Select Annotating > Properties > Revision Mark... to open the Revision Mark
Properties dialog box.

2.

Enter the mark, date, and information on the changes. Tekla Structures shows these in the
revision table of the drawing.
Modify the other revision mark properties as required.

3.

To exactly place the revision mark in the position you pick, click the
Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list box.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
See also

Click OK to save the properties and exit the Revision Mark Properties dialog box.
Click Annotating > Add Revision Mark and select an option.
(In the drawing, pick two points on the line. They define the slope of the mark.)
Pick a point (on the line) to place the mark.
Repeat steps 67 to add revision marks elsewhere in the drawing.

Common drawing object properties (p. 343)

Working with drawing objects (p. 370)
Using commands (p. 28)

Edit > Copy > Rotate...

Displays the Copy - Rotate dialog box, and copies and rotates the selected object(s).
Description

396

Copies and rotates objects around a given line on the work plane. Positive rotation is according
to the right hand rule (clockwise when looking from the starting point of the rotation axis).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Field

Description

X0

The x and y coordinates of the starting point of the

rotation axis.

Y0
Number of copies
Rotation angle

Usage

The angle of rotation from the original to the copied

object(s).

To rotate around a line on the work plane:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Select the object(s) to copy.

Click Edit > Copy > Rotate....
Pick a point, or enter the coordinates of the rotation axis.
Enter the number of copies.
Enter the rotation angle.
Click Copy.

Edit > Copy > Mirror...

Displays the Copy - Mirror dialog box and copies and mirrors the selected object(s).
Description

Usage

Copies and mirrors objects through a plane that is perpendicular to the work plane and passes
through a line you specify.

Field

Description

X0
Y0

The x and y coordinates of the mirroring plane starting

point.

Angle

The angle of the mirroring plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the object(s) to copy.

Click Edit > Copy > Mirror....
Pick the starting point of the mirroring plane, or enter its coordinates and angle.
Pick the end point of the mirroring plane, or enter its coordinates and angle.
Click Copy.

Edit > Move > Rotate...

Displays the Move - Rotate dialog box and moves and rotates the selected object(s).
Description

Moves objects by rotating them around a given line, either on the work plane, or in the work
plane z direction. Positive rotation is according to the right hand rule (clockwise when looking
from the rotation axis starting point).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

397

Field

Description

X0

The x and y coordinates of the rotation axis starting

point.

Y0
Rotation angle

The rotation angle between the original and new

position(s).

To rotate around a line in the work plane z direction:

Usage

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Select the object(s) to move.

Click Edit > Move > Rotate....
Select Z in the Around list box.
Pick a point, or enter the coordinates of the rotation axis.
Enter the rotation angle.
Click Move.

To rotate around a line on the work plane:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select the object(s) to move.

Click Edit > Move > Rotate....
Select line in the Around list box.
Pick the starting point of the rotation axis, or enter its starting coordinates and angle.
Pick the end point of the rotation axis, or enter its starting coordinates and angle.
Enter the angle of rotation.
Click Move.

Edit > Move > Mirror...

Displays the Move - Mirror dialog box and moves and mirrors the selected object(s).
Description

Moves objects by mirroring them through a plane that is perpendicular to the work plane and
passes through a defined line.

Field

Description

X0
Y0

The x and y coordinates of the mirroring plane starting

point.

Angle

The angle of the mirroring plane.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Usage

Select the object(s) to move.

Click Edit > Move > Mirror...
Pick the starting point of the mirroring plane, or enter its starting point and angle.
Pick the end point of the mirroring plane, or enter its end point and angle.
Click Move.

Trim
Synopsis

Shortens or extends a line relative to the boundary you select. The boundary does not have to
be a line, it can be a part, arc, or rectangle, for example.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

398

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Usage

To shorten a line:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Edit > Trim.

Select the boundary line.
Click the middle mouse button.
Click anywhere within the horizontal line to cut it at the boundary line.

Boundary line
Horizontal line
To extend a line:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Edit > Trim.

Select the boundary line.
Click the middle mouse button.
Click the right end of the horizontal line to extend it to the boundary line.

Boundary line
Horizontal line
Limitations

Trimming does not affect extensions to the boundary line.

Split
Synopsis

Cuts an object into two pieces at a point you select.You can split the following objects:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

399

Lines
Polylines
Rectangles
Circles
Arcs.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Usage

To split a line:
1.

Select the line first.

2.
3.
4.

Click Edit > Split.

Pick a point to indicate the cutting location.
Tekla Structures splits the line into two lines:

Divide
Synopsis

Cuts an object into a number of segments that you specify. You can divide the following
objects:

Lines
Arcs.

Preconditions

You must have a drawing open.

Usage

To divide a single line into four lines:

400

1.

Select the line.

2.

Click Edit > Divide. The Segments dialog box appears.

3.
4.

Type 4 in the Number field and click OK.

Tekla Structures divides the line into four lines:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Editing Drawings

Introduction

Printouts and reports

This chapter explains how to generate and print reports and drawings in Tekla Structures.
We do not cover setting up printers in the Windows environment. It is assumed that print
devices have already been set up and tested in the Windows environment by an experienced
administrator. Refer to your operating system manuals and help files for further information on
setting up printers.

Audience

This chapter has been written for Tekla Structures users who are responsible for setting up and
maintaining printing services for themselves and other users.

Assumed background

You will find it useful to have some experience setting up and managing Windows printers.

Organization

This chapter is divided into the following sections:

Creating reports (p. 401)

Printing drawings (p. 412)
Printing drawings to file (p. 417)
Creating a PDF file (p. 421)
The printer catalog (p. 422)

7.1 Creating reports

You create reports of the information included in models. These could be lists of drawings,
bolts, and parts, for example. Reports can contain information from selected parts or the entire
model.
Tekla Structures has a large number of standard report templates. Use the Template Editor to
modify the existing report templates and to create new ones. For more information, see the
Template Editor user documentation.
Reports can be printer to paper and to file.
You can create reports by selecting Drawings & Reports > Create Report or by clicking the
Report icon

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

401

Topics

Producing reports on entire model (p. 402)

Producing reports on selected parts (p. 402)
Producing reports on selected drawings (p. 404)
Template Editor in report creating (p. 404)
Creating templates on nested assemblies (p. 404)
Producing reports on nested assemblies (p. 407)
Defining reports in HTML (p. 407)
Creating bending diagrams on reinforcement bars (p. 408)
Report options (p. 411)
Viewing reports (p. 412)

Producing reports on entire model

To produce reports on the entire model:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

Open the model.

Click the Reports icon on the General toolbar to display the Report dialog box. This is
divided into two tabs, Report and Options.
Click on a report template on the list.
Type in the report title(s). Up to three user-defined titles can be entered here. All the titles
are not used in every standard report. Title1, for example, is used to show phase
information in the material_list report. Check the report you want to use in the Template
Editor to see which title(s) it uses.
Enter a name for the report file.
Use the Browse... button to select the directory where the report will be created. By
default the report is created in the current model directory. Reports have the file extension
.xsr.
Set the report options on the Options tab. See Report options (p. 411).
Click Create from all to run a report on the entire model.

You can create reports without numbering the model objects. This is
useful when you need to produce draft reports from large multi-user
models. Tekla Structures still warns you if numbering is not up to date.

See also

Producing reports on selected parts (p. 402)

Producing reports on selected drawings (p. 404)

Producing reports on selected parts

To produce reports on selected parts:
1.
2.
3.

402

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Open the model.

Click the parts in the model you wish to include in the report.
Click the Reports icon on the General toolbar to display the Report dialog box. This is
divided into two tabs, Report and Options.

4.
5.

Click on a report template on the list.

Enter the report title(s). You can enter up to three user-defined titles. Every title is not used
in every standard report. Title1, for example, is used to show phase information in the
material_list report. Check the report you want to use in the Template Editor to see which
title(s) it uses.

For a list of fields that can be used in reports, see Template attributes.

6.
7.

Enter a name for the report file.

Use the Browse... button to locate the destination folder where the report will be created.
If you do not indicate a destination folder, the report is created in the current model
directory. Reports have the file extension .xsr.
8. Set the report options on the Options tab. For more information, see Report options (p.
411).
9. Click Create from selected to run a report on the selected parts.
10. Click Show to show the report, or Print... to print the report.
See also

Producing reports on entire model (p. 402)

Producing reports on selected drawings (p. 404)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

403

Producing reports on selected drawings

To produce reports on the selected drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Open the model.

Click the parts in the model whose drawings you wish to include in the report. You can
also use the selection filter to select the parts of a certain phase, for example.
Click the Open drawing list icon to open the Drawing List dialog box.
Click Filter by parts.
Select all the drawings from the list.
Click the Reports icon on the General toolbar to display the Report dialog box.
Click on a report template on the list, e.g. drawing_list or drawing_issue_rev.
Enter the report title(s). You can enter up to three user-defined titles. Every title is not used
in every standard report. Title1, for example, is used to show phase information in the
material_list report. Check the report you want to use in the Template Editor to see which
title(s) it uses.

For a list of fields that can be used in reports, see Template attributes.

9. Enter a name for the report file.

10. Use the Browse... button to locate the destination folder where the report will be created.
If you do not indicate a destination folder, the report is created in the current model
directory. Reports have the file extension .xsr.
11. Set the report options on the Options tab. For more information, see Report options (p.
411).
12. Click Create from selected to run a report on the selected parts.
13. Click Show to show the report, or Print... to print the report.
See also

Producing reports on entire model (p. 402)

Producing reports on selected parts (p. 402)

Template Editor in report creating

You can create templates and reports with the help of Template Editor.
Using Template
Editor

Template Editor (TplEd) is a tool for creating, editing and managing templates.
Tekla Structures includes a large number of standard report templates. With Template Editor
you can modify existing report templates, or create new ones to suit your needs.
Templates are used for different purposes, for example to print a list of parts used in an
assembly. Templates are either textual or graphical, depending on their contents. Graphical
template definitions have the file extension .tpl. Textual template definitions have the file
extension .rpt. Both textual and graphical templates can get data from Tekla Structures.
For more information, see Template Editor Users Guide.

Creating templates on nested assemblies

With Tekla Structures you can produce templates and reports that show the hierarchical
structure of nested assemblies. You can use the Template Editor to modify existing report
templates, or create new ones to produce reports on nested assemblies.

404

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Textual templates

This example demonstrates how to create a nested assembly structure to a textual template
similar to the one in the following picture:

To create a nested assembly structure to a textual template:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Start the Template Editor by clicking Tools > Templates Editor....

Click File > New.
Select Textual template.
Add rows in the template by clicking Insert > Component > Row.
As you add rows, you can select the content type for the row. In this example, we will
create four rows. For the first and third row, select the ASSEMBLY content type, and for
the second and fourth row, select the PART content type.

5.

Add the nested assembly structure for the template by using the options in Sorting and
drawing order.
Move the second and third row down one level and the fourth row down two levels by
using the Down arrow icon.

The structure should now look like this:

For more information, see " Sort and draw order" in the Template Editor documentation.
6.

Add value fields to the rows to get the required data from your Tekla Structures database.
In this example, the added value fields are assembly or part position, number and weight.

To add the value fields, select the row and click Insert > Value field.
Next, click to define the insertion point for the value field within the row.
When you have defined the insertion point, a Select Attribute dialog box appears
prompting you to select an attribute for the value field. For each row, select the
required attributes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

405

For more information, see "Insert a value field" in the Template Editor documentation.
7.

Organize the template to make it look the way you want when printing. For example:

Move objects to display the nested assembly structure in the printed report: Select the
object you want to move and drag it to the desired position.

Align objects: Select all the objects you want to align, right-click and select the
appropriate option from the pop-up menu, for example Align > Right.

Add a header and a footer: Click Insert > Component > Page header and Page
footer. Add the required information to the header and footer.

For more information, see "Working with template components" in the Template Editor
documentation.
Below is the example textual template and a report that has been created using the template.

Graphical
templates

406

You can create graphical templates for nested assemblies in the same manner as textual
templates. The difference between graphical and textual templates is that you are able to
display project and company information and graphics, such as table outlines, pictures or
symbols, in graphical templates. For more information, see "Graphical templates" in the
Template documentation.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Producing reports on nested assemblies

For information on how to produce reports on nested assemblies, follow the instructions in
Producing reports on selected parts (p. 402). Select the assemblies you want to include in the
report.
You may want to, for example, produce a report on the parts included in the assemblies, or a
list of the assemblies. In those cases, use the Assembly_part_list or Assembly_list report
template, respectively, in the Report dialog box. You can also use your own report templates.

When you use a template having a nested assembly structure, Tekla Structures displays the
assembly hierarchy in the report when you view or print it.

When you are producing reports only on nested assemblies, select the
assemblies and use the Create from selected button to create the
reports.

Defining reports in HTML

Tekla Structures can also produce reports in HTML format. With HTML format you have more
possibilities for different layout, fonts, and pictures. Report templates that generate output in
HTML format have the filename extension .html in the Reports dialog box.
Requirements

If you want to define HTML report yourself, remember the following requirements:

Type of the report template must be Graphical in the Template Editor.

Filename extension for the report template must be .html.rpt.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

407


Simple example
report

When viewing the created report, set Show report to With associated viewer on the
Options tab of the Reports dialog box.

To define a simple HTML report for reporting information on parts:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

Click Tools > Template Editor... to start the Template Editor.

In the Template Editor, click File > New....
Select the Graphical template template type and click OK.
Click Insert > Component > Row... and select the PART content type.
Click Insert > Value Field... and click two points to define the location of the field in the
row. Then select a field (PART_POS, for example) and click OK. Repeat this to add all the
desired fields.
Click Insert > Component > Header....
Click Insert > Text... and type in the heading for the report and click OK. Then click two
points to define the location of the heading in the header row. Repeat this to create
headings for all the value fields.

Header that contains text fields

Row that contains two value fields
8.
9.

Click File > Save as... and browse to the template forder
..\environment\*your_environment*\template and type in the name
test.html.rpt in the File name field.
In Tekla Structures, click Drawings & Reports > Create Report... to open the Report
dialog box and run the report.

Creating bending diagrams on reinforcement bars

You can use Template Editor to create bending diagrams on reinforcement bars and bent
meshes, and control the type of information that is shown in the bending diagrams.
To create bending diagrams:
Usage

408

1.

Click Drawings & Reports > Template Editor... to start Template Editor.

2.

In the Template Editor, click File > New....

3.

Select the Graphical template and click OK.

4.

Select REBAR or MESH content type for the row and the value fields you want to use.

5.

Insert a graphical field to your REBAR or MESH content type row.

6.

In the Graphical Field Properties, click Free attributes... button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

7.

In the Free attributes dialog box, add the required attributes and values. The available
attributes and values are:

Attribute

Default value

Available values

FontName

romsim

Available template fonts

FontSize

2.0

Available font sizes

FontColor

1 (black)

1 = black
2 = red
3 = bright green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = yellow
7 = magenta
8 = brown
9 = green
10 = dark blue
11 = forest green
12 = orange
13 = gray

RotationAxis

0 = by view
1 = by global Z
2 = by local axis

Exaggeration

0 = no
1 = yes

EndMark

1 = straight
2 = half arrow
3 = full arrow

Dimensions

0 = no
1 = yes

BendingAngle

0 = no
1 = yes

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

409

8.

Save the template.

9.

Run the report in Tekla Structures.

Example

See also

Reinforcement settings for drawings

Working with tables (p. 116)

Adding surface treatment information to report templates

You can include the following surface treatment specific fields in report templates:

410

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Name

Explanation

CODE

Code for the surface treatment defined in the

product_finishes.dat file. For
example, TS1.

MORTAR_VOLUME

Volume of mortar used in surface treatment.

See also

Name

Explanation

NAME

Text in the Name field in the Surface

Treatment Properties dialog box.

NUMBER_OF_TILE_TYPES

Number of tiles used in a tile pattern.

SURFACING_NAME

Surface treatment name defined in the

product_finishes.dat file.

SURFACING_TYPE_NUMBER

Surface treatment type number defined in the

product_finishes.dat file.

TILE_VOLUME

Volume of tiles used in surface treatment

(without mortar volume).

TYPE

Surface treatment type in the Surface

Treatment Properties dialog box.

Creating new surface treatment options

Template attributes

Using the sequence number in reports

To include the sequence number in reports:

Example

Enter the sequence name in the text field, or in the table part row.

To create a list showing all the parts belonging to a sequence, use the following rule in a row or
intermediate row in the Template Editor:
if(GetValue("<name of sequence>") != 0 ) then
Output()
else
StepOut()
endif

In the above rule, <name of sequence> stands for a user-defined attribute that is defined as
sequence.

Report options
Use the settings in the Options tab to specify how Tekla Structures creates and displays
reports.
Show report on
screen only

To show the report on screen when you click Create from all, or Create from selected, click
Yes in the Show created report list box.

Write report to
file

To write the report to file, click No in the Show created report list box. Once Tekla Structures
creates the report, you can display it by clicking Show on the Report tab.

Display report in
viewer

The Show report option controls whether Tekla Structures displays the report in a window, or
using the associated file viewer, when you click Show.

Print report options

Select File > Print > Print Reports... to display the Print dialog box, where you can enter a file
name and location for the report.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

411

Click Browse... to display the Select file... dialog box, where you can indicate the destination
folder and filename. By default Tekla Structures uses the filter *.xsr to show Tekla
Structures reports only.
Click Select... to choose the report font.
Click Printer setup... to use the Windows Print dialog box to set printer-specific options such
as paper size, orientation, and so on
Click Print to print the report.

Viewing reports
To view a report you have already created:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click the Reports icon.

Click Browse... in the Report dialog box to locate the report file you want to view.
Click Show to view the report in the List dialog box.
Click OK to exit the List dialog box.

When you have the List dialog box open, you can highligh a part, an
assembly or a cast unit in the model by highlighting it in the list.

Use the Template Editor to view the design of a report.

7.2 Printing drawings

Introduction

Tekla Structures prints drawings to both selected print devices and to file, from either the
Drawing Editor or the drawing list in the Model Editor. You can also use the print drawing
option to output 2D DXF and DWG files. For more on adding print devices, read Setting up a
print device (p. 422).
You can print drawings using the Print drawings icon

Topics

412

Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 413)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Printing single drawings (p. 414)

Printing on multiple sheets
Printing multiple drawings (p. 415)
Printing options (p. 416)

Drawing frames and foldmarks

To create drawing frames around drawing contents, you have the following options:

Use the default drawing frames in Tekla Structures, which you can define when you print
drawings.

Use DWG/DXF files in the table layouts as drawing frames.

Drawing frames
You can have a frame around drawing contents, or two drawing frames inside each other. You
can create foldmarks, as guides for folding printed drawings. They are small lines between and
perpendicular to the drawing frames.

Frames
Foldmark
You can set colors for drawing frames and foldmarks. If you print monocolor drawings, the
colors define the line weight. See Color (p. 425).
To set drawing frames and foldmarks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

In the Model Editor, click File > Print > Print Drawings... , or

Drawings dialog box.

, to open the Print

Click Frames.... The Drawing Frame Properties dialog appears.

Select the checkbox(es) of the frame(s) you want to print.
Enter the distances between each frame and the left, right, bottom, and top edge of the
paper (in millimeters).
Select a color for each frame.
To print the foldmarks, select the Foldmarks checkbox.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

413

7.
8.

Enter the horizontal and vertical distances of the first foldmarks from the lower right
corner of the outer frame, and between the other foldmarks (in millimeters).
Select a foldmark color.

DWG/DXF file as a frame

You can also use a DWG/DXF file as a drawing frame. You have to include a DWG/DXF file
in the drawing layout in the Model Editor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
Select the layout and click the Table layout... button.
Select the table layout and click the Tables... button.
Select the DWG/DXF option from the Available tables list.
Select the file and click OK.
Select Transparent.
Set the Scale.

Printing single drawings

To print single drawings from the Drawing Editor:

See also

1.
2.
3.

Click Drawing File > Open... to display the Drawing List dialog box.
Click on a drawing and then click Open.
Click the Print drawing icon to display the Print Drawings dialog box:

4.

In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the print device you want to use. For more
information, see Printing options (p. 416).

Printing multiple drawings (p. 415)

Printing on multiple sheets

You can print a drawing on multiple small sheets.

414

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

To print a drawing on multiple small sheets:

Usage

1.

Click Drawing File > Print Drawings....

2.

Select Print on multiple sheets option.

To print the drawing out successfully on multiple sheets, make sure that
the layout of the drawing supports printing on smaller sheets.

If you select Auto in the Orientation listbox, Tekla Structures calculates the required amount
of sheets needed to print the drawing.
The amount of sheets is rounded to the nearest number. Tekla Structures selects an orientation
that results in the smallest number of printed sheets. When you use a fixed scale, the number of
sheets is rounded up.
When you print to files, Tekla Structures automatically names the files by adding the sheet
number to the end of the file name. The numbers start from 1, and they are placed at the lower
right corner of the sheet.
Use the variable XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER to set borders that are left out from
the smaller sheets.
Example

Printing multiple drawings

To print multiple drawings, use the drawing list in the Model Editor.
1.
2.
3.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... to open the Drawing List dialog box, which
lists all the current drawings.
Using standard Windows selection methods, select each drawing you want to print.
Click the Print drawings icon to display the Print Drawings dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

415

4.

See also

In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the print device(s) you want to use. If you select
several print devices, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest
paper size on which the drawing will fit. For instance, if you have 2 printers selected, one
A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will send A4 drawings to the A4 print device and A3 to
the A3 print device. For more information, see Printing options (p. 416).

Printing single drawings (p. 414)

Printing options
The Print Drawings dialog box contains several options, which are explained below.

Option

Comments

Print to file

Printing to file (specific folder) (p. 419)

Include revision mark to

file name

Adds the latest revision of the printed drawing

to the filename.
Uses revision number by default. However, if
you set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRA
WING_LIST to TRUE, then uses the revision
mark.

Scaling: Auto

Tekla Structures fits the drawing to the paper

size. This is useful when printing preview
drawings on A4.

Scaling: Scale

Scales the drawing manually.

1.0 = 100%, 0.9 = 90%, and so on.

416

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Print on multiple sheets

Prints a drawing on multiple small sheets.

Number of copies

Defines the number of copies.

Option

Comments

Orientation: Auto

Orientates the drawing to suit the paper.

Orientation: Landscape

Prints the drawing horizontally - as it is

displayed on the screen.

Orientation: Portrait

Prints the drawing vertically.

Print area: Entire

drawing

Prints the entire drawing.

Print area: Visible area

Prints the area visible in the current drawing

window.

Frames

See Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 413).

If you are printing a drawing to a smaller paper, the line weights are
scaled accordingly. This means that no lines are drawn too thickly and
the drawings are more readable.

To force a drawing on to a different size paper:

Open the drawing, click Drawing Properties > Layout. In Size
definition mode select Specified size. Insert the required sheet size into
Drawing size.

If a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location,

use the following variables to move the drawing print origin:

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y

You can disable the print date information to prevent the loss of
information when working with multi-user models. This is useful in
cases where a user modifies drawings while another user prints the same
drawings. Use the XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE variable
to disable the print date.
For more information on printing, see Printing drawings (p. 412).

7.3 Printing drawings to file

You must install the appropriate Windows printer driver and configure it to print to file before
adding the print device to the Tekla Structures printer catalog. For more information on
installing and configuring Windows printer drivers refer to your operating system
documentation.
Topics

Adding a print-to-file device to the printer catalog (p. 418)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

417

Printing to file (p. 419)

Printing to file (specific folder) (p. 419)

Adding a print-to-file device to the printer catalog

First you will need to add a print to file device to your printer instances. For more information,
see Setting up a print device (p. 422).
1.

Click File > Print > Printer Catalog... to open the Printer Catalog dialog box.

Click Browse to locate a Windows printer driver.

Type Printer instance (name) here.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

418

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Click Add.
Type in a printer instance (name) for the print device as indicated above, followed
immediately (no spaces) by @path\folder\. The folder must already exist. For
example, 11X17@d:\small\ .
Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list of the
Windows printer drivers currently configured on your PC. Click a printer driver that is
configured to print to file and then OK.
Choose By print area as the Paper size.
Input the Print area h*b. Read Print area h*b (p. 424).
Input a file extension, for example plt for a plot file.
Use the Color list box to indicate a color or mono print device. Read Color (p. 425).
Click Color table... to map pen size to the on-screen line color. Read Color table (p. 425).

10. Click Add.

11. Click Update and then OK to exit the Printer Catalogdialog box.
12. Check Save changes to model folder in the Save Confirmation dialog box.

One way to send different drawing sizes to different folders is to set up a

Windows printer to print to file for each paper size you will use. Enter a
different destination folder for each paper size in the Printer instances
in Tekla Structures.

Printing to file
To print to file, simply follow the instructions in Printing multiple drawings (p. 415) and
choose a printer instance that is set up to print to file. The results will appear in the folder you
designated when defining the printer instance.

Filenames
The file will have the name shown on the drawing list, with the extension you specified when
setting up the print to file device. For customizing the filename, see Switches for naming
printfiles (p. 419).

Printing to file (specific folder)

You can also send plot files to a different folder to the one you specified when setting up the
print device in the printer instances.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... to open the Drawing List dialog box which
lists all the current drawings.
Using standard Windows selection methods, select each drawing you want to print.
Click the Print drawings icon to display the Print Drawings dialog box.
Click on one of the printer instances for print devices that are set up to print to file.
Select the Print to file checkbox.
Click Browse... to locate the destination folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box.
Double-click a folder, then click OK to exit the Browse For Folder dialog box.
If you do not enter a filename, or you have chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses
the drawing name(s) as filenames.
If you do not enter a folder, Tekla Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder
or folder defined by the variable XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.

7.

Read Switches for naming printfiles (p. 419) for more on customizing filenames.

Switches for naming printfiles

If you do not enter a filename in the Print Drawings dialog box, or you have chosen several
drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as filenames.
To customize these filenames, you need to use an variable to indicate the drawing type,
combined with switches to define the format of the plot file name.
To indicate the drawing type, use the following variables in Tools > Options > Advanced

Options...:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

419

Drawing type

Variable

All

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

Assembly

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

Cast-unit

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

General arrangement

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

Multi

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

Single-part

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME

Use the following switches to define the format of plot file names:

Switch

Result

Description

%NAME%
%DRAWING_NAME%

P_1

Part, assembly, or cast unit

position, using the filename format
prefix_number.

%NAME.-%
%DRAWING_NAME.-%

P-1

Part, assembly, or cast unit

position, using the filename format
prefix-number.

%NAME.%
%DRAWING_NAME.%

P1

Part, assembly, or cast unit

position, using the format
prefixnumber.

%REV%
%REVISION%
%DRAWING_REVISION%

%REV_MARK%
%REVISION_MARK%
%DRAWING_REVISION_
MARK%

Drawing revision mark, if Include

revision mark to filename is
checked in the Print Drawings
dialog box.

%TITLE%
%DRAWING_TITLE%

PLATE

Drawing name from the drawing

properties dialog box.

%UDA:DRAWING_USERF
IELD_1%

Painted

Value of a user-defined attribute.

%REV? - Rev%
%REVISION? - Rev%
%DRAWING_REVISION?
- Rev%

- Rev

Adds conditional prefixes. In this

example, if REV exists, Tekla
Structures adds the text between ?
and % to the filename.

%UDA:DR_TITLE1%
%UDA:DR_TITLE2%
%UDA:DR_TITLE3%

Base plate

Drawing titles (three fields) from

the drawing properties dialog box.

Drawing revision number, if

Include revision mark to
filename is checked in the Print
Drawings dialog box.

%UDA:DR_DEFAULT_HO
LE_SIZE%

Default bolt hole size defined by

Bolt size limit in the bolt mark
properties dialog box.

%UDA:DR_DEFAULT_WE
LD_SIZE%

Weld size limit from the drawings

welding properties dialog box.

The Result column above shows the filename for an example drawing with these properties:

420

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Property

Value

Part position

P1

Revision number

Revision mark

Name

PLATE

Title (field 1)

Base plate

User-defined field 1

Painted

You can also string several switches together to create filename. The example below results in
the filename E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.dxf:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?_Revisi
on=%%REV%.dxf

You can also type these switches in the file name field in the Print Drawings dialog box.

If you set the variables and switches in the initialization file, enclose
each switch in double % characters, for example, %%NAME%%.
Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower case
letters. For example, a drawing named A.1 overwrites a drawing named
a.1.

7.4 Creating a PDF file

You can use any standard PDF printer to create PDF files with Tekla Structures, such as
pdfFactory, Win2PDF or Adobe Acrobat.
If you are using Adobe Acrobat to create PDF files, you must have Adobe Acrobat and Adobe
Distiller installed and configured with the Adobe Postscript Printer Driver set up to print to
file. Consult your Adobe documentation for more information.

You also need to add the Adobe postscript printer driver to the Tekla Structures printer catalog.
See also

For more information on creating PDF files, log on to Tekla Extranet and go to Hints & Tips >

General > Printing/Plotting.

Topics

Add Adobe Printer driver to the printer catalog (p. 421)

Creating PDF files (p. 422)

Add Adobe Printer driver to the printer catalog

Follow these steps to add the Adobe postscript printer driver to the printer catalog. You may
also find it useful to read The printer catalog (p. 422).
1.
2.
3.

Click File > Print > Printer Catalog... to open the Printer Catalog dialog box.
Type in a new printer instance (name) followed immediately by @ and the folder where
Adobe Distiller looks for files. For example, A4_PDF@c:\plots\pdf\in\ .
Click Add.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

421

4.

Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box. Click the Adobe postscript printer
driver and then OK.
5. Set Paper size to By print area.
6. Input the print area. Read Print area h*b (p. 424).
7. Input the file extension as ps.
8. For color, select Black/white.
9. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color. Read Color table (p. 425).
10. Click Update and then OK to exit the Printer Catalog dialog box.
11. Check Save changes to model folder in the Save Confirmation dialog box.

Creating PDF files

To create PDF files from drawings, simply follow the instructions in Printing multiple
drawings (p. 415) and choose the printer instance that is set up to print to the postscript printer
driver. The results will appear in the folder you designated when defining the printer instance.

When creating PDF files, do not use the Print to file option.

Filenames
The file will have the name shown on the drawing list, with the extension ps.

7.5 The printer catalog

Print device settings are stored in the printer catalog, which uses the file
..\environments\*your_environment*\system\plotdev.bin. You can
view, add, modify and delete print devices. Standard drawing frame properties are stored in the
file standard.fms.

As a safeguard, backup the plotdev.bin and standard.fms files

once you have configured your printers. You will then be able to quickly
restore your printer catalog in the event of a system failure.

Topics

Setting up a print device (p. 422)

Modifying a print device (p. 426)
Deleting a print device (p. 426)

Setting up a print device

Tekla Structures uses Windows drivers to write the print data directly to the Windows print
device interface.

422

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

There are two stages to setting up a print device in Tekla Structures. Firstly you need to add
printer instances to the printer catalog. By default several printer instances are already
defined. Secondly, you need point these printer instances to a specific Windows printer, either
attached directly to your system, or available via a network. You will define the majority of
print settings when you set up the print device.
Topics

Adding a print device (p. 423)

Selecting paper size (p. 424)
Print area h*b (p. 424)
Color (p. 425)

Adding a print device

1.

Click File > Print > Printer Catalog... to open the Printer Catalog dialog box.

Click Browse... to locate a Windows printer driver.

Type Printer instance (name) here.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click an existing printer instance that has similar settings to the one you want to create. We
will use this as a template.
Type in a new printer instance (name) for the print device.
Click Add.
Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list of the
Windows printer drivers currently configured on your PC. Click a print device and then
OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

423

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Choose a paper size. Read Selecting paper size (p. 424).

Input the print area. Read Print area h*b (p. 424).
Use the Offset for print origin fields to move the drawing print origin, if necessary.
Use the Color list box to indicate a color or mono print device. Read Color (p. 425).
Click Color table to map pen size to the on screen line color. Read Color table (p. 425).
Click Update and then OK to exit the Printer Catalog dialog box.
Check Save changes to model folder in the Save Confirmation dialog box.

Selecting paper size

You can select paper size in several different ways:

Tekla Structures lists named paper size for most sizes A3 and smaller. This method is
recommended for print devices A3 and smaller.

If you cannot find the paper size you need in named paper sizes in Tekla
Structures, use the By print area option.

By print area: The print device selects the paper size based on the print area. This method

None: No size information is sent to the print device. This option provides legacy support

is recommended for print devices A2 and larger. If you use a named paper size with a print
device larger than A3, drawings larger than the print area are cropped to the size of the
print area.
for Xsteel 5.0 and is not recommended for use in other circumstances.

To print to different paper sizes, use Windows Print Manager to define several printers,
each using a different paper size, but all connected to the same physical device. For more
information on setting up print devices in Windows, consult your operating system
documentation.

Tekla Structures overrides the paper size defined in Windows printer

setup if the information is entered in the printer instances.

Print area h*b

This defines the size of the print area (height and breadth), not the paper size. Tekla Structures
uses this information when printing to multiple print devices, or when you choose the By print
area option in the Paper size list box.

When setting the print area, as a minimum you should use the paper size
less the hard clip margins of the printer. Consult your printer
documentation for the hard clip margins of your printer.

424

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

When printing to multiple print devices, Tekla Structures prints the drawing to the print device
with the smallest print area on which the drawing will fit. The print area also affects
autoscaling and autorotate.
Tekla Structures uses the print area values to position the print on the paper. When defining the
print area, ensure that the values for h and b relate to the paper size required.

Value

Printer (roll feed)

Printer (tray feed)

roll width direction

tray feed direction

roll feed direction

tray width direction

Color
Use this option to indicate whether the print device will print in color or black/white (mono). If
you choose color, Tekla Structures prints lines with the colors defined in the drawing
properties.

Color table
Click Color table... to create a pen map for the print device. The color table maps different
screen colors to different line weights. Note that the color you use for the drawing background
is not printed in drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

425

Pen number
The pen numbers refer to the line weights used in the printed drawing. By default, pen 0 has a
line weight of 0.1 mm. To obtain higher pen numbers, multiply the default pen thickness by the
pen number. Set the default pen thickness using the variable XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH.
The line thicknesses displayed on the screen are taken from the first printer on the printer list.

If you create black and white drawings, the pen numbers in the Color
Table also affect the line thicknesses displayed on the screen. See also
Colors in drawings (p. 37).

Modifying a print device

To modify an existing print device in Tekla Structures:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click File > Print > Printer Catalog... to open the Printer Catalog dialog box.
Modify the print device. Read Setting up a print device (p. 422) for more information.
Click Update and then OK to exit the Printer Catalog dialog box.
Check Save changes to model folder in the Save Confirmation dialog box.

Deleting a print device

To delete an existing print device in Tekla Structures:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click File > Print > Printer Catalog... to open the Printer Catalog dialog box.
Click on the Printer instances.
Click Delete.
Click OK to exit the Printer Catalog dialog box.

Check Save changes to model folder in the Save Confirmation dialog box.

426

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Printouts and reports

Index
a
absolute dimensions................................................... 132
orientation ........................................................... 210
zero at start point ................................................ 210
add angular dimension ............................................... 226
add dimensions for all parts ....................................... 227
add free dimension..................................................... 224
add horizontal dimension ........................................... 223
add orthogonal dimension .......................................... 224
add parallel dimension ............................................... 224
add perpendicular dimension ..................................... 224
add vertical dimension................................................ 224
adding......................................................................... 228
adding views to drawings ........................................... 379
additional drawing objects .......................................... 341
additional marks ......................................................... 350
creating ............................................................... 393
Adobe Printer driver ................................................... 421
aligning
drawing views...................................................... 380
section views....................................................... 267
along line, arrow at end point ..................................... 392
along line, arrow at start point .................................... 393
alternative drawing view scales.................................. 123
anchor bolt plans ....................................................73, 76
drawing filters ........................................................ 76
angle
dimension............................................................ 226
dimension type .................................................... 201
of skewed parts ................................................... 153
unfolding.............................................................. 141
arc
by end points and center..................................... 386
by three points..................................................... 387
around drawing objects .............................................. 348
arrange drawing views ............................................... 379
arranging
drawing objects ................................................... 374
drawing views...................................................... 379
arrow .......................................................................... 345

assembly drawings .............................................. 32, 250

creating..................................................................70
properties ............................................................101
associative drawings ....................................................91
associative notes ....................................... 353, 357, 368
AutoDrawings .............................................................107
cloning ...................................................................81
AutoDrawings wizard
log file ....................................................................80
AutoDrawings wizards ..................................................49
autoscaling drawing views..........................................129
autosizing drawings ........................................... 128, 129

b
background color ..........................................................37
bending diagrams .......................................................408
bending line dimension...............................................141
black and white drawings .............................................37
bolt dimensions...........................................................142
bolt groups..................................................................172
bolt internal dimensions..............................................143
bolt mark properties....................................................335
bolt size element.........................................................310
bolts
in drawings ..........................................................278
bulge...........................................................................343

c
c/c ...............................................................................144
cast unit drawings.........................................................35
creating..................................................................71
cast-unit drawings
properties ............................................................103
center line
type......................................................................273
centered bolt...............................................................153
centered part ..............................................................153
chamfer marks
adding..................................................................368
change symbol .............................................................92
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

427

check dimension point validity ....................................229

check dimensions .......................................................164
circle
by center and radius ............................................385
by three points .....................................................386
cloning ..........................................................................56
assembly drawings ................................................82
cast unit drawings..................................................82
checking dimensions and views ............................90
dimensions for selected view.................................88
general arrangement drawings..............................83
including single-part views.....................................82
marks.....................................................................89
single-part drawings ..............................................82
through ..................................................................82
cloning drawings ...........................................................85
cloning template............................................................85
definition ................................................................56
cloning templates..........................................................64
adding to Master Drawing Catalog ........................62
creating preview images........................................86
editing properties ...................................................63
close dimensions ........................................................175
closing
drawings ................................................................98
closing dimensions ............................................ 159, 163
cloud ...........................................................................389
color
of drawing objects................................................347
printing.................................................................425
special .................................................................349
color mode ....................................................................37
color table ...................................................................425
columns ......................................................................250
combine ......................................................................167
combine dimension lines ............................................227
combine distance........................................................170
combining dimensions ................................................167
bolt groups...........................................................172
combine distance.................................................170
min distance .................................................170
common properties .....................................................343
connect dimension line ...............................................228
connection mark properties ........................................336
content........................................................................293
controlling dimensions ................................................166
coordinate system
in drawings ..........................................................247

428

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

copying
drawing objects....................................................376
drawing views ......................................................382
mirror ...................................................................397
rotate....................................................................396
cover-up area..............................................................374
cover-up line ...............................................................374
cover-up tools .............................................................374
create drawings from templates....................................85
creating
additional drawing objects ...................................341
additional marks...................................................393
assembly drawings ....................................... 70, 101
cast unit drawings ..................................................71
cast-unit drawings................................................103
drawings ................................................................48
drawings in AutoDrawings .....................................80
drawings with AutoDrawings wizards ..................107
general arrangement drawings ..................... 72, 104
multi-drawings........................................................78
multidrawings.......................................................105
single-part drawings...................................... 70, 100
workshop drawings ................................................70
creating drawings
using cloning temlates ...........................................64
using rule sets........................................................62
using saved settings ..............................................58
curved dimension........................................................225

d
defining
fixed drawing sizes ..............................................128
deformations ...............................................................256
deleting
dimension point....................................................228
detail mark ..................................................................267
view label .............................................................297
detail properties ..........................................................267
detail symbol ...............................................................110
detail view ...................................................................110
detail view label...........................................................267
device catalog .............................................................418
dim_planes_table.txt ...................................................135
dimension lines
reinforcement.......................................................163
dimension marks
reinforcement.......................................................158
dimension point...........................................................228
dimension properties.......................................... 197, 222

dimensioning
automatic............................................................. 133
bolts.............................................................142, 218
combine............................................................... 167
GA drawings........................................................ 230
general arrangement drawings ..184, 185, 186, 221
grids in general arrangement drawings............... 177
grouping .............................................................. 220
manual ................................................................ 133
nested assemblies .............................................. 164
parts ............................................................137, 217
parts in general arrangement drawings.......183, 184
position........................................................145, 219
pre-defined settings............................................. 133
sub-assemblies ................................................... 221
dimensioning properties ............................................. 216
Dimensions
grouping identical objects.................................... 173
dimensions .........................................................204, 211
absolute............................................................... 210
add point ............................................................. 228
all parts................................................................ 227
angle ...........................................................201, 226
appearance ......................................................... 207
closing dimensions......................................159, 163
combine dimension lines..................................... 227
creating using current coordinate system ........... 372
curved ................................................................. 225
curved radial........................................................ 202
format .................................................................. 202
free ...................................................................... 224
horizontal dimension ........................................... 223
marks .................................................................. 211
orthogonal ........................................................... 224
overall.................................................................. 137
parallel................................................................. 224
part dimension position ....................................... 188
perpendicular ...................................................... 224
placing................................................................. 204
position from........................................................ 150
position to............................................................ 147
positioning ........................................................... 151
radius .................................................................. 226
reinforcing bar groups ........................ 157, 159, 161
remove point ....................................................... 228
types............................................................132, 200
vertical dimension ............................................... 224
with orthogonal reference lines ........................... 225
with radial reference lines ................................... 225
x .......................................................................... 223
y .......................................................................... 224
zero point ............................................................ 229

disconnect dimension lines.........................................228

distances between tables ...........................................118
divide ..........................................................................400
dragging
drawing objects ...................................................375
Drawing Editor
select switches ....................................................29
Drawing Editor toolbars ................................................25
drawing filters ...............................................................76
drawing frames ...........................................................413
drawing layout ............................................................113
introduction..........................................................113
drawing list....................................................................42
buttons...................................................................44
drawing objects.................................................. 343, 375
additional .............................................................341
arranging .............................................................374
copying ................................................................376
dragging ..............................................................375
moving.................................................................376
placing .................................................................348
positioning ...........................................................373
reshaping.............................................................375
working with.........................................................370
drawing properties
overview ..............................................................235
drawing property file
adding to Masater Drawing Catalog ......................57
drawing property files ............................................ 49, 57
drawing size................................................................126
defining fixed sizes ..............................................128
definition mode ....................................................126
preferred..................................................... 124, 129
specifying ............................................................127
drawing status flags......................................................46
drawing view properties..............................................330

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

429

drawing views
adding..................................................................379
aligning ................................................................380
arranging .............................................................379
as key plan ..........................................................121
autoscaling ..........................................................123
coordinate system ...............................................247
copying ................................................................382
creating................................................................242
exact scale...........................................................242
individual views....................................................244
linking ..................................................................382
moving .................................................................380
name labels .........................................................255
neighbor part visibility ..........................................243
part orientation.....................................................247
part rotation .........................................................248
placing after updating or cloning..........................383
properties.............................................................241
resizing ................................................................381
rotating.................................................................380
working with.........................................................378

430

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

drawings
assembly drawing ......................................... 32, 101
bolts .....................................................................278
cast unit drawing....................................................35
cast-unit drawing..................................................103
cloning ...................................................................85
closing....................................................................98
common properties ..............................................236
creating ..................................................................48
creating multiple.............................................. 79, 81
creating using cloning templates ...........................64
creating using rule sets..........................................62
creating using saved settings ................................58
editing ..................................................................341
freezing ..................................................................91
general arrangement drawing....................... 35, 104
introduction ............................................................21
issuing....................................................................95
list ..........................................................................42
locking....................................................................91
modifying ...............................................................95
multidrawing.................................................. 36, 105
opening ..................................................................41
part representation...............................................269
printing ........................................................ 412, 414
protection .............................................................238
reinforcement.......................................................282
revising ..................................................................95
saving ....................................................................98
scale ....................................................................123
shortening parts ...................................................254
single-part drawing ....................................... 32, 100
size ......................................................................126
status flags.............................................................46
types ......................................................................32
updating .................................................................93
user-defined attributes .........................................237
using AutoDrawings...............................................80
working with ...........................................................90
DWG/DXF files
as key plan...........................................................122
in drawings...........................................................362
properties.............................................................363

e
edge chamfers
chamfer marks .................................................... 368
color .................................................................... 367
default line color .................................................. 368
default line type ................................................... 368
displaying in drawings ......................................... 364
in drawings .......................................................... 364
line color.............................................................. 364
line type.......................................................364, 367
representation ..................................................... 364
editing
dimensions .......................................................... 133
drawings.............................................................. 341
wizard files ............................................................ 61
elevation dimension.................................................... 155
embedded objects ...................................................... 150
end views ................................................................... 125
erection drawings, see general arrangement drawings 35
exaggerated dimensions ............................................ 209

f
fill types ...................................................................... 347
insulation ............................................................. 358
scaling and rotating ............................................. 358
fixed drawing sizes ..................................................... 128
flags.............................................................................. 46
foldmarks.................................................................... 413
font
in drawings .......................................................... 347
forward offset.............................................................. 173
foundation plan............................................................. 73
frames ........................................................................ 348
in marks............................................................... 298
frames in drawings ..................................................... 413
freezing
drawings................................................................ 91
front views .................................................................. 250

general arrangement drawings............................ 35, 184

anchor bolt plans ...................................................73
cloning ...................................................................83
creating..................................................................72
dimensioning .............176, 177, 183, 185, 186, 221
properties ............................................................104
text tags...............................................................196
GOL ............................................................................144
graphics
adding in drawings ..............................................120
grayscale color .............................................................37
grid label frame s
width ....................................................................323
grid labels ...................................................................323
grid labelsfixed
frame size............................................................323
grids
editing..................................................................322
in drawings ..........................................................320

h
handles .......................................................................375
hatch patterns for surface treatment...........................290
hatch types
modifying .............................................................358
hatch, see fill types .....................................................347
hiding
drawing objects ...................................................377
reinforcing bar lines .............................................284
holding down bolt plan..................................................73
HTML reports..............................................................407
hyperlinks
in drawings ..........................................................353

i
images
adding in drawings ..............................................120
in drawing objects.......................................................345
include 3D view ..........................................................383
include single parts.....................................................246
insulation ....................................................................358
issuing drawings ...........................................................95

GA dimensioning ........................................................ 230

GA, see general arrangement drawings....................... 35
gage ........................................................................... 144

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

431

k
key plan ......................................................................120
inserting to drawing layout...................................122
of drawing view....................................................121
of DWG/DXF file ..................................................122
knock off ............................................................ 166, 213

l
layout ..........................................................................113
introduction ..........................................................113
projection type .....................................................124
leader line .......................................................... 183, 345
in marks ...............................................................301
in part marks........................................................301
in reinforcement marks ........................................302
level marks......................................................... 350, 394
in drawings ..........................................................315
line ..............................................................................384
properties.............................................................343
link dimension lines.....................................................228
linking
drawing views ......................................................382
location .......................................................................117
of drawing views ..................................................124
of end views.........................................................125
of section views ...................................................125
locking
drawings ................................................................91
log files
AutoDrawings wizard.............................................80

m
main part bolt internal dimension................................143
main part bolt position.................................................151
main part skew position ..............................................152
margins .......................................................................115
mark contents .............................................................211

432

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

marks ................................................................. 292, 293

adding templates .................................................298
additional .............................................................350
appearance..........................................................298
bolt mark ..................................................... 295, 335
bolt size element..................................................310
cloning ...................................................................89
connection mark ......................................... 295, 336
leader line ............................................................301
location ................................................................301
merged content....................................................318
merging................................................................316
on dimension line.................................................138
overview...............................................................291
part mark..............................................................294
properties.............................................................334
reinforcement mark..............................................296
splitting.................................................................320
surface treatment mark........................................297
visibility ................................................................299
master drawing ................................................49, 59, 66
catalog properties .....................................57, 60, 63
displaying description ............................................65
removing from Master Drawing Catalog ................69
searching ...............................................................67
Master Drawing Catalog .............. 49, 57, 58, 59, 62, 64
adding cloning templates .......................................62
cloning template.....................................................56
creating folders ......................................................66
deleting folders ......................................................66
displaying master drawing description...................65
editing master drawing properties................... 57, 63
editing rule sets......................................................60
folder view..............................................................66
folders ....................................................................66
moving folders .......................................................66
preview images......................................................65
removing master drawings.....................................69
renaming folders ....................................................66
rule set ...................................................................54
saved settings........................................................54
searching ...............................................................67
selecting displayed master drawings .....................65
showing master drawings from other models ........65
wizard ....................................................................55
wizard files .............................................................61
master drawings
showing from other models....................................65
maximum leader line length ........................................183
maximum number of outside dimensions ...................185
merge direction ...........................................................318

merging ...................................................................... 317

part marks ........................................................... 316
reinforcement marks ........................................... 320
weld symbols....................................................... 282
min distance ............................................................... 170
modifying
drawings................................................................ 95
table layouts ........................................................ 119
moving
drawing objects ................................................... 376
drawing views...................................................... 380
mirror................................................................... 398
rotate ................................................................... 397
moving views to another drawing ................................. 97
multi-drawings
creating ................................................................. 78
multidrawings ............................................................... 36
properties ............................................................ 105

n
neighbor parts in drawing views ................................. 243
nested assemblies
dimensioning ....................................................... 164
numeric snap.............................................................. 373

o
object group.................................................................. 59
object group dimensioning rules................................. 186
object groups
dimensioning rules .............................................. 186
of arcs and circles ...................................................... 348
of drawing objects ...................................................... 343
of tables...................................................................... 118
of tables in table layout............................................... 117
opening
drawings................................................................ 41
orientation................................................................... 247
of plates............................................................... 251
orientation marks........................................................ 274
settings................................................................ 277
orthogonal dimension ................................................. 224
overall dimensions...................................................... 137

p
parallel dimension.......................................................224
part dimensions
position ................................................................188
part mark leader line...................................................301
part mark to dimension line ........................................138
parts
center line type ....................................................273
displaying developed parts in drawings...............256
representation in drawings ..................................269
select in model ......................................................94
pen numbers...............................................................426
pictures
in drawings ..........................................................120
placing ........................................................................204
dimensions ..........................................................204
drawing objects ...................................................348
drawing views after updating or cloning ..............383
plate side marks .........................................................213
creating automatically..........................................215
plates
orientation in drawings ........................................251
plot area......................................................................424
plotdev.bin ..................................................................422
plotter catalog .............................................................422
adding a file printer..............................................418
plotting ........................................................................416
polygon .......................................................................389
polyline .......................................................................388
position dimensions ....................................................145
position to ...................................................................147
positioning dimensions
running dimensions .............................................151
positioning drawing objects ........................................373
preferred dim side.......................................................206
preferred direction of merge .......................................318
preferred scale............................................................123
preferred size..................................................... 124, 129
preview images.............................................................65
creating from cloning templates.............................86
in Master Drawing Catalog ....................................65
print area ....................................................................424
print devices
adding..................................................................423
deleting................................................................426
modifying .............................................................426
setting up.............................................................422
printed drawings
change symbols ....................................................93
printer catalog.............................................................422

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

433

printer catalogs ...........................................................418

printer instances .........................................................418
printing ........................................................................416
color.....................................................................425
device catalog......................................................418
drawings ..............................................................412
multiple sheets.....................................................414
overview ..............................................................401
reports .................................................................401
single drawings....................................................414
to file ....................................................................417
printing options ...........................................................416
product_finishes.dat....................................................290
projection type ............................................................124
properties....................................................................292
protection in drawings.................................................238
pull-outs ......................................................................304

r
radius ..........................................................................348
dimension ............................................................226
RD symbol ..................................................................229
rebar_config.inp ..........................................................305
re-check dimension point............................................229
recognizable distance .................................................174
rectangle .....................................................................384
reference dimensions, see check dimensions ............164
reference models
in drawings ..........................................................369
reference points
in dimensioning embedded objects .....................150
reinforcement
dimension lines....................................................163
dimension marks .................................................158
dimensions ..........................................................157
in drawings ..........................................................282
reinforcement mark leader line ...................................302
reinforcement marks ...................................................317
reinforcement settings for drawings............................305
reinforcements
dimensioning .......................................................221
reinforcing bar groups
dimensions .........................................157, 159, 161
reinforcing bar mark leader line base points
placing automatically ...........................................304
reinforcing bars
hiding lines...........................................................284
relative dimensions .....................................................132
remove dim point circle...............................................229
remove dimension change symbol .............................230

434

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

remove dimension point change symbol.....................230

remove dimension point invalidity symbol...................229
reports
in HTML ...............................................................407
on entire model ....................................................402
on selected drawings ...........................................404
on selected parts .................................................402
options .................................................................411
printing .................................................................401
sequence numbers ..............................................411
viewing.................................................................412
reshaping
drawing objects....................................................375
resizing
drawing objects....................................................375
drawing views ......................................................381
revising drawings ..........................................................95
revision..........................................................................95
revision marks.............................................................396
additional .............................................................350
rotating
drawing views ......................................................380
fill types in drawings.............................................358
rotating plates in drawing ............................................251
rule set ................................................................... 49, 61
adding to Master Drawing Catalog ........................59
definition ................................................................54
rule sets ........................................................................62
editing ....................................................................60
running dimensions
direction ...............................................................151

s
saved settings ..................................................49, 57, 58
definition ................................................................54
editing properties ...................................................57
saving
drawings ................................................................98
scale............................................................................118
alternative ............................................................123
change mode .......................................................124
of drawing views ..................................................123
preferred ..............................................................123
scaling
fill types in drawings.............................................358
links in drawings ..................................................356
text files in drawings ............................................356
searching
in Master Drawing Catalog ....................................67
secondary part bolt internal dimension .......................143

secondary part dimensions ........................................ 149

section mark
view label ............................................................ 297
section view properties............................................... 332
section views .............................................................. 125
adding to drawings .............................................. 259
direction............................................................... 260
direction mark...................................................... 261
label..................................................................... 262
mark .................................................................... 262
orientation mark .................................................. 261
properties ............................................................ 259
symbol................................................................. 262
select switches
in Drawing Editor................................................... 29
selecting
tables to table layout ........................................... 117
selecting objects
in drawings ............................................................ 29
select switches, in Drawing Editor......................... 29
selection filter ............................................................... 29
semi-automatic dimensioning..................................... 230
sequences
in reports ............................................................. 411
set dimension start point ............................................ 229
set dimension zero point ............................................ 229
shape dimensions ...................................................... 139
short dimensions ........................................................ 204
shortening parts.......................................................... 254
showing
drawing objects ................................................... 377
single-part drawings ..................................................... 32
creating ................................................................. 70
properties ............................................................ 100
skew secondary part dimensions ............................... 150
skew secondary position ............................................ 153
spaces ........................................................................ 115
special color ............................................................... 349
specifying
drawing size ........................................................ 127
split ............................................................................. 399
splitting marks ............................................................ 320
standard.fms............................................................... 422
start point.................................................................... 229
surface treatment
hatch patterns ..................................................... 290
in drawings .......................................................... 288
in reports and templates...................................... 410
surfacing.htc ............................................................... 290
symbols
in drawings .......................................................... 351
properties ............................................................ 352
types.................................................................... 352

t
table layouts
defining................................................................116
modifying .............................................................119
table scale ..................................................................118
table transparency ......................................................118
tags.............................................................................211
Template Editor ..........................................................116
template editor............................................................408
reports .................................................................404
templates.............................................................404
template library .............................................................85
templates
adding images .....................................................120
in marks...............................................................298
text..............................................................................390
along line .............................................................392
along line, arrow at end point ..............................392
along line, arrow at start point .............................393
in drawings ..........................................................353
with leader line ....................................................391
text files ......................................................................353
text tags ......................................................................196
toggle orientation ........................................................371
toolbars.........................................................................25
Drawing Editor.......................................................25
transparency...............................................................118
trim..............................................................................398

u
UCS ............................................................................370
creating dimensions ............................................372
unfolding .....................................................................253
unfolding dimensions..................................................141
unlink dimension lines ................................................228
updating
drawings when the model changes .......................93
USabsolute dimensions..............................................132
user coordinate system ..............................................370
user-defined bolt symbols...........................................280
user-defined drawing attributes ..................................237

v
vector between corners ..............................................118
viewing
reports .................................................................412
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

435

views
aligning drawing views.........................................380
arranging drawing views......................................379
cloning dimensions ................................................88
copying drawing views.........................................382
creating drawing views ........................................242
in drawings ..........................................................241
linking drawing views...........................................382
moving drawing views .........................................380
resizing drawing views.........................................381
rotating drawing views .........................................380
section views .............................................. 259, 332

welds in drawings
marks ...................................................................312
symbols................................................................312
wizard
definition ................................................................55
wizard files
editing in Master Drawing Catalog.........................61
wizards
cloning ...................................................................81
work point........................................................... 147, 164
workshop drawings
see assembly drawings .........................................32
see single-part drawings........................................32

weld marks......................................................... 350, 394

weld symbols ..............................................................312
merging................................................................282
welds
drawing properties ...............................................281
in drawings ..........................................................281

x dimension.................................................................223

y
y dimension.................................................................224

436

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15